Read econs_decision_science_10.pdf text version

& Decision Science

Economics

2010

M c g r aw - h i l l 2 0 1 0 c a t a l o g

Welcome to McGraw-Hill's 2010 Economics & Decision Science Catalog. Inside this catalog, you will find a wide selection of McGraw-Hill latest academic publications. Apart from those published from the US, we have also included publications from Asia as well as from our subsidiaries in Australia, India and United Kingdom. For the benefit of students, widely adopted textbooks are made available as low-priced McGraw-Hill International Editions (see titles in this catalog tagged with "International Edition").

EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST

Teaching professionals who wish to consider McGraw-Hill titles for textbook adoption may request for an examination copy for review. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia (Note: All requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserves the right to refuse any requests that do not relate to teaching).

HOW TO ORDER

McGraw-Hill books and International Editions are easily available through your local bookstores. In case of difficulty in purchasing our publications, please contact the local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover) or send your orders to: McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel: (65) 6863 1580 Tel: (65) 6868 8188 (Customer Service Hotline) Fax: (65) 6862 3354 Email: [email protected] A NotE to LibrAriANS Please place your orders through your regular local Library Supplier/Contractor. For further assistance, kindly contact your local McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) representative.

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is continuously sourcing for quality manuscript for the academic and professional markets in Asia for inclusion in our global publishing program. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email us directly in Singapore at [email protected] if you are planning to write a book.

MAILING LIST

If you wish to receive up-to-date information on McGraw-Hill's new publications regularly, please submit your particulars on the mailing list form (see back pages) and return to us by fax or mail.

Cover design images©istockphoto.com

CONTENTS Economics

Advanced Macroeconomics .............................................. 52 Advanced Microeconomics.................................................53 Asian Economics ............................................................... 55 Developmental Economics ................................................ 53 Econometrics ..................................................................... 42 Economics for Business .................................................... 33 Economics Issues...............................................................33 Environmental Economics ................................................. 41 Intermediate Macroeconomics ...........................................36 Intermediate Microeconomics.............................................37 International Economics .................................................... 46 Labor Economics ............................................................... 48 Managerial Economics .......................................................39 Mathematical Economics................................................... 44 Money and Banking ........................................................... 45 Principles of Economics - Supplementary .......................... 16 Principles of Economics - Textbooks ....................................9 Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks ........................ 18 Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks.......................... 25 Professional References ................................................... 56 Public Finance ................................................................... 50 Regional Economics .......................................................... 54 Survey of Economics ..........................................................30 Urban Economics ...............................................................50

Operations/Decision Sciences

Business/Systems Dynamics .............................................61 Data Mining ........................................................................79 Introductory Operations Management ................................ 61 Management Science Text .................................................67 Operation Management Software.......................................67 Operation Management Supplement..................................66 Operation Research ...........................................................79 Operations Strategy............................................................72 Production/Inventory Control ..............................................69 Professional References ....................................................80 Project Management ..........................................................70 Purchasing and Supply Chain Management ...................... 74 Quality Control/Management ..............................................73 Service Operations Management .......................................74 Upper Level Operations Management................................ 69

Business Statistics

Business Forecasting .........................................................96 Business Research Method................................................96 Business Statistics - Supplements .....................................94 Business Statistics - Textbook ............................................87 Linear Statistics / Regression .............................................97 Others .................................................................................98

Business Math

Business Math ..................................................................101 Business Math Supplements ............................................103

Indexes

Author Indexes ................................................................ 111 Title Indexes .....................................................................105

1

CONTENTS

2

Your Partner in Test Generation

Imaginebeingabletocreateandaccessyourtestanywhere,atanytimewithoutinstallingthetesting software.Now,withthenewestreleaseofEZTestOnline,instructorscanselectquestionsfrommultiple McGraw-Hilltestbanks,authortheirownandtheneitherprintthetestforpaperdistributionorgiveitonline.

Features and Functions n Test Creation n Online Test Management n Online Scoring and Reporting n EZTestisdesignedtomakeitsimpleforyoutoselectquestionsfromMcGraw-Hilltestbanks.Youcan useasingleMcGraw-Hilltestbank,oreasilychoosequestionsfrommultipleMcGraw-Hilltestbanks. n n EZTestsupportstheuseoffollowingquestiontypes: nTrueorFalse nFillIntheBlank nShortAnswer nYesorNo nNumericResponse nSurvey nMultipleChoice nMatching nEssay nCheckAllThatApply nRanking Usesvariablestocreatealgorithmicquestionsforanyquestiontype.

n Youcancreatemultipleversionsofthesametest. n Youcanscramblequestionstocreatedifferentversionsofyourtest. n AutomatedscoringformostofEZtest'snumerousquestionstypes. How do you get it? Tolearnifitisavailablewithyourbook,contactyourlocalMcGraw-HillEducationRepresentatives [email protected]

L ES S MA N A G IN G . M OR E T E A C H IN G . GR E AT E R L E A R N IN G .

What is Connect?

McGraw-Hill ConnectTM is an online assignment and assessment solution that connects your students with the tools and resources they'll need to achieve success. With Connect, enjoy simple course management so you can spend less time administering and more time teaching. You'll have access to rich course resources and tools that drive performance like never before.

Connect Features:

McGraw-Hill Connect offers a number of powerful tools and features to make managing assignments easier, so you can spend more time teaching. With Connect, students can engage with their coursework anytime and anywhere, making the learning process more accessible and efficient. Simple assignment management With Connect, creating assignments is easier than ever, so you can spend more time teaching and less time managing. Smart grading When it comes to studying, time is precious. Connect helps students learn more efficiently by providing feedback and practice material when they need it, where they need it. Personalized Diagnostic and Learning Plan ­ LearnSmart Personal learning Plan assess students understanding of key concepts with diagnostics and adaptive questions; then tailor coaching and practice materials to each student's skills and knowledge gaps ConnectPlus eBooks Connect reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student. Every Connect subject area is seamlessly integrated with ConnectPlus eBooks, which are designed to keep students focused on the concepts key to their success.

Connect is available for Accounting, Business Statistics, Economics, Finance, Management, Marketing and Operations Management courses. To learn more about Connect, go to www.mcgraw-hillconnect.com or contact your local representative.

BSG and GLO-BUS are Fun, Easy, and Effective

BSG and GLO-BUS are two strategy simulations giving students a competitive advantage.

Used by more than 600 schools around the world and played by more than 450,000 students, BSG and GLO-BUS are well accepted strategy simulations used by numerous educational institutions worldwide. Incorporating a strategy simulation like BSG or GLO-BUS in a course is an effective and powerful way for students to learn how to apply and use core concepts covered in the text chapters. Professors who teach strategy courses are finding that simulations are every bit as effective as case analysis in providing students a means of applying what they have read about in the text chapters.

The Business Strategy Game (BSG) is McGraw-Hill/Irwin's online strategy simulation modeled around athletic footwear industry.

www.bsg-online.com

GLO-BUS is McGraw-Hill/Irwin's online strategy simulation modeled around digital camera industry.

www.glo-bus.com

Take a Virtual Tour and Demo NOW! Visit http://www.mhhe.com/irwin/BSG_Glo-Bus/

www.blackboard.com

/

www.webct.com

course management systems

Course Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer you another way to integrate digital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGrawHill Online Learning Center content is formatted to save you hours of computer inputting.

How instructors use it

Load McGraw-Hill content into your platform and you will have a fully populated course online. You can then customize the content to match your syllabus. You will also be able to assign specific exercises, quizzes, or readings to your students. Grades are posetd automatically to let you know how students are doing as a whole, or individually. Built-in communication allows you to conduct live chats, oversee bulletin board topics, and e-mail students who might need more help than others.

How students use it

Students can visit your online course via the Internet to check the coursework you have assigned. The platform will record the students' progress through your course, which will enable you to see where they are studying most. Self-grading quizzes also indicate exactly where students need further review. The platform's communicaiton system encourages student collaboration with features such as live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletin boards, or traditional e-mail.

NEW TITLES

ECONOMICS

2011

Managerial Economics, 10e

Author

Thomas

ISBN

9780073375915

Page

39

ECONOMICS

2010

International Economics, 7e The Economics of European Integration, 3e [UK] Managerial Economics & Business Strategy, 7e Economics for Business, 3e [UK] Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Labor Economics, 5e Essentials of Economics, 2e Chinese Economy [Asian] An Everyday Guide to Economic Statistics, 7e Economics, 8e Macroeconomics, 8e Microeconomics, 8e Annual Editions: Economics, 35e Development Economics [UK] Microeconomics and Behavior, 8e Principles of Economics [Asia Adaptation] Issues in Economics Today, 5e Essentials of Econometrics, 4e Contemporary Labor Economics, 9e Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Microeconomics, Brief Edition Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Public Finance, 9e Economics, 19e Macroeconomics, 19e Microeconomics, 19e The Economy Today, 12e The Macro Economy Today, 12e The Micro Economy Today, 12e Economics of Social Issues, 19e Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics, 2e [UK]

Author

Appleyard Baldwin Baye Begg Begg Bonello Borjas Brue Cai/Lin Clayton Colander Colander Colander Cole Forsyth Frank Frank Guell Gujarati McConnell McConnell McConnell Morgan Rosen Samuelson Samuelson Samuelson Schiller Schiller Schiller Sharp Sorensen

ISBN

9780073511344 9780077121631 9780073375960 9780077124731 9780077121884 9780073527307 9780073511368 9780073511313 9780071232067 9780073523194 9780073375885 9780077247171 9780077247164 9780073528564 9780077114534 9780073375946 9780071282840 9780073375939 9780073375847 9780073375953 9780077230975 9780077230982 9780077121778 9780073511351 9780073511290 9780073344225 9780073344232 9780073375892 9780077247409 9780077247416 9780073511337 9780077117863

Page

46 54 39 33 31 33 48 9, 30 55 16 10 18 25 17, 34 53 37 13 34 42 49 20 26 38 50 11 21 27 12 21 27 35 52

3

NEW TITLES

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

2011

Introduction to Management Science, 4e MH Operations Management Video Series: Volume 17 DVD, 13e Operations and Supply Management, 13e Project Management: The Managerial Process, 5e Purchasing and Supply Management, 14e Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 5e Managing Operations Across the Supply Chain Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management, 6e

Author

Hillier Jacobs Jacobs Larson Leenders Schroeder Swink Vollmann

ISBN

9780077400309 9780077327385 9780073525228 9780073403342 9780073377896 9780073403380 9780073403311 9780073377827

Page

67 66 61 70 74 61 61 69

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

2010

Purchasing and Supply Management, 2e Supply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Managing Projects: A TeamBased Approach with Student CD Supply Management, 8e Production and Operations Management, 4e [India] Operations Management [UK] Total Quality Management, 2e [India] Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Operations and Supply Management: The Core, 2e Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Supply Chain Management for Retailing [India] Operations Management in Asia [Asian]

Author

Benton Bowersox Brown Burt Chary Davis Gupta Hillier Jacobs Leong Ray Stevenson/Sum

ISBN

9780073525198 9780073377872 9780077356453 9780073381459 9780070091535 9780077117856 9780070153646 9780077298340 9780073403335 9780071275965 9780070145047 9780071270625

Page

74 75 70 76 63 62 73 79 62 67 76 63

4

NEW TITLES

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2011

Business Statistics in Practice, 6e Applied Statistics in Business and Economics, 3e Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 7e

Author

Bowerman Doane Lind

ISBN

9780073401836 9780073373690 9780077384470

Page

87 87 87

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2010

Essentials of Business Statistics, 3e Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e Basic Statistics using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance [UK] Business Statistics and Operations Research, 2e [India]

Author

Bowerman Doane Lind

ISBN

9780077323134 9780073373652 9780077270018

Page

87 88 94

Lind Nieuwenhuis Rajagopalan

9780073401768 9780077109875 9780070085206

89 92 94

BUSINESS MATH

2011

Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Brief Edition Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e

Author

Slater

ISBN

9780077362362

Page

101

Slater

9780077362355

101

BUSINESS MATH

2010

Introductory Mathematics and Statistics for Business, 5e [Aust] Business Mathematics, 2e [India]

Author

Croucher Rajagopalan

ISBN

9780070284890 9780070080508

Page

101 102

5

NEW TITLES

6

Advanced Macroeconomics .............................................................................. 52 Advanced Microeconomics.................................................................................53 Asian Economics ............................................................................................... 55 Developmental Economics ................................................................................ 53 Econometrics ..................................................................................................... 42 Economics for Business .................................................................................... 33 Economics Issues...............................................................................................33 Environmental Economics ................................................................................. 41 Intermediate Macroeconomics ...........................................................................36 Intermediate Microeconomics.............................................................................37 International Economics .................................................................................... 46 Labor Economics ............................................................................................... 48 Managerial Economics .......................................................................................39 Mathematical Economics................................................................................... 44 Money and Banking ........................................................................................... 45 Principles of Economics - Supplementary ..........................................................16 Principles of Economics - Textbooks ....................................................................9 Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks ........................................................18 Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks..........................................................25 Professional References ................................................................................... 56 Public Finance ................................................................................................... 50 Regional Economics .......................................................................................... 54 Survey of Economics ..........................................................................................30 Urban Economics ...............................................................................................50

ECONOMICS

7

NEW TITLES

ECONOMICS

2011

Managerial Economics, 10e

Author

Thomas

ISBN

9780073375915

Page

39

ECONOMICS

2010

International Economics, 7e The Economics of European Integration, 3e [UK] Managerial Economics & Business Strategy, 7e Economics for Business, 3e [UK] Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Labor Economics, 5e Essentials of Economics, 2e Chinese Economy [Asian] An Everyday Guide to Economic Statistics, 7e Economics, 8e Macroeconomics, 8e Microeconomics, 8e Annual Editions: Economics, 35e Development Economics [UK] Microeconomics and Behavior, 8e Principles of Economics [Asia Adaptation] Issues in Economics Today, 5e Essentials of Econometrics, 4e Contemporary Labor Economics, 9e Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Microeconomics, Brief Edition Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Public Finance, 9e Economics, 19e Macroeconomics, 19e Microeconomics, 19e The Economy Today, 12e The Macro Economy Today, 12e The Micro Economy Today, 12e Economics of Social Issues, 19e Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics, 2e [UK]

Author

Appleyard Baldwin Baye Begg Begg Bonello Borjas Brue Cai/Lin Clayton Colander Colander Colander Cole Forsyth Frank Frank Guell Gujarati McConnell McConnell McConnell Morgan Rosen Samuelson Samuelson Samuelson Schiller Schiller Schiller Sharp Sorensen

ISBN

9780073511344 9780077121631 9780073375960 9780077124731 9780077121884 9780073527307 9780073511368 9780073511313 9780071232067 9780073523194 9780073375885 9780077247171 9780077247164 9780073528564 9780077114534 9780073375946 9780071282840 9780073375939 9780073375847 9780073375953 9780077230975 9780077230982 9780077121778 9780073511351 9780073511290 9780073344225 9780073344232 9780073375892 9780077247409 9780077247416 9780073511337 9780077117863

Page

46 54 39 33 31 33 48 9, 30 55 16 10 18 25 17, 34 53 37 13 34 42 49 20 26 38 50 11 21 27 12 21 27 35 52

8

ECONOMICS

Principles of Economics - Textbooks

· ·

New

International Edition

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

*9780073511313*

Updated and expanded discussion of elasticity to include income elasticity, with an example of how it can help predict which products will fall off in demand more than others during recessions. Up-to-date discussions and examples, such as: climate change policies, ethanol subsidies and their myriad impacts, the most rapidly expanding and disappearing U.S. jobs, the mortgage debt crisis, the sharp business downturn of late 2007 and 2008, the Fed term auction facility, recent Fed monetary policy, the stimulus package of 2008, the additions of countries to the European Union and the euro zone, changes in exchange rates, and many more.

CoNteNts PART ONE: Introduction 1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices Appendix: Graphs and Their Meaning 2 The Market System and the Circular Flow PART TWO: Price, Quantity, and Efficiency 3 Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 4 Elasticity of Demand and Supply 5 Public Goods and Externalities PART THREE: Product Markets 6 Businesses and Their Costs 7 Pure Competition 8 Pure Monopoly 9 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly PART FOUR: Resource Markets 10 Wage Determination 11 Income Inequality and Poverty PART FIVE: GDP, Growth and Instability 12 GDP and Economic Growth 13 Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation 14 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 15 Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt PART SIX: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy 16 Money and Banking 17 Monetary Policy PART SEVEN: International Economics 18 International Trade and Exchange Rates

By Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University, Campbell R McConnell, University of NebraskaLincoln and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College

2010 (January 2009) / 528 pages ISBN: 9780073511313 ISBN: 9780070172661 [IE]

http://www.brue2e.com

Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles of Economics text, Brue, McConnell, and Flynn have revised their one-semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This 18-chapter textbook utilizes clear and careful language along with pedagogy and topic discussion suited to the needs of one-semester course.. Brue/McConnell/Flynn is a patient, substantive treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester course with many up-to-date, motivating examples. New to this editioN McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics. McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · · · · · · · · · · · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Tegrity Reorganized and recast macro section in terms of the modern, dominant paradigm of macroeconomics, using economic growth as the central backdrop and viewing business fluctuations as arising from demand and supply shocks in conjunction with short-run price and wage stickiness. A new set of 26 Worked Problems, identified by icons in the book margins and available at the book's Web site. A new appendix to the supply and demand chapter providing concrete examples of changes in demand, changes in supply, changes in both, as well as situations in which pre-set prices can result in shortages or surpluses available on the Brue/McConnell/Flynn Essentials Web site.

ComplimeNtary Copies

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

· ·

9

ECONOMICS

New

*9780073375885*

International Edition

ECONOMICS 8th Edition

By David Colander, Middlebury College

CoNteNts Part 1 Introduction: Thinking Like an Economist Chapter 1 Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2 The Production Possibility Model, Trade, and Globalization Chapter 3 Economic Institutions Chapter 4 Supply and Demand Chapter 5 Using Supply and Demand Chapter 6 Thinking Like a Modern Economist Part 2: Microeconomics I. The Power of Traditional Economic Models Chapter 7 Describing Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 8 Taxation and Government Intervention Chapter 9 International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing II. Choice and Decision-Making Chapter 10 The Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand Chapter 11 Game Theory, Strategic Decision Making, and Behavioral Economics III. Production and Cost Analysis Chapter 12 Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 13 Production and Cost Analysis II IV. Market Structure Chapter 14 Perfect Competition Chapter 15 Monopoly Chapter 16 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly V. Real-World Competition Chapter 17 Real-World Competition and Technology Chapter 18 Antitrust Policy and Regulation VI. Factor Markets Chapter 19 Work and the Labor Market Chapter 19W Nonwage and Asset Income: Rents, Profits, and Interest Chapter 20 Who Gets What? The Distribution of Income VII. Applying Economic Reasoning to Policy Chapter 21 Market Failure versus Government Failure Chapter 21W Politics and Economics: The Case of Agricultural Markets Chapter 22 Behavioral Economics and Modern Economic Policy Chapter 23 Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Beyond Part 3: Macroeconomics I. Macroeconomic Problems Chapter 24 Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 25 Measuring the Aggregate Economy II. The Macroeconomic Framework Chapter 26 Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 27 The Aggregate Demand/Aggregate Supply Model Chapter 28 The Multiplier Model Chapter 29 Thinking Like a Modern Macroeconomist III. Finance, Money, and the Economy Chapter 30 The Financial Sector and the Economy Chapter 31 Monetary Policy Chapter 32 Financial Crises, Panics, and Macroeconomic Policy Chapter 33 Inflation and the Phillips Curve IV. Taxes, Budgets, and Fiscal Policy Chapter 34 Deficits and Debt Chapter 35 The Modern Fiscal Policy Dilemma V. International Policy Issues Chapter 36 International Financial Policy Chapter 37 Macro Policy in a Global Setting Chapter 38 Macro Policies in Developing Countries

2010 (September 2009) / 960 pages ISBN: 9780073375885 ISBN: 9780070165588 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/colander8e

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles ofEconomicstextbookdoesnotsacrificeintellectualdepthinitsquest for accessibility. The author's primary concern is to instill "economic sensibility" in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. Distinguishing features found within Colander's text are: · · · · · · Cutting Edge and Modern Colloquial Style Narrative Focus on Policy Emphasis on the Importance of Institutions and History Focus on Modeling: Economics is a method of reasoning, not truths. Presents Alternative Perspectives in Economics Emphasis on Importance of Institutions and History McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics Selected Changes by Chapter Chapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 6: Thinking like a Modern Economist Chapter 22: Behavioral Economic Policy Chapter 27: The Aggregate Demand/Aggregate Supply Model Chapter 28: The Mulitplier Model Chapter 29: Thinking Like a Modern Macroeconomist Chapter 30: The Financial Sector and the Demand for Money Chapter 31: Monetary Policy Chapter 32: Financial Crises, Panics, and Macroeconomic Policy Chapter 34: Deficits and Debt Chapter 35: The Modern Fiscal Policy Dilemma Changes Common to All Chapters Common Features Available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Student Study Center Pre-Built Assignments Tegrity Alternative Perspectives

New to this editioN · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·

10

ECONOMICS

New

International Edition

ECONOMICS 19th Edition

*9780073511290*

·improvedexplanationofthemonetarytransmissionmechanismfor theopeneconomywithflexiblerates(Ch.28) Data updated throughout: The authors have worked carefully to update data throughout the book with the very latest economic information. CoNteNts PART ONE BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 The Central Concepts of Economics Chapter 2 The Modern Mixed Economy Chapter 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand PART TWO MICROECONOMICS: SUPPLY, DEMAND, AND PRODUCT MARKETS Chapter 4 Supply and Demand: Elasticity and Applications Chapter 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Chapter 6 Production and Business Organization Chapter 7 Analysis of Costs Chapter 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets Chapter 9 Imperfect Competition and Monopoly Chapter 10 Competition Among the Few Chapter 11 Economics of Uncertainty PART THREE. FACTOR MARKETS: LABOR, LAND, AND CAPITAL Chapter 12 How Markets Determine Incomes Chapter 13 The Labor Market Chapter 14 Land, Natural Resources, and the Environment Chapter 15 Capital, Interest, and Profits PART FOUR. APPLICATIONS OF ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES Chapter 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure Chapter 17 Efficiency vs. Equality: The Big Tradeoff Chapter 18 International Trade PART FIVE. MACROECONOMICS: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND BUSINESS CYCLES Chapter 19 Overview of Macroeconomics Chapter 20 Measuring Economic Activity Chapter 21 Consumption and Investment Chapter 22 Business Cycles and Aggregate Demand Chapter 23 Money and Financial Markets Chapter 24 Monetary Policy and the Economy PART SIX. GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, AND THE GLOBAL ECONOMY Chapter 25 Economic Growth Chapter 26 The Challenge of Economic Development Chapter 27 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System Chapter 28 Open-Economy Macroeconomics PART SEVEN. UNEMPLOYMENT, INFLATION, AND ECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 29 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply Chapter 30 Inflation Chapter 31 The Frontiers of Macroeconomics

By Paul A Samuelson, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and William D Nordhaus, Yale University

2010 (April 2009) / 744 pages ISBN: 9780073511290 ISBN: 9780071263832 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/samuelson19e

Samuelson's text was first published in 1948, and it immediately became the authority for the principles of economics courses. The book continues to be the standard-bearer for principles courses, and this revision continues to be a clear, accurate, and interesting introduction to modern economics principles. Bill Nordhaus is now the primary author of this text, and he has revised the book to be as current and relevant as ever. New to this editioN Superior coverage of capital, interest and profits. Chapter 15: Capital, Interest and Profits, has been combined from the previous edition's section on the theory of capital (chapter 14) and interest rates (Chapter 25) to be a more coherent chapter that starts with the concepts of rates of return, present value, and interest rates, then presents the basic theory of capital. Updated view of financial markets and monetary policy. Chapter 23: Money and Financial Markets, has been thoroughly rewritten to move from quantitative thinking about the role of the money supply toward the new "channel" view in which the Fed sets interest rates on the basis of objectives, particularly in the section on banking. Chapter 24: Central Banking and Monetary Policy, also makes the transition from the monetary-quantitative world to the new interest-rate world, and includes new diagrams to explain the monetary-transmission mechanism. Content updated throughout: The 19th edition contains new and updated discussion and topics throughout. Some of these additions of current coverage include: ·gasolinetaxesandrationing(Ch.4) ·executivecompensation(Ch.6) ·thecostofthewarinIraq(Ch.7) ·housingandlossaversion(Ch.9) ·publicpoliciestowardmonopolisticabuses,includingreviseddiscussions of regulation and antitrust policies (Ch. 10) ·anewsectiononinsurance(Ch.11) ·Stolper-Samuelsontheory(Ch.18) ·adiscussionoffinancialdisturbancesandbusinesscycles(Ch.22) ·adiagramwiththepovertytrap,whichshowsanimportantexample of multiple equilibria (Ch. 26) · a diagram presenting spreads on emerging market securities to emphasizetheroleoffinancialglobalization(Ch.26)

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

11

ECONOMICS

New

*9780073375892*

International Edition

· · · · · · · · · · · ·

Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Student Study Center Pre-Built Assignments Tegrity Updated Examples and Applications Chapter 12: Ch. 12, Deficits, Surpluses, and Debt, is re-titled as Deficits and Debt to acknowledge the current economy, given that no budget surpluses are in sight. It also includes a new focus on deficit implications of the Obama stimulus program. Student Problem Set: The new design of the 12e now places the end-of-chapter problem sets immediately after each chapter for added application and reference. GDP streamlined: Ch. 2 includes a streamlined description of GDP for better understanding, and Ch. 5 has clarified the explanation of Real GDP calculations so that students are better able to grasp and apply the concepts. Integrated Chapter 18 Global Macro: The material, key concepts, and learning objectives of 11e's Chapter 18 Global Macro have been integrated into other chapters of the text to streamline concepts of the open and closed economy and fiscal and monetary policy affecting U.S. macro outcomes.

THE ECONOMY TODAY 12th Edition

By Bradley Schiller 2010 (September 2009) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780073375892 ISBN: 9780070165595 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/schiller12e

Brad Schiller's text, The Economy Today, 12e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues, and every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. Schiller teaches economics in a relevant context, filling his chapters with the real facts and applications of economic life. Schiller is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. New to this editioN The Great Recession of 2008-09: The economic downturn over the past year has caused a lot of change, as well as increased interest in economics, especially macroeconomics. As a result, The Economy Today has been thoroughly revised to address the realities of the current economic climate. Schiller has always emphasized the problems associated with short-run instability; the recent GDP contraction not only re-invigorated both student and faculty interest in business cycles, but provided scores of fresh illustrations of cyclical forces and policy responses. The Obama Presidency: The new "Economist in Chief" has changed the tone and substance of economic policy. Almost every chapter in The Economy Today refers to the goals and choices associated with the Obama administration, and Congressional Budget Office analyses of Obama's 2009 stimulus package enliven the fiscal policy debate. Market vs. Government: While the debate about markets vs. government has always been a central theme of The Economy Today, the recent economic crisis has brought a resurgence of attention to the basic choice between market reliance and government intervention. In the very first chapter, the concepts of both market failure and government failure are introduced and discussed, and in every subsequent chapter the debate is continued. "The Economy Tomorrow" feature at the end of every chapter challenges students to apply the markets vs. government options to specific policy issues. There are no right or wrong answers. The goal of The Economy Today is instead to expose students to the central debates in economic theory and policy ­ and challenge them to think about these debates analytically. McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics · ·

·

CoNteNts Part 1 The Economic Challenge Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Role of Government Part 2 Measuring Macro Outcomes Chapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 6 Unemployment Chapter 7 Inflation Part 3 Cyclical Instability Chapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate Demand Appendix: The Keynesian Cross Chapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability? Part 4 Fiscal Policy Tools Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits and Debt Part 5 Monetary Policy Options Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 15 Monetary Policy Part 6 Supply-Side Options Chapter 16 Supply-Side Policy: Short-run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: Long-run Possibilities Part 7 Policy Constraints Chapter 18 Theory versus Reality Part 8 Product Markets: The Basics Chapter 19 Consumer Demand Appendix: Indifference Curves Chapter 20 The Costs of Production Part 9 Market Structure Chapter 21 The Competitive Firm Chapter 22 Competitive Markets Chapter 23 Monopoly Chapter 24 Oligopoly Chapter 25 Monopolistic Competition Part 10 Regulatory Issues Chapter 26 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 27 Environmental Protection Chapter 28 The Farm Problem

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · · · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap.

12

ECONOMICS

Part 11 Factor Markets: Basic Theory Chapter 29 The Labor Market Chapter 30 Labor Unions Chapter 31 Financial Markets Part 12 Distributional Issues Chapter 32 Taxes: Equity versus Efficiency Chapter 33 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social Security Part 13 International Economics Chapter 34 International Trade Chapter 35 International Finance Chapter 36 Global Poverty Ch 17 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 18 Wages and Unemployment Part VI The Economy in the Long Run Ch 19 Economic Growth Ch 20 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 21 The Financial System, Money, and Prices Part VII The Economy in the Short Run Ch 22 Short-Term Fluctuations Ch 23 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 24 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 25 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 26 Macroeconomic Policy Part VIII The International Economy Ch 27 Exchange Rates and the Open Economy Ch 28 International Trade and Capital Flows Glossary

International Edition

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2009 (August 2008) / 928 pages ISBN: 9780073402888 ISBN: 9780077354299 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780071285421 [IE]

New

*9780071282840*

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University

http://www.mhhe.com/fb4e

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages,andotherfieldshaveachieveddramaticpedagogicalgainsby abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best throughout, and the best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. Frank/Bernanke also encourages students to become "Economic Naturalists," by employing basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of theireconomiclandscapeasthereflectionofanimplicitorexplicit cost-benefitcalculation. CoNteNts Part I Introduction Ch 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and Demand Part II Competition and the Invisible Hand Ch 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency and Exchange Ch 8 The Invisible Hand in Action Part III Market Imperfections Ch 9 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 10 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 11 Externalities and Property Rights Ch 12 The Economics of Information Part IV Economics of Public Policy Ch 13 Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution Ch 14 The Environment, Health, and Safety Ch 15 Public Goods and Tax Policy Part V Macroeconomics: Data and Issues Ch 16 Spending, Income, and GDP

2009 (July 2009) / 928 pages ISBN: 9780071282840

(An Asia Adaptation)

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and economists, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. By far the best thought out and best executed principles text in this mold, Principles of Economics avoids excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations and presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The text also encourages students to become Economic Naturalists : people who employ basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of theireconomiclandscapeasthereflectionofanimplicitorexplicit cost-benefitcalculation.ThisnewAsianeditionofPrinciplesofEconomics is targeted at undergraduate students in Asia. Adapted from the very successful third and fourth U.S. editions by well-established economics researchers and lecturers, Chen Kang and Lydia Gan, the text draws on examples and cases from Asian regions and countries in highlighting the key institutional, political and cultural differences between Asian economies and the economies in the developed world. It discusses Asian developing economies and the economic challenges and policy tools unique to them, as well as Asian transition economies such as China and Vietnam. It also highlights the special features that characterize the conduct of monetary policies of Asian central banks. Combined with several pedagogical improvements, the result is an adaptation that is motivating to Asian students, an effectivetextforteaching,andanexcitingfirstcourseinEconomics. CoNteNts Preface Part 1: Introduction 1. Thinking Like an Economist 2. Comparative Advantage: The Basis for Exchange

13

ECONOMICS

3. Supply and Demand: An Introduction Part 2: Competition and the Invisible Hand 4. Elasticity 5. Demand: The Benefit Side of the Market 6. Perfectly Competitive Supply: The Cost Side of the Market 7. Efficiency and Exchange 8. The Quest for Profit and the Invisible Hand Part 3: Market Imperfections 9. Monopoly and Other Forms of Imperfect Competition 10. Strategic Choice in Oligopoly, Monopolistic Competition, and Everyday Life 11. Externalities and Property Rights 12. The Economies of Information Part 4: Economics of Public Policy 13. Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution 14. The Environment, Health, and Safety 15. Public Goods and Tax Policy Part 5: Macroeconomics: Data and Issues 16. Spending, Income, and GDP 17. Inflation and the Price Level 18. Wages and Unemployment Part 6: The Economy in the Long Run 19. Economic Growth 20. Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets 21. The Financial System, Money, and Prices Part 7: The Economy in the Short Run 22. Short-Term Economic Fluctuations 23. Spending and Output in the Short Run 24. Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve 25. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 26. Macroeconomic Policy Part 8: The International Economy 27. Exchange Rates and the Open Economy 28. International Trade and Capital Flows Glossary Index Ch 3 Supply and Demand Part II Competition and the Invisible Hand Ch 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency, Exchange, and the Invisible Hand in Action Part III Market Imperfections Ch 8 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 9 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 10 Externalities and Property Rights Part IV Economics of Public Policy Ch 11 Using Economics to Make Better Policy Choices Part V Macroeconomics: Data and Issues Ch 12 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 13 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 14 Wages and Unemployment Part VI The Economy in the Long Run Ch 15 Economic Growth Ch 16 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 17 The Financial System, Money, and Prices Part VII The Economy in the Short Run Ch 18 Short-Term Economic Fluctuations Ch 19 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 20 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 21 Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Macroeconomic Policy Part VIII The International Economy Ch 22 Exchange Rates, International Trade, and Capital Flows

International Edition

ECONOMICS 18th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University, Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College 2009 (October 2008) / 832 pages ISBN: 9780073375694 ISBN: 9780077354213 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780070091917 [IE]

International Edition

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS Brief Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2009 (September 2008) / 528 pages ISBN: 9780073375878 ISBN: 9780077354329 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780071285384 [IE]

http://www.mcconnell18e.com

McConnell and Brue's Economics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Economics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. The 18th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership by sticking to 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essential for understandingtheeconomizingproblem,specificeconomicissues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. CoNteNts Part 1: Introduction to Economics and the Economy Chapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix) Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Chapter 3: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Appendix) Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors Chapter 5: The United States in the Global Economy Part 2: Microeconomics of Product Markets Chapter 6: Elasticity, Consumer Surplus, and Producer Surplus Chapter 7: Consumer Behavior (+ Appendix) Chapter 8: The Costs of Production Chapter 9: Pure Competition Chapter 10: Pure Monopoly Chapter 11: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly (+ Appendix) Chapter 11W: Technology, R&D, and Efficiency Part 3: Microeconomics of Resource Markets

http://www.mhhe.com/fbbrief1e

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages, and other fields have achieved dramatic pedagogical gains by abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two wellrespected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. The BRIEF editions were developed for instructors who appreciate the Frank & Bernanke approach, but desire a more manageable amount of content and slightly less rigor. In the brief editions, the authors made careful choices of material to eliminate and condense, in order to produce of more concise covereage. CoNteNts Part I Introduction Ch 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage

14

ECONOMICS

Chapter 12: The Demand for Resources Chapter 13: Wage Determination (+ Appendix) Chapter 14: Rent, Interest, and Profit Chapter 15: Natural Resource and Energy Economics Part 4: Microeconomics of Government Chapter 16: Government and Market Failure Chapter 17: Public Choice Theory and the Economics of Taxation Part 5: Microeconomic Issues and Policies Chapter 18: Antitrust Policy and Regulation Chapter 19: Agriculture: Economics and Policy Chapter 20: Income Inequality, Discrimination, and Poverty Chapter 21: Health Care Chapter 22: Immigration Part 6: GDP, Growth, and Instability Chapter 23: Introduction to Macroeconomics Chapter 24: Measuring Domestic Output and National Income Chapter 25: Economic Growth Chapter 26: Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Part 7: Macroeconomic Models and Fiscal Policy Chapter 27: Basic Macroeconomic Relationships Chapter 28: The Aggregate Expenditures Model Chapter 29: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply (+ Appendix) Chapter 30: Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt Part 8: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy Chapter 31: Money and Banking Chapter 32: Money Creation Chapter 33: Interest Rates and Monetary Policy Chapter 34: Financial Economics Part 9: Extensions and Issues Chapter 35: Extending the Analysis of Aggregate Supply Chapter 36: Current Issues in Macro Theory and Policy Part 10: International Economics Chapter 37: International Trade Chapter 38: Exchange Rates, Balance of Payments, and Trade Deficits Chapter 38 Web Supplement: Previous International Exchange-Rate Systems Chapter 38W: The Economics of Developing Countries 13 Money and banking 14 The federal reserve and monetary policy 15 A century of economic theory 16 Economic growth and productivity 17 Demand, supply, and equilibrium 18 The elasticities of demand and supply 19 The theory of consumer behavior 20 Cost 21 Profit, loss, and perfect competition 22 Monopoly 23 Monopolistic competition 24 Oligopoly 25 Corporate mergers and antitrust 26 Demand in the factor market 27 Labor unions 28 Labor markets and wage rates 29 Rent, interest, and profit 30 Income distribution and poverty 31 International trade 32 International finance

ECONOMICS 9th Edition

By David Begg, Birkbeck College, London, Stanley Fischer, International Monetary Fund and Rudiger Dornbusch of Massachusetts Institute of Technology 2008 (February 2008) / 752 pages ISBN: 9780077119669 (Mandatory Package)

McGraw-Hill UK Title www.mcgraw-hill.com.uk/tetbooks/begg

EconomicsbyBegg,FischerandDornbuschisthedefinitiveeconomics textbook, providing students with the essential coverage for their economic principles course. CoNteNts Part One: Introduction 1. Economics and the economy 2. Tools of economic analysis 3. Demand, supply and the market Part Two: Positive microeconomics 4. Elasticities of demand and supply 5. Consumer choice and demand decisions 6. Introducing supply decisions 7. Costs and supply 8. Perfect competition and pure monopoly 9. Market structure and imperfect competition 10. The labour market 11. Different types of labour 12. Factor markets and income distribution 13. Risk and information 14. The information economy Part Three: Welfare ecomonics 15. Welfare economics 16. Government spending and revenue 17. Industrial policy and competition policy 18. Natural monopoly: public or private? Part Four: Macroeconomics 19. Introduction to macroeconomics 20. Output and aggregate demand 21. Fiscal policy and foreign trade 22. Money and banking 23. Interest rates and monetary transmission 24. Monetary and fiscal policy 25. Aggregate supply, prices and adjustment to shocks 26. Inflation, expectations and credibility 27. Unemployment 28. Exchange rates and the balance of payments

International Edition

ECONOMICS 9th Edition

By Stephen L Slavin, Union County College 2009 (July 2008) / 872 pages ISBN: 9780073375793 ISBN: 9780077354183 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780071280853 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/slavin9e

Steve Slavin's lively and comprehensive Economics has a studentfriendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/ Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author's humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading. CoNteNts 1 A brief economic history of the united states 2 Resource utilization 3 The mixed economy 4 Suppy and demand 5 The household-consumption sector 6 The business-investment sector 7 The government sector 8 The export-import sector 9 Gross domestic product 10 Economic fluctuations, unemployment, and inflation 11 Classical and keynesian economics 12 Fiscal policy and the national debt

15

ECONOMICS

29. Open economy macroeconomics 30. Economic growth 31. Business cycles 32. Macroeconomics: taking stock Part Five: The world economy 33. International trade 34. Exchange rate regimes 35. European integration 36. Poverty, development and globalisation Appendix: Answers to review questions Glossary Index

Principles of Economics ­ Supplementary

New

*9780073523194*

AN EVERYDAY GUIDE TO ECONOMIC STATISTICS 7th Edition

By Gary E Clayton and Martin Gerhard Giesbrecht of Northern Kentucky University

ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES 2nd Edition

By John Jackson, Ron McIver, University of South Australia and Chris Bajada, University of Technology Sydney 2007 (April 2007) ISBN: 9780074717110

McGraw-Hill Australia Title www.mhhe.com.au/jackson_principles2e

CoNteNts Part 1: Introduction Ch 1, The General Principles of Economics Appendix to Ch 1, Graphs and their meaning Part 2: Core Chapters--Microeconomics Ch 2, Demand and Supply Ch 3, Market Behaviour--Elasticity, Tax and Price Controls Ch 4, The Costs of Production Ch 5, Pure Competition and Monopoly Ch 6, Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Ch 7, Market Failure and Resource Allocation Part 3: Core Chapters--Macroeconomics Ch 8, The Macro Environment and its Measurement Ch 9, Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 10, Fiscal Policy and Public Debt Ch 11, Monetary Policy and the Financial System Ch 12, Economic Resources and the Labour Market Ch 13, The International Monetary System Part 4: Extension Chapters Ch E1, The Theory of Consumer Behaviour Ch E2, International Trade and Protection Ch E3, The Pricing of Economic Resources Ch E4, The Aggregate Expenditure Model and the Multiplier Ch E5, The Economics of Growth Ch E6, The Development of Macroeconomic Debates Glossary Index 2010 (September 2009) / 192 pages ISBN: 9780073523194 The 7th edition Guide to Everyday Economic Statistics is a handy littleguidethatcanbeconsultedforclarificationwheneveranyofthe statistical series dealt with are encountered. The authors examine how different series are constructed and how we may use them effectively. This guide puts statistics in context, so the reader can see how an individual statistic relates to the larger picture. Because of this, students won't have to read the book consecutively from beginning to end. New to this editioN Reorganized and Updated: The Seventh edition includes a reorganization of old chapters and some great new material. "Total Output, Production and Growth" has been split into two chapters: "Total Output and Income" (which integrate Income from previous edition Chapter 4) and "Production and Growth" Each chapter has been updated and reorganized to fit with current economic events. Web Links: The Seventh edition contains relevant web sites that provide links to background readings and source data for every statistic in the text, which is outstanding aid for further student research. Students are able to access the economic data that continues to evolve at www.EconSources.com. Updated Discussion on Statistics: Statistics are constantly evolving and updating. Discussion on international investment and trade, the political responses to our recent economic difficulties, and the Consumer Price Index is integrated throughout this edition. New Topics: New discussions of the Primary Credit Rate and LIBOR are included in Chapter 7. The new section in Chapter 2, "Recession vs. Depression," answers this question for students and includes a detailed list of business cycle expansions and contractions in the United States since 1860. NIPAs are also included in Chapter 2. CoNteNts Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Total Output and Income Chapter 3: Production and Growth Chapter 4: Investment and Capital Expenditures Chapter 5: Employment and Unemployment Chapter 6: Spending, Profits, and Expectations Chapter 7: Prices, Money, and Interest Rates Chapter 8: Stock Prices and International Trade Appendix Chain Weighting

16

ECONOMICS

26. What Should Central Banks Do? 27. How Does Monetary Policy Affect the U.S. Economy? 28. Bank ATMs and ATM Surcharges 29. A Quiet Revolution in Money 30. Toward a Cashless Society 31. Record $482 Billion `09 Deficit Forecast Unit 5: The Changing Global Economy 32. Update on the State of the Future 33. Consumer Trends in Three Different "Worlds," 34. Refighting NAFTA 35. Fighting The Global Slump: Less Is Dangerous 36. Eliminating Child Labor 37. Asymmetric Globalization: Global Markets Require Good Global Politics 38. Will the World Run Dry? Global Water and Food Security 39. Half a Tank: The Impending Arrival of Peak Oil 40. Do Global Attitudes and Behaviors Support Sustainable Development?

New

*9780073528564*

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 35th Edition

By Don Cole, Drew University

2010 (February 2009) / 256 pages ISBN: 9780073528564

McGraw-Hill Duskin Title http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528560.mhtml

Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor's Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor's guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. New to this editioN To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309367). CoNteNts Unit 1: Introduction 1. How Much for a Life? Try $3 Million to $5 Million 2. There Is No Such Thing as a War for Free, 3. More, Bigger, Faster 4. Counter-Terrorism: The Private Cost of More Security Unit 2: Microeconomics 5. Gas Costs Squeeze Daily Life 6. Airlines 7. The Real Price of Gas 8. Antitrust Inquiry Launched into Intel, 9. Modernizing U.S. Antitrust Law: The Role of Technology and Innovation 10. Climate Change and the Economy 11. Congested Parks--A Pricing Dilemma Unit 3: The Economics of Work and Income 12. Building a More-Humane Economy 13. Outsized Offshore Outsourcing 14. The New Suburban Poverty 15. The Gender Gyp 16. New Floor Set for Wages 17. Workplace Abuse: Why the Golden Age of Labor May Be Over Unit 4: Macroeconomics 18. Countdown to a Meltdown 19. How Obama Will Stoke the Economy 20. Companies Slam on the Brakes 21. The End of Economics 22. The Elephant in the Room 23. Growth Factor 24. The Tax Reform Revolution 25. Fixing the Tax System

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF EASY OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University in New York and Eugene Diulio 2003 / 144 pages ISBN: 9780071398732

A Schaum Publication

CoNteNts Chapter 1: Introduction to Economics Chapter 2: Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium Chapter 3: Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income Chapter 4: Consumption, Investment, Net Exports, and Government Expenditures Chapter 5: Traditional Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium Output Chapter 6: Fiscal Policy Chapter 7: Money, Banking, and the Federal Reserve Chapter 8: Monetary Policy Chapter 9: Economic Growth and Productivity Chapter 10: International Trade and Finance Chapter 11: Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility Chapter 12: Production Costs Chapter 13: Perfect Competition Chapter 14: Monopoly Chapter 15: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly Chapter 16: Demand for Economic Resources Chapter 17: Pricing of Wages, Rent, Interest, and Profits Index

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF MACROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Eugene Diulio 1999 / 333 pages ISBN: 9780070170537

A Schaum Publication

CoNteNts 1. Introduction to Macroeconomic Analysis. 2. Measures of Output, Prices, and Employment. 3. Output in the Short and Long Run. 4. Models of Spending Equilibrium. 5. The IS-LM Framework. 6. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in a Closed Economy. 7. Monetary and Fiscal Policy in an Open Economy.

17

ECONOMICS

8. Schedules of Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply. 9. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Analysis. 10. Aggregate Supply, Aggregate Demand, and Inflation. 11. Economic Growth. 12. The Supply of and Demand for Money. 13. Consumption. 14. Theories of Investment.

Principles of Macroeconomics - Textbooks

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Dominick Salvatore and Eugene A. Diulio 1996 / 368 pages ISBN: 9780070546295

New

*9780077247171*

MACROECONOMICS 8th Edition

By David C Colander, Middlebury College

A Schaum Publication

CoNteNts 1. Introduction to Economics. 2. The Economic Problem. 3. Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium. 4. Introduction to Macroeconomics. 5. Unemployment, Inflation, and National Income. 6. Consumption, Investment, and Net Exports. 7. Keynesian Approach to Equilibrium Output. 8. Fiscal Policy. 9. Money and Banking. 10. The Federal Reserve and the Money Supply. 11. Monetary and Fiscal Policy. 12. Inflation, Unemployment, Deficits, and Debt. 13. Economic Growth and Productivity. 14. Demand, Supply and Elasticity. 15. The Theory of Consumer Demand and Utility. 16. Costs of Production. 17. Price and Output. 18. Perfect Competition. 19. Price and Output: Monopoly. 20. Price and Output: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly. 21. Production and the Demand for Economic Resources. 22. Wage Determination. 23. Rent, Interest, and Profits.

2010 (October 2009) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780077247171

http://www.mhhe.com/colander8e

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles ofMacroeconomicstextbookdoesnotsacrificeintellectualdepthin its quest for accessibility. The author's primary concern is to instill "economic sensibility" in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. Distinguishing features found within Colander's text are: · · · · · · Cutting Edge and Modern Colloquial Style Narrative Focus on Policy Emphasis on the Importance of Institutions and History Focus on Modeling: Economics is a method of reasoning, not truths. Presents Alternative Perspectives in Economics Emphasis on Importance of Institutions & History Selected Changes, by Chapter Chapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning

New to this editioN

A new section, "Modern Economics," has been added. This section introduces methods of economic reasoning and the variety of ways modern economists develop models based on observed data. Modern economics uses a combination of inductive and deductive reasoning to gain insight into the economy. The combination of these two methods is called abduction.

ComplimeNtary Copies

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

Two new terms introduced in this chapter are: theorems and precepts. Chapter 6, Thinking Like a Modern Economist This is a new chapter whose key points are:

Models are the glue that holds economics together; economists differ in the models that they use. The validity of models is often determined based on its ability to explain real-world data. Thus, models must be tested against the data. This is part of the scientific method. Modern economists use multiple frames, and carefully distinguish theorems that follow from models, and precepts that rely on theorems, but also on judgments about history, institutions, and the limitations of the models.

18

ECONOMICS

Chapter 10, The Aggregate Demand / Aggregate Supply Model This is Chapter 9 from the 7th edition. Chapter 15, Financial Crises, Panics, and Macroeconomic Policy This is a new chapter whose key points are:

Additional discussion of the historical development of the AS/ AD model; emphasizes that AS/AD model does not highlight dynamic feedbacks effects. Wealth effect is now more narrowly defined as the "money wealth effect." That is, when price level rises one feels poorer because the money one holds becomes less valuable. This excludes other financial assets. Add new section, "Dynamic Price Level Adjustment Feedback Effects" that explains how feedback effects from a changing price level (will shift aggregate demand curve) can overwhelm the standard effects (will change quantity of aggregate demand) and destabilize the economy. (See especially Figure 12-8 (29-8)). New term: deflation Chapter 11, The Multiplier Model This is Chapter 10 from the 7th edition.

Explain why economists worry more about the collapse of the financial sector than the collapse of other sectors. List the three stages of a financial crisis and the three stages of what government must to do get an economy out a financial crisis. Discuss how herding and leverage can lead to a bubble. Chapter 17, Deficits and Debt This is Chapter 15 from the 7th edition. Updated data.

Section on "Social Security, Medicare, and Lockboxes" moved to an appendix to this chapter. New section, "The Deficit, the Debt and the Crisis of 2008" that discusses economic situation in late 2008 and early 2009. Chapter 18, The Modern Fiscal Policy Dilemma

Introduction now emphasizes that while the AS/AD model downplays dynamic feedback effects, the multiplier model makes them central. Suggests that the AS/AD model is better when economic fluctuations are minimal and multiplier model is better when fluctuations are greater. Adds example of worldwide recession of 2008 into 2009.

This is Chapter 14 from the 7th edition with a significant revision. The chapter begins with a discussion of evolution of fiscal policy and continues with current fiscal policy problems facing policymakers. Two main policy approaches are retained--functional finance (active policy when facing depression or hyperinflation) and sound finance (balance the budget). Section on "New Classical" economics has been replaced with a section about fiscal policy in 2009 and beyond that discusses the financial bailout and stimulus package to address the recession. · Changes Common to All Chapters "Issues to Ponder" Questions are a new type of question, positioned at the end of the chapters that really challenge the students to think critically at a deeper level and promote discussion of the topics presented. Fully updated to keep the text as relevant as possible, the facts, figures, and end-of-chapter questions have all been updated with the latest data and examples. Additionally, discussions have been revised to match current interests in the profession, keeping up with the evolution of the economy and economics. Thinking Like a Modern Economist Boxes have been added throughout the entire text. Chapter Organization has been modified into a new, more logical order. McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics

Introduces the multiplier-accelerator model in which changes in output are accelerated because changes in investment depend on changes in income. New terms: multiplier-accelerator model, multiplier model Chapter 12, Thinking Like a Modern Macroeconomist This is a new chapter whose key points are:

Distinguish between the standard macro model and the modern macro model. Trace the development of the standard and modern models of the economy. Explain what assumption each of the letters in "DSGE" from the DSGE model represents. Chapter 13, The Financial Sector and the Demand for Money This is Chapter 11 from the 7th edition.

·

· ·

Chapter begins with discussion of derivatives, securitization and systemic risk; focus on recent financial crisis Added section, "Endogenous Money and Credit" which explains how reserves and the money supply are mutually determined. The Fed does not target an interest rate and use the money multiplier to determine the amount of reserves needed. Discusses increased importance of credit to the economy. Chapter 14, Monetary Policy This is Chapter 12 from the 7th edition. Incorporates the Fed's response to the financial crisis in 2008.

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. · Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. · A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. And, Connect Plus is now available with a new book at no additional charge! · · · · · · · · Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Student Study Center

Updated material to include fact that the Fed began to pay interest on reserves. New section, "Quantitative easing" discusses how the fed uses tools other than the standard tools to try to expand the economy. Quantitative easing tools includes buying bonds even when the Fed funds rate is already zero and buying other financial assets such as money market funds, corporate bonds, or mortgage-backed securities. New term: quantitative easing.

19

ECONOMICS

· · · Pre-Built Assignments Tegrity Alternative Perspectives of Macroeconomics 18e and reorders and renumbers the retained content. Instead, Macroeconomics, Brief Edition is a very concise, highly integrated economics textbook that is distinct in purpose, style, and coverage from Macroeconomics 18e. Features A Patient, Step-by-Step Approach: Realizing that for most students, this is their first introduction to economics, the authors take a patient, step-by step approach to teaching the material. The authors explain the theory and models slowly and thoroughly. This approach is easier to follow than that of many other texts on the market, which make assumptions and jump through material quickly, leaving students behind. Balanced Coverage: McConnell and Brue have been the number one selling authors over the years because of their thorough and neutral coverage of the material--they present both sides and let instructors and students make up their own minds. Focus on Core Models and Concepts: Macroeconomics, Brief Edition shortens and simplifies explanations where appropriate but stresses the importance of the economic perspective, including explaining and applying core economic models. The authors' strategy is to develop a limited set of essential models, illustrate them with analogies or anecdotes, explain them thoroughly, and apply them to real-world situations. "Illustrating the Idea" features. "Illustrating the Idea" features use analogies to illustrate theory discussed in the book. For example, a piece on Bill Gates, Oprah Winfrey, and Alex Rodriquez illustrates the importance of opportunity costs in decision-making. Art in the public square brings clarity to public goods and the free-rider problem. In the principles course where there is limited time to linger over topics, such discussions help students learn more quickly and breathe some life into what can otherwise be rather tedious discussions. Interesting, Memorable Applications. "Applying the Analysis" sections walk students through economic theories and ideas and help cement comprehension. For example, the basics of the economic perspective are applied to why customers tend to try to wait in the shortest checkout lines. Photo sets under the title "Photo Op" are included throughout the book to add visual interest, break up the density, and highlight important distinctions. These photo sets photo sets illustrate normal versus inferior goods, complements versus substitutes in consumption, public versus private investment, and more. Assessment-Ready Learning Objectives and Testing: Each chapter begins with measurable learning objectives. These learning objectives are cross-referenced to specific test bank questions to allow construction of measurement instruments. This direct link between objectives and content facilitates now common accreditation efforts necessary to meet assurance of learning requirements. CoNteNts PART 1: INTRODUCTION Ch 1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix on Graphs) Ch 2 The Market System and the Circular Flow PART 2: PRICE, QUANTITY, and EFFICIENCY Ch 3 Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Web Appendix on Supply and Demand) Ch 4 Pubic Goods and Externalities PART 3: GDP, GROWTH, AND INSTABILITY Ch 5 GDP and Economic Growth Ch 6 Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Ch 7 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 8 Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt PART 4: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICY Ch 9 Money and Banking Ch 10 Interest Rates and Monetary Policy PART 5: LONG-RUN CONSIDERATIONS AND INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Ch 11 Long Run Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Ch 12 International Trade and Exchange Rates

CoNteNts Part 1 Introduction: Thinking Like an Economist Chapter 1 Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2 The Production Possibility Model, Trade, and Globalization Chapter 3 Economic Institutions Chapter 4 Supply and Demand Chapter 5 Using Supply and Demand Chapter 6 Thinking Like a Modern Economist Part 2: Macroeconomics I. Macroeconomic Problems Chapter 7 Economic Growth, Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Chapter 8 Measuring the Aggregate Economy II. The Macroeconomic Framework Chapter 9 Growth, Productivity, and the Wealth of Nations Chapter 10 The Aggregate Demand/Aggregate Supply Model Chapter 11 The Multiplier Model Chapter 12 Thinking Like a Modern Macroeconomist III. Finance, Money, and the Economy Chapter 13 The Financial Sector and the Economy Chapter 14 Monetary Policy Chapter 15 Financial Crises, Panics, and Macroeconomic Policy Chapter 16 Inflation and the Phillips Curve IV. Taxes, Budgets, and Fiscal Policy Chapter 17 Deficits and Debt Chapter 18 The Modern Fiscal Policy Dilemma V. International Policy Issues Chapter 19 International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing Chapter 20 International Financial Policy Chapter 21 Macro Policy in a Global Setting Chapter 22 Macro Policies in Developing Countries

New

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS Brief Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College

2010 (February 2009) / 336 pages ISBN: 9780077230975 ISBN: 9780070183285 [IE]

http://www.mcconnellbriefmicro1e.com

McConnell, Brue, and Flynn's Macroeconomics, Brief Edition comes from the same author team as the market-leading Principles of Macroeconomics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. Like the 18th edition, Macroeconomics, Brief Edition has 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essential for understanding the economizing problem,specificeconomicissues,andthepolicyalternatives;help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. Although the Brief Edition is a derivative of Macroeconomics 18e, is not a cut-and-paste book that simply eliminates several chapters

20

ECONOMICS

New

*9780073344225*

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 19th Edition

By Paul A Samuelson, Mass Institute of Tech and William D Nordhaus, Yale University

New

*9780077247409*

THE MACRO ECONOMY TODAY 12th Edition

By Bradley Schiller, American University

2010 (April 2009) / 432 pages ISBN: 9780073344225 ISBN: 9780070164949 [IE]

2010 (October 2009) / 416 pages ISBN: 9780077247409

http://www.mhhe.com/samuelson19e

CoNteNts PART ONE BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 The Central Concepts of Economics Chapter 2 The Modern Mixed Economy Chapter 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand PART TWO MACROECONOMICS: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND BUSINESS CYCLES Chapter 4 Overview of Macroeconomics Chapter 5 Measuring Economic Activity Chapter 6 Consumption and Investment Chapter 7 Business Cycles and Aggregate Demand Chapter 8 Capital, Interest, and Profits Chapter 9 Money and Financial Markets Chapter 10 Monetary Policy and the Economy PART THREE GROWTH, DEVELOPMENT, AND THE GLOBAL ECONOMY Chapter 11 Economic Growth Chapter 12 The Challenge of Economic Development Chapter 13 Exchange Rates and the International Financial System Chapter 14 Open-Economy Macroeconomics PART FOUR UNEMPLOYMENT, INFLATION, AND ECONOMIC POLICY Chapter 15 Unemployment and the Foundations of Aggregate Supply Chapter 16 Inflation Chapter 17 The Frontiers of Macroeconomics

http://www.mhhe.com/schiller12e

Brad Schiller's text, The Macro Economy Today, 12e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues, and every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. Schiller teaches economicsinarelevantcontext,fillinghischapterswiththerealfacts and applications of economic life. Schiller is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. New to this editioN The Great Recession of 2008-09: The economic downturn over the past year has caused a lot of change, as well as increased interest in economics, especially macroeconomics. As a result, The Macro Economy Today has been thoroughly revised to address the realities of the current economic climate. Schiller has always emphasized the problems associated with short-run instability; the recent GDP contraction not only re-invigorated both student and faculty interest in business cycles, but provided scores of fresh illustrations of cyclical forces and policy responses. For example: · · · · · Ch. 1 includes a revised and expanded discussion of economic growth. Ch. 6 Intro is tied to 2008/2009 job losses. Ch. 8 includes more focus on 2008/2009 recession, and a new "Economy Tomorrow" that surveys the broad policy options for ending the Great Recession of 2008-09. Ch. 10 traces the Multiplier through 2007-2009 recession. Ch. 13 has a new emphasis on bank (un)willingness to lend, and discussion of the 2008-2009 credit crisis.

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

The Obama Presidency: The new "Economist in Chief" has changed the tone and substance of economic policy. Almost every chapter in The Macro Economy Today refers to the goals and choices associated with the Obama administration, and Congressional Budget Office analyses of Obama's 2009 stimulus package enliven the fiscal policy debate. · · · · · · Ch. 1 opens with a focus on President Obama's economic challenges. Ch. 3 includes an "In the News" on "scalping" of Obama inauguration tickets. Ch. 10 Intro is tied to Obama's Keynesian approach. Ch. 11 includes an "In the News" on debates of the Obama 2009 stimulus plan. Ch. 17 incorporates Obama's 2009 growth-enhancing stimulus components. Ch. 18 includes a focus on 2009 battle over the Obama stimulus package.

21

ECONOMICS

Market vs. Government: While the debate about markets vs. government has always been a central theme of The Macro Economy Today, the recent economic crisis has brought a resurgence of attention to the basic choice between market reliance and government intervention. In the very first chapter, the concepts of both market failure and government failure are introduced and discussed, and in every subsequent chapter the debate is continued. "The Economy Tomorrow" feature at the end of every chapter challenges students to apply the markets vs. government options to specific policy issues. There are no right or wrong answers. The goal of The Macro Economy Today is instead to expose students to the central debates in economic theory and policy ­ and challenge them to think about these debates analytically. McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics CoNteNts Part 1 The Economic Challenge Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Role of Government Part 2 Measuring Macro Outcomes Chapter 5 National-Income Accounting Chapter 6 Unemployment Chapter 7 Inflation Part 3 Cyclical Instability Chapter 8 The Business Cycle Chapter 9 Aggregate Demand Appendix: The Keynesian Cross Chapter 10 Self-Adjustment or Instability? Part 4 Fiscal Policy Tools Chapter 11 Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 Deficits and Debt Part 5 Monetary Policy Options Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 The Federal Reserve System Chapter 15 Monetary Policy Part 6 Supply-Side Options Chapter 16 Supply-Side Policy: Short-run Options Chapter 17 Growth and Productivity: Long-run Possibilities Part 7 Policy Constraints Chapter 18 Theory versus Reality Part 8 Product Markets: The Basics Chapter 19 Consumer Demand Appendix: Indifference Curves Chapter 20 The Costs of Production Part 9 Market Structure Chapter 21 The Competitive Firm Chapter 22 Competitive Markets Chapter 23 Monopoly Chapter 24 Oligopoly Chapter 25 Monopolistic Competition Part 10 Regulatory Issues Chapter 26 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 27 Environmental Protection Chapter 28 The Farm Problem Part 11 Factor Markets: Basic Theory Chapter 29 The Labor Market Chapter 30 Labor Unions Chapter 31 Financial Markets Part 12 Distributional Issues Chapter 32 Taxes: Equity versus Efficiency Chapter 33 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social Security Part 13 International Economics Chapter 34 International Trade Chapter 35 International Finance Chapter 36 Global Poverty

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Student Study Center Pre-Built Assignments Tegrity Updated Examples and Applications: Thoroughly updated to stay relevant in today's world, The Macro Economy Today 12e adds to its already robust foundation of real-world application with updated examples that will capture students' attention, including: the scalping of Obama inaugural tickets, the Great Recession, the lobbyists' scramble for stimulus funds, the 2009 cigarettetax hike, Manny Ramirez's new Dodger's contract, President Obama's 2008 tax return, sales impact of PlayStation3 price cuts, and 2009 Live Nation concert monopoly. Chapter 12: Ch. 12, Deficits, Surpluses, and Debt, is re-titled as Deficits and Debt to acknowledge the current economy, given that no budget surpluses are in sight. It also includes a new focus on deficit implications of the Obama stimulus program. Student Problem Set: The new design of the 12e now places the end-of-chapter problem sets immediately after each chapter for added application and reference. GDP streamlined: Ch. 2 includes a streamlined description of GDP for better understanding, and Ch. 5 has clarified the explanation of Real GDP calculations so that students are better able to grasp and apply the concepts. Integrated Chapter 18 Global Macro: The material, key concepts, and learning objectives of 11e's Chapter 18 Global Macro have been integrated into other chapters of the text to streamline concepts of the open and closed economy and fiscal and monetary policy affecting U.S. macro outcomes.

·

· ·

·

22

ECONOMICS

International Edition

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2009 (September 2008) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073362656 ISBN: 9780077354312 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780071285391 [IE]

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS Brief Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2009 (October 2008) / 368 pages ISBN: 9780077231828 ISBN: 9780077354343 (+ Economy 2009 Update)

http://www.mhhe.com/fbbrief1e

CoNteNts Part I Introduction Ch 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and Demand Part II Macroeconomics: Data and Issues Ch 4 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 5 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 6 Wages and Unemployment Part III The Economy in the Long Run Ch 7 Economic Growth Ch 8 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 9 The Financial System, Money, and Prices Part IV The Economy in the Short Run Ch 10 Short-Term Economic Fluctuations Ch 11 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 12 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 13 Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Macroeconomic Policy Part V The International Economy Ch 14 Exchange Rates, International Trade, and Capital Flows

http://www.mhhe.com/fb4e

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages,andotherfieldshaveachieveddramaticpedagogicalgainsby abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best throughout, and the best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. Frank/Bernanke also encourages students to become "Economic Naturalists," by employing basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of theireconomiclandscapeasthereflectionofanimplicitorexplicit cost-benefitcalculation. CoNteNts Part I Introduction Ch 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and Demand Part II Macroeconomics: Data and Issues Ch 4 Spending, Income, and GDP Ch 5 Inflation and the Price Level Ch 6 Wages and Unemployment Part III The Economy in the Long Run Ch 7 Economic Growth Ch 8 Saving, Capital Formation, and Financial Markets Ch 9 The Financial System, Money, and Prices Part IV The Economy in the Short Run Ch 10 Short-Term Fluctuations Ch 11 Spending and Output in the Short Run Ch 12 Stabilizing the Economy: The Role of the Federal Reserve Ch 13 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Ch 14 Macroeconomic Policy Part V The International Economy Ch 15 Exchange Rates and the Open Economy Ch 16 International Trade and Capital Flows Glossary

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 18th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College 2009 (October 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073365947 ISBN: 9780077354237 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780070092013 [IE]

http://www.mcconnell18e.com

McConnell and Brue's Macroeconomics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Macroeconomics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. The 18th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership by sticking to 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essentialforunderstandingtheeconomizingproblem,specificeconomic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. CoNteNts Part 1: Introduction to Economics and the Economy Chapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix) Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Chapter 3: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Appendix) Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors Chapter 5: The United States in the Global Economy Part 2: GDP, Growth, and Instability Chapter 6: Introduction to Macroeconomics Chapter 7: Measuring Domestic Output and National Income Chapter 8: Economic Growth Chapter 9: Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation Part 3: Macroeconomic Models and Fiscal Policy Chapter 10: Basic Macroeconomic Relationships Chapter 11: The Aggregate Expenditures Model

23

ECONOMICS

Chapter 12: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply (+ Appendix) Chapter 13: Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt Part 4: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy Chapter 14: Money and Banking Chapter 15: Money Creation Chapter 16: Interest Rates and Monetary Policy Chapter 17: Financial Economics Part 5: Extensions and Issues Chapter 18: Extending the Analysis of Aggregate Supply Chapter 19: Current Issues in Macro Theory and Policy Part 6: International Economics Chapter 20: International Trade Chapter 21: Exchange Rates, Balance of Payments, and Trade Deficits Chapter 21 Web Supplement: Previous International Exchange-Rate Systems Chapter 22W: The Economics of Developing Countries

Aust Adaptation

PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Ben Bernanke, Princeton University, Nilss Olekalns, University of Melbourne and Robert H Frank, Cornell University 2008 (May 2008) ISBN: 9780070135277 ISBN: 9780070091429 (with eBook)

McGraw-Hill Australia Title http://www/mhhe.com/au/bernanke2e

The outstanding pedigree of this author team sets the bar very high and this second Australian edition does not disappoint. Ben Bernanke, Bob Frank and Nilss Olekalns--Head of Economics at the University of Melbourne--introduce new material whilst maintaining their core approach of promoting a solid grounding in basic macroeconomic principles. Do you believe students should be trained to think critically and analytically? If so, then this is the book for you. Economic issues and principles are introduced through simple examples, and then repeated and reinforced through illustrations, examples and background briefs. This text motivates students, is effective and enjoyable to teach and is the essential text for introductory courses in macroeconomics. CoNteNts Part 1: Core Principles of Economics 1. Economics and the market 2. Comparative advantage: the basis for trade Part 2: Issues in Macroeconomics 3. Measuring macroeconomic performance: output and prices 4. Measuring macroeconomic performance: savings and wealth 5. Measuring macroeconomic performance: unemployment and the labour market Part 3: Short-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of the Business Cycle 6. Short-run economic fluctuations 7. Spending and output in the short run 8. Fiscal policy 9. Money, prices and the Reserve Bank 10. The Reserve Bank and the economy 11. The aggregate demand aggregate supply model Part 4: Long-run Macroeconomics: The Analysis of Economic Growth 12. The economy in the long run: an introduction to economic growth 13. The production function approach to understanding growth 14. Savings, capital formation and comparative economic growth Part 5: Open Economy Macroeconomics 15. An introduction to the open economy 16. Exchange rates and the open economy 17. The balance of payments--net exports and international capital flows Part 6: Concluding Thoughts 18. Macroeconomics: what have we learnt? Appendix A: Answers to in-chapter exercises Glossary Index

MACROECONOMICS 9th Edition

By Stephen L Slavin, Union County College 2009 (July 2008) / 552 pages ISBN: 9780073362465 ISBN: 9780077354206 (+ Economy 2009 Update) Steve Slavin's lively and comprehensive Macroeconomics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author's humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading. CoNteNts 1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 3 The Mixed Economy 4 Supply and Demand 5 The Household-Consumption Sector 6 The Business-Investment Sector 7 The Government Sector 8 The Export-Import Sector 9 Gross Domestic Product 10 Economic Fluctuations, Unemployment, and Inflation 11 Classical and Keynesian Economics 12 Fiscal Policy and National Debt 13 Money and Banking 14 The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy 15 A Century Of Economic Policy 16 Economic Growth and Productivity 17 Income Distribution and Poverty 18 International Trade 19 International Finance

24

ECONOMICS

Principles of Microeconomics - Textbooks

· · ·

Choice architecture is the context in which decisions are presented. A nudge is designed to influence choice architecture in a way that directs people to make choices that make them better off. Nudges can be useful for (1) choices where benefits and costs are separated by time, (2) complicated choices with many dimensions and (2) infrequent choices. Behavioral economic policy is controversial. It is not clear that government can decide what is best for people or, even if they knew what was best, they would implement the policy. Government is subject to failure just as is the market. Changes Common to All Chapters "Issues to Ponder" Questions are a new type of question, positioned at the end of the chapters that really challenge the students to think critically at a deeper level and promote discussion of the topics presented. Fully updated to keep the text as relevant as possible, the facts, figures, and end-of-chapter questions have all been updated with the latest data and examples. Additionally, discussions have been revised to match current interests in the profession, keeping up with the evolution of the economy and economics. Thinking Like a Modern Economist Boxes have been added throughout the entire text. Chapter Organization has been modified into a new, more logical order. McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics

New

*9780077247164*

MICROECONOMICS 8th Edition

By David C Colander, Middlebury College

·

·

· ·

2010 (September 2009) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780077247164

http://www.mhhe.com/colander8e

Written in an informal colloquial style, this student-friendly Principles ofMicroeconomicstextbookdoesnotsacrificeintellectualdepthin its quest for accessibility. The author's primary concern is to instill "economic sensibility" in the student. Colander emphasizes the intellectual and historical context to which the economic models are applied. Distinguishing features found within Colander's text are: · · · · · · Cutting Edge and Modern Colloquial Style Narrative Focus on Policy Emphasis on the Importance of Institutions and History Focus on Modeling: Economics is a method of reasoning, not truths. Presents Alternative Perspectives in Economics Selected Changes, by Chapter Chapter 1: Economics and Economic Reasoning A new section, "Modern Economics," has been added. This section introduces methods of economic reasoning and the variety of ways modern economists develop models based on observed data. Modern economics uses a combination of inductive and deductive reasoning to gain insight into the economy. The combination of these two methods is called abduction. Two new terms introduced in this chapter are: theorems and precepts. Chapter 6, Thinking Like a Modern Economist

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · · · · · · · · · · · · · · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Student Study Center Pre-Built Assignments Tegrity Alternative Perspectives

New to this editioN ·

CoNteNts Part 1 Introduction: Thinking Like an Economist Chapter 1 Economics and Economic Reasoning Chapter 2 The Production Possibility Model, Trade, and Globalization Chapter 3 Economic Institutions Chapter 4 Supply and Demand Chapter 5 Using Supply and Demand Chapter 6 Thinking Like a Modern Economist Part 2: Microeconomics I. The Power of Traditional Economic Models Chapter 7 Describing Supply and Demand: Elasticities Chapter 8 Taxation and Government Intervention Chapter 9 International Trade Policy, Comparative Advantage, and Outsourcing II. Choice and Decision-Making Chapter 10 The Logic of Individual Choice: The Foundation of Supply and Demand Chapter 11 Game Theory, Strategic Decision Making, and Behavioral Economics III. Production and Cost Analysis

·

This is a new chapter whose key points are: · · · Models are the glue that holds economics together; economists differ in the models that they use. The validity of models is often determined based on its ability to explain real-world data. Thus, models must be tested against the data. This is part of the scientific method. Modern economists use multiple frames, and carefully distinguish theorems that follow from models, and precepts that rely on theorems, but also on judgments about history, institutions, and the limitations of the models. Chapter 22, Behavioral Economic Policy

This is a new chapter whose key points are:

25

ECONOMICS

Chapter 12 Production and Cost Analysis I Chapter 13 Production and Cost Analysis II IV. Market Structure Chapter 14 Perfect Competition Chapter 15 Monopoly Chapter 16 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly V. Real-World Competition Chapter 17 Real-World Competition and Technology Chapter 18 Antitrust Policy and Regulation VI. Factor Markets Chapter 19 Work and the Labor Market Chapter 19W Nonwage and Asset Income: Rents, Profits, and Interest Chapter 20 Who Gets What? The Distribution of Income VII. Applying Economic Reasoning to Policy Chapter 21 Market Failure versus Government Failure Chapter 21W Politics and Economics: The Case of Agricultural Markets Chapter 22 Behavioral Economics and Modern Economic Policy Chapter 23 Microeconomic Policy, Economic Reasoning, and Beyond Balanced Coverage: McConnell and Brue have been the number one selling authors over the years because of their thorough and neutral coverage of the material--they present both sides and let instructors and students make up their own minds. Focus on Core Models and Concepts: Microeconomics, Brief Edition shortens and simplifies explanations where appropriate but stresses the importance of the economic perspective, including explaining and applying core economic models. The authors' strategy is to develop a limited set of essential models, illustrate them with analogies or anecdotes, explain them thoroughly, and apply them to real-world situations. "Illustrating the Idea" features. "Illustrating the Idea" features use analogies to illustrate theory discussed in the book. For instance, elastic versus inelastic demand is illustrated by comparing the stretch of an Ace bandage and that of a tight rubber tie-down. A piece on Bill Gates, Oprah Winfrey, and Alex Rodriquez illustrates the importance of opportunity costs in decision-making. In the principles course where there is limited time to linger over topics, such discussions help students learn more quickly and breathe some life into what can otherwise be rather tedious discussions. Interesting, Memorable Applications. "Applying the Analysis" sections walk students through economic theories and ideas and help cement comprehension. For example, the basics of the economic perspective are applied to why customers tend to try to wait in the shortest checkout lines. Photo sets under the title "Photo Op" are included throughout the book to add visual interest, break up the density, and highlight important distinctions. These photo sets photo sets illustrate normal versus inferior goods, complements versus substitutes in consumption, homogeneous versus differentiated products, substitute resources versus complementary resources, and more. Assessment-Ready Learning Objectives and Testing: Each chapter begins with measurable learning objectives. These learning objectives are cross-referenced to specific test bank questions to allow construction of measurement instruments. This direct link between objectives and content facilitates now common accreditation efforts necessary to meet assurance of learning requirements. CoNteNts 2010 (February 2009) / 288 pages ISBN: 9780077230982 ISBN: 9780070183292 [IE] PART 1: INTRODUCTION Ch 1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix on Graphs) Ch 2 The Market System and the Circular Flow PART 2: PRICE, QUANTITY, and EFFICIENCY Ch 3 Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Web Appendix on Supply and Demand) Ch 4 Elasticity of Demand and Supply Ch 5 Pubic Goods and Externalities PART 3: PRODUCT MARKETS Ch 6 Businesses and Their Costs Ch 7 Pure Competition Ch 8 Pure Monopoly Ch 9 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly PART 4: RESOURCE MARKETS Ch 10 Wage Determination Ch 11 Income Inequality and Poverty PART 5: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS Ch 12 International Trade and Exchange Rates

New

*9780077230982*

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS Brief Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutherarn University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College

http://www.mcconnellbriefmicro1e.com

McConnell and Brue's Microeconomics, Brief Edition comes from the same author team as the market-leading Principles of Microeconomics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. Like the 18th edition, Microeconomics, Brief Edition has 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principlesessentialforunderstandingtheeconomizingproblem,specific economic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. Although the Brief Edition is a derivative of Microeconomics 18e, is not a cut-and-paste book that simply eliminates several chapters of Economics 18e and reorders and renumbers the retained content. Instead, Microeconomics, Brief Edition is a very concise, highly integrated economics textbook that is distinct in purpose, style, and coverage from Microeconomics 18e. Features A Patient, Step-by-Step Approach: Realizing that for most students, this is their first introduction to economics, the authors take a patient, step-by step approach to teaching the material. The authors explain the theory and models slowly and thoroughly. This approach is easier to follow than that of many other texts on the market, which make assumptions and jump through material quickly, leaving students behind.

26

ECONOMICS

New

International Edition

*9780073344232*

New

*9780077247416*

THE MICRO ECONOMY TODAY 12th Edition

By Bradley R Schiller, American University

MICROECONOMICS 19th Edition

By Paul A Samuelson, Mass Institute of Tech and William D Nordhaus, Yale University

2010 (April 2009) / 432 pages ISBN: 9780073344232 ISBN: 9780070164956 [IE]

2010 (October 2009) / 416 pages ISBN: 9780077247416

http://www.mhhe.com/schiller12e

Brad Schiller's text, The Micro Economy Today, 12e, is noted for three great strengths: readability, policy orientation, and pedagogy. His accessible writing style engages students and brings some of the excitement of domestic and global economic news into the classroom. Schiller emphasizes how policymakers must choose between government intervention and market reliance to resolve the core issues of what, how, and for whom to produce. This strategic choice is highlighted throughout the full range of micro, macro, and international issues, and every chapter ends with a policy issue that emphasizes the markets vs. government dilemma. Schiller teaches economicsinarelevantcontext,fillinghischapterswiththerealfacts and applications of economic life. Schiller is also the only principles text that presents all macro theory in the single consistent context of the AS/AD framework. New to this editioN The Great Recession of 2008-09: The economic downturn over the past year has caused a lot of change, as well as increased interest in economics, especially macroeconomics. As a result, The Economy Today has been thoroughly revised to address the realities of the current economic climate. Schiller has always emphasized the problems associated with short-run instability; the recent GDP contraction not only re-invigorated both student and faculty interest in business cycles, but provided scores of fresh illustrations of cyclical forces and policy responses. The Obama Presidency: The new "Economist in Chief" has changed the tone and substance of economic policy. Almost every chapter in The Economy Today refers to the goals and choices associated with the Obama administration, and Congressional Budget Office analyses of Obama's 2009 stimulus package enliven the fiscal policy debate. Market vs. Government: While the debate about markets vs. government has always been a central theme of The Economy Today, the recent economic crisis has brought a resurgence of attention to the basic choice between market reliance and government intervention. In the very first chapter, the concepts of both market failure and government failure are introduced and discussed, and in every subsequent chapter the debate is continued. "The Economy Tomorrow" feature at the end of every chapter challenges students to apply the markets vs. government options to specific policy issues. There are no right or wrong answers. The goal of The Economy Today is instead to expose students to the central debates in economic theory and policy ­ and challenge them to think about these debates analytically. McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics

http://www.mhhe.com/samuelson19e

CoNteNts PART ONE BASIC CONCEPTS Chapter 1 The Central Concepts of Economics Chapter 2 The Modern Mixed Economy Chapter 3 Basic Elements of Supply and Demand PART TWO MICROECONOMICS: SUPPLY, DEMAND, AND PRODUCT MARKETS Chapter 4 Supply and Demand: Elasticity and Applications Chapter 5 Demand and Consumer Behavior Chapter 6 Production and Business Organization Chapter 7 Analysis of Costs Chapter 8 Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets Chapter 9 Imperfect Competition and Monopoly Chapter 10 Competition Among the Few Chapter 11 Economics of Uncertainty PART THREE FACTOR MARKETS: LABOR, LAND, AND CAPITAL Chapter 12 How Markets Determine Incomes Chapter 13 The Labor Market Chapter 14 Land, Natural Resources, and the Environment Chapter 15 Capital, Interest, and Profits PART FOUR APPLICATIONS OF ECONOMIC PRINCIPLES Chapter 16 Government Taxation and Expenditure Chapter 17 Efficiency vs. Equality: The Big Tradeoff Chapter 18 International Trade

ComplimeNtary Copies

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook.

27

ECONOMICS

· · · · · · · · · · · · · · Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Student Study Center Pre-Built Assignments Tegrity Updated Examples and Applications Chapter 12: Ch. 12, Deficits, Surpluses, and Debt, is re-titled as Deficits and Debt to acknowledge the current economy, given that no budget surpluses are in sight. It also includes a new focus on deficit implications of the Obama stimulus program. Student Problem Set: The new design of the 12e now places the end-of-chapter problem sets immediately after each chapter for added application and reference. GDP streamlined: Ch. 2 includes a streamlined description of GDP for better understanding, and Ch. 5 has clarified the explanation of Real GDP calculations so that students are better able to grasp and apply the concepts. Integrated Chapter 18 Global Macro: The material, key concepts, and learning objectives of 11e's Chapter 18 Global Macro have been integrated into other chapters of the text to streamline concepts of the open and closed economy and fiscal and monetary policy affecting U.S. macro outcomes.

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS Brief Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2009 (September 2008) / 368 pages ISBN: 9780077231835 ISBN: 9780077354336 (+ Economy 2009 Update)

http://www.mhhe.com/fbbrief1e

CoNteNts Part I Introduction Ch 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and Demand Part II Competition and the Invisible Hand Ch 4 Elasticity Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency, Exchange, and the Invisible Hand in Action Part III Market Imperfections Ch 8 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 9 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 10 Externalities and Property Rights Part IV Economics of Public Policy Ch 11 Using Economics to Make Better Policy Choices

· ·

·

International Edition

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2009 (August 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073362663 ISBN: 9780077354305 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780071285407 [IE]

CoNteNts Part 1 The Economic Challenge Chapter 1 Economics: The Core Issues Appendix: Using Graphs Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy: A Global View Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Chapter 4 The Role of Government Part 2 Product Markets: The Basics Chapter 5 Consumer Demand Appendix: Indifference Curves Chapter 6 The Costs of Production Part 3 Market Structure Chapter 7 The Competitive Firm Chapter 8 Competitive Markets Chapter 9 Monopoly Chapter 10 Oligopoly Chapter 11 Monopolistic Competition Part 4 Regulatory Issues Chapter 12 (De)Regulation of Business Chapter 13 Environmental Protection Chapter 14 The Farm Problem Part 5 Factor Markets: Basic Theory Chapter 15 The Labor Market Chapter 16 Labor Unions Chapter 17 Financial Markets Part 6 Distributional Issues Chapter 18 Taxes: Equity versus Efficiency Chapter 19 Transfer Payments: Welfare and Social Security Part 7 International Economics Chapter 20 International Trade Chapter 21 International Finance Chapter 22 Global Poverty Glossary Index Reference Tables

http://www.mhhe.com/fb4e

In recent years, innovative texts in mathematics, science, foreign languages,andotherfieldshaveachieveddramaticpedagogicalgainsby abandoning the traditional encyclopedic approach in favor of attempting to teach a short list of core principles in depth. Two well-respected writers and researchers, Bob Frank and Ben Bernanke, have shown that the less-is-more approach affords similar gains in introductory economics. Although a few other texts have paid lip service to this new approach, Frank/Bernanke is by far the best throughout, and the best executed principles text in this mold. Avoiding excessive reliance on formal mathematical derivations, it presents concepts intuitively through examples drawn from familiar contexts. The authors introduce a coherent short list of core principles and reinforce them by illustrating and applying each in numerous contexts. Students are periodically asked to apply these principles and to answer related questions and exercises. Frank/Bernanke also encourages students to become "Economic Naturalists," by employing basic economic principles to understand and explain what they observe in the world around them. An economic naturalist understands, for example, that infant safety seats are required in cars but not in airplanes because the marginal cost of space to accommodate these seats is typically zero in cars but often hundreds of dollars in airplanes. Such examples engage student interest while teaching them to see each feature of theireconomiclandscapeasthereflectionofanimplicitorexplicit cost-benefitcalculation. CoNteNts Part I Introduction Ch 1 Thinking Like an Economist Ch 2 Comparative Advantage Ch 3 Supply and Demand Part II Competition and the Invisible Hand Ch 4 Elasticity

28

ECONOMICS

Ch 5 Demand Ch 6 Perfectly Competitive Supply Ch 7 Efficiency and Exchange Ch 8 The Invisible Hand in Action Part III Market Imperfections Ch 9 Monopoly, Oligopoly, and Monopolistic Competition Ch 10 Games and Strategic Behavior Ch 11 Externalities and Property Rights Ch 12 The Economics of Information Part IV Economics of Public Policy Ch 13 Labor Markets, Poverty, and Income Distribution Ch 14 The Environment, Health, and Safety Ch 15 Public Goods and Tax Policy

International Edition

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS

By James D Miller, Smith College 2009 (February 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073402833 ISBN: 9780071288378 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/millermicro1e

Miller, Principles of Microeconomics, 1e is written on the premise that Microeconomics should fascinate. The book was written to read more likeanon-fictionbookthanatraditionaltextbook,andusesengaging and sometimes irreverent examples to capture student interest. Miller 1e aims to introduce concepts clearly with a realistic world view, so students are able to reconcile economic theory with their immediate surroundings.Uniquely,Miller1emakesuseofmanyoriginal,fictional stories to explain and complement the material. The stories do not displace analysis of traditional microeconomic theory; they stimulate student interest and provide an intuitive introduction to numerous concepts. Rather than implicitly assume that politicians always put the common good ahead of their own self-interests as most texts do, Miller 1e uses public choice theory to present a realistic view of politicians and their effect on economics. In addition, while many texts ignore, orbrieflycover,theimportanttopicofInnovation,Miller1econsiders the powerful force of Innovation extensively in the text, addressing it in over half of the chapters, and creating an instant tie-in for today's digital-age students. CoNteNts PART ONE: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1: What is Microeconomics? PART TWO: THE MAGIC OF THE MARKETPLACE Chapter 2: Introducing Supply and Demand Chapter 3: Supply and Demand Intertwined Chapter 4: Elasticities Chapter 5: Policy Analysis with Supply and Demand Chapter 6: Wealth Creation and Destruction Chapter 7: Trade Chapter 8: Costs Chapter 9: Perfect Competition PART THREE: IMPERFECT MARKETS/IMPERFECT GOVERNMENTS Chapter 10: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 1: Monopolies Chapter 11: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 2: Oligopolies Chapter 12: Government Imperfections Chapter 13: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 3: Externalities and the Environment Chapter 14: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 4: Inadequate Property Rights Chapter 15: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 5: Incomplete Information Chapter 16: Challenge to Market Effectiveness 6?: Inequality PART FOUR: ECONOMICS IS EVERYWHERE Chapter 17: Economics is Everywhere

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS 18th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College 2009 (October 2008) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073365954 ISBN: 9780070092471 [IE]

http://www.mcconnell18e.com

McConnell and Brue's Microeconomics: Principles, Problems, and Policies is the leading Principles of Microeconomics textbook. It continues to be innovative while teaching students in a clear, unbiased way. The 18th Edition builds upon the tradition of leadership by sticking to 3 main goals: help the beginning student master the principles essentialforunderstandingtheeconomizingproblem,specificeconomic issues, and the policy alternatives; help the student understand and apply the economic perspective and reason accurately and objectively about economic matters; and promote a lasting student interest in economics and the economy. CoNteNts Part 1: Introduction to Economics and the Economy Chapter 1: Limits, Alternatives, and Choices (+ Appendix) Chapter 2: The Market System and the Circular Flow Chapter 3: Demand, Supply and Market Equilibrium (+ Appendix) Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy: Private and Public Sectors Chapter 5: The United States in the Global Economy Part 2: Microeconomics of Product Markets Chapter 6: Elasticity, Consumer Surplus, and Producer Surplus Chapter 7: Consumer Behavior (+ Appendix) Chapter 8: The Costs of Production Chapter 9: Pure Competition Chapter 10: Pure Monopoly Chapter 11: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly (+ Appendix) Chapter 11W: Technology, R&D, and Efficiency Part 3: Microeconomics of Resource Markets Chapter 12: The Demand for Resources Chapter 13: Wage Determination (+ Appendix) Chapter 14: Rent, Interest, and Profit Chapter 15: Natural Resource and Energy Economics Part 4: Microeconomics of Government Chapter 16: Government and Market Failure Chapter 17: Public Choice Theory and the Economics of Taxation Part 5: Microeconomic Issues and Policies Chapter 18: Antitrust Policy and Regulation Chapter 19: Agriculture: Economics and Policy Chapter 20: Income Inequality, Discrimination, and Poverty Chapter 21: Health Care Chapter 22: Immigration Part 6: International Economics Chapter 23: International Trade

MICROECONOMICS 9th Edition

By Stephen L Slavin, Uion County College 2009 (August 2008) / 552 pages ISBN: 9780073362458 ISBN: 9780077354190 (+ Economy 2009 Update)

http://www.mhhe.com/slavin9e

Steve Slavin's lively and comprehensive Microeconomics has a student-friendly, step-by-step approach; value pricing; and a built-in Workbook/Study Guide. Instructors and students like the author's humorous anecdotes, direct language, and easy conversational style. The text encourages active rather than passive reading.

29

ECONOMICS

CoNteNts 1 A Brief Economic History of the United States 2 Resource Utilization 3 The Mixed Economy 4 Supply and Demand 5 Demand, Supply, and Equilibrium 6 Elasticities of Supply and Demand 7 Theory of Consumer Behavior 8 Cost 9 Profit, Loss, and Perfect Competition 10 Monopoly 11 Monopolistic Competition 12 Oligopoly 13 Corporate Mergers and Antitrust 14 Demand in the Factor Market 15 Labor Unions 16 Labor Markets and Wage Rates 17 Rent, Interest, and Profit 18 Income Distribution and Poverty 19 International Trade 20 International Finance

Survey of Economics

New

International Edition

*9780073511313*

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University, Campbell R McConnell, University of NebraskaLincoln and Sean Masaki Flynn, Vassar College

2010 (January 2009) / 528 pages ISBN: 9780073511313 ISBN: 9780070172661 [IE]

http://www.brue2e.com

PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University, Sarah Jennings, University of Tasmania and Ben Bernanke, Princeton University 2008 (September 2008) ISBN: 9780070144446

McGraw-Hill Australia Title http://www.mhhe.com/au/frank2e

Now in its second edition and authored by a highly regarded international team, Principles of Microeconomics is the ideal introduction to modern microeconomics. This book encourages students to develop an intuitive understanding of economics and view it as a way of solving problems. Core economic concepts are introduced in straightforward examples and their application reinforced through real-life scenarios, topical vignettes and review exercises. Providing a comprehensive grounding in microeconomic principles, this text is perfectly suited for afirstcourseatbothundergraduateandpostgraduatelevel. CoNteNts Part 1: Introduction 1. Thinking as an economist 2. Comparative advantage: the basis for exchange 3. Supply and demand: an introduction Part 2: Competition 4. Elasticity 5. Demand: the benefit side of the market 6. Perfectly competitive supply: the cost side of the market 7. Efficiency and exchange 8. International trade and trade policy 9. The quest for profit and the invisible hand Part 3: Imperfect Competition 10. Monopoly and other forms of imperfect competition 11. Thinking strategically Part 4: Market Failure And Public Policy 12. Externalities, common resources and property rights 13. Public goods and tax policy 14. The economics of information 15. Labour markets, poverty and income distribution Appendix A: Answers to in-chapter exercises Glossary Index

Building on the tremendous success of their best-selling Principles of Economics text, Brue, McConnell, and Flynn have revised their one-semester text to provide a fresh alternative. This 18-chapter textbook utilizes clear and careful language along with pedagogy and topic discussion suited to the needs of one-semester course.. Brue/McConnell/Flynn is a patient, substantive treatment of micro and macro economics for the one-semester course with many up-to-date, motivating examples. New to this editioN McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Economics. McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Economics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Economics, Connect Plus Economics provides all of the Connect Economics features plus the following: · · · · · · · · · · · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. Connect Features available with this title: End-of-Chapter Content Test Bank LearnSmart Personal Learning Plan Instructor Resources Article Analysis Tegrity Reorganized and recast macro section in terms of the modern, dominant paradigm of macroeconomics, using economic growth as the central backdrop and viewing business fluctuations as arising from demand and supply shocks in conjunction with short-run price and wage stickiness. A new set of 26 Worked Problems, identified by icons in the book margins and available at the book's Web site. A new appendix to the supply and demand chapter providing concrete examples of changes in demand, changes in supply, changes in both, as well as situations in which pre-set prices can result in shortages or surpluses available on the Brue/McConnell/Flynn Essentials Web site. Updated and expanded discussion of elasticity to include income elasticity, with an example of how it can help predict which products will fall off in demand more than others during recessions.

· ·

·

30

ECONOMICS

· Up-to-date discussions and examples, such as: climate change policies, ethanol subsidies and their myriad impacts, the most rapidly expanding and disappearing U.S. jobs, the mortgage debt crisis, the sharp business downturn of late 2007 and 2008, the Fed term auction facility, recent Fed monetary policy, the stimulus package of 2008, the additions of countries to the European Union and the euro zone, changes in exchange rates, and many more. Benefit:Up-to-datematerialwithengagingreal-worldexamplesto help students apply economic theory in a practical and relevent context Proof : Illustrated mini case studies in every chapter Probe : Do you think it is easier for non-economics students to grasp core theories of they are presented through contemporary examples? How well does your current text do this? Are the examples engaging and up-to-date? An extra chapter on microeconomics in the new edition, plus a revised structure to the macro section, introducing growth and cycles before developing the tools with which to analyse macro problems Benefit:Ensuresasolidunderstandingofkeyconceptsatamanageable pace Proof : Separate chapters on suppky and demand, plus a revised structure to the macro chapters Probe : At what pace do you teach micro and macroeconomic principles to students without an economic background? Does your current text have enough grounding in core theory before moving on toanalysespecificissues? Pedagogy: Learning outcomes, recaps, key terms, review questions and answers, signposted features and photos throughout the text Benefit:Guidesstudentsthroughthematerialatacomprehensible level and pace. The focus is on equipping studnets with the tools to apply knowledge for themselves and to text this as they work through the text Proof : Features in every chapter Probe : How important do you think rigorous pedagogy is in a book at this level? Does your current text provide opportunities for recaps and testing of students knowledge as they progress through the text? Does it provide them with the tools to think for themselves? CoNteNts

CoNteNts PART ONE: Introduction 1 Limits, Alternatives, and Choices Appendix: Graphs and Their Meaning 2 The Market System and the Circular Flow PART TWO: Price, Quantity, and Efficiency 3 Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 4 Elasticity of Demand and Supply 5 Public Goods and Externalities PART THREE: Product Markets 6 Businesses and Their Costs 7 Pure Competition 8 Pure Monopoly 9 Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly PART FOUR: Resource Markets 10 Wage Determination 11 Income Inequality and Poverty PART FIVE: GDP, Growth and Instability 12 GDP and Economic Growth 13 Business Cycles, Unemployment, and Inflation 14 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 15 Fiscal Policy, Deficits, and Debt PART SIX: Money, Banking, and Monetary Policy 16 Money and Banking 17 Monetary Policy PART SEVEN: International Economics 18 International Trade and Exchange Rates

New

*9780077121884*

FOUNDATIONS OF ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By David Begg, Principal of Tanaka Business School, Imperial College, University of London

2009 (March 2009) / 432 pages ISBN: 9780077121884

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/begg

Foundations of Economics, forth edition is ideal for students taking introductory economics modules as part of an interdisciplinary course. Building on the success of the second edition, the book provides accessible overviews of key economic topics, interweaving these with real-world examples and practical activities to equip students to think for themselves. New to this editioN Topical and up-to-date material, including real-world examples and policy problems, and mini case studies featuring examples such as Live 8 and the impact of China on the world steel industry

1. What is Economics? Appendix 1: Graph Methodology Part 1: Microeconomics 2. Demand 3. Supply 4. Elasticity 5. Costs, Supply and Perfect Competition 6. Imperfect competition 7. Input markets: Labour 8. Other Input Markets and Income Distribution Part 2: Macroeconomics 9. Governing the market 10. The income and output nations 11. Short-run fluctuations in income and output 12. Interest rates, money and inflation 13. Aggregate supply, inflation and unemployment 14. Exchange rates and the balance of payments 15. The global economy 16. European Integration

31

ECONOMICS

International Edition

ECONOMICS: THE BASICS

By Mike Mandel, Business Week 2009 (December 2008) / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073523118 ISBN: 9780071280396 [IE]

International Edition

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMICS 7th Edition

By Bradley R Schiller, American University 2009 (April 2008) / 448 pages ISBN: 9780073375809 ISBN: 9780077355869 (+ Economy 2009 Update) ISBN: 9780071283489 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/mandel1e

Mandel1eisoneofthefirstbooksonthemarkettobeconstructed "fromthegroundup"specificallyforthe1-termsurveycourse.Unlike most books in this market that are simply watered-down versions of existing Principles texts, Mandel 1e is written especially for the survey course, and designed for students who will not go on to take other econ courses. Mike Mandel, Chief Economist for BusinessWeek magazine, has written Economics: The Basics, 1e in a journalistic style, drawing upon BusinessWeek articles and experience throughout the text to deliver the basics of economics and develop a students' economic literacy. Mandel's current examples, journalistic writing style and accessible math will help instructors overcome the common challenges of this course, and make the material more approachable and attractive to students. CoNteNts Ch 01 Introduction Ch 02 Demand And Supply: The Basics Of The Market Economy Ch 03 Market Equilibrium And Shifts Ch 04 How Businesses Work Ch 05 Competition And Market Power Ch 06 Government And The Economy Ch 07 The First Step Into Macroeconomics Ch 08 Inflation Ch 09 Growth Ch 10 Business Cycles, Unemployment, And Inflation Ch 11 Fiscal Policy Ch 12 Managing The Economy: Monetary Policy Ch 13 The Financial Markets Ch 14 International Trade Ch 15 Technological Change Ch 16 Economics Of The Labor Market Ch 17 The Distribution Of Income Ch 18 Delving Deeper Into Microeconomics Ch 19 Delving Deeper Into Macroeconomics Ch 20 The Economics Of Retirement And Health Care Ch 21 The Economics Of Energy, The Environment, And Global Climate Change Glossary Index

http://www.mhhe.com/schilleressentials7e

Essentials of Economics is the market leader for the one-semester survey course. In just about 400 pages, it provides a solid introduction to the core concepts of economics with an emphasis on real-world examples and current events. Essentials has earned its popular success because, unlike other books on the market, it is free of the abstract and complex theory that requires more time than this course allows. Instead,thetextiscleanandconcise,withmanyexamplesofsignificance to students today, including Headlines and Policy Perspectives that use current events to help illustrate the topics discussed. This real-world policy emphasis is a distinctive feature of Schiller's text and is integral to its dominance of the survey text market. CoNteNts Section I: Basics Chapter 1 The Challenge of Economics Chapter 2 The U.S. Economy Chapter 3 Supply and Demand Section II: Microeconomics Chapter 4 Consumer Demand Chapter 5 Supply Decisions Chapter 6 Competition Chapter 7 Monopoly Chapter 8 The Labor Market Chapter 9 Government Intervention Section III: Macroeconomics Chapter 10 The Business Cycle Chapter 11 Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 12 Fiscal Policy Chapter 13 Money and Banks Chapter 14 Monetary Policy Chapter 15 Economic Growth Chapter 16 Theory and Reality Section IV: International Chapter 17 International Trade

ComplimeNtary Copies

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

32

ECONOMICS

Economics for Business

Economics Issues

New

*9780077124731*

ECONOMICS FOR BUSINESS 3rd Edition

By David Begg, University of London and Damian Ward, Bradford University

New

*9780073527307*

TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON ECONOMIC ISSUES 14th Edition

By Frank J Bonello, University of Notre Dame, Isobel Lobo, Benedictine University

2009 (November 2009) / 560 pages ISBN: 9780077124731

McGraw-Hill UK Title www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/beggandward

Economics for Business, 3rd edition, is an essential introduction to economics, tailor-made for business students. The text demonstrates the relevance of applying economics principles to solve business problems,usingauniquebusinessfirstapproach.Keyeconomictheories are clearly explained within the context of modern business, drawing on a wealth of contemporary examples to bring the topics to life. The pedagogy allows students to consolidate their learning and equips them with the economic tools to confront real business situations. CoNteNts Section 1: Introduction 1. Economics for Business Section 2: Understanding Markets 2. Consumers in the market place 3. Firms in the market place 4. Markets in action Section 3: Competition and Profitability 5. Market structure and firm performance 6. Strategic Rivalry 7. Growth strategies 8. Governing business Section 4: Domestic Macroeconomics 9. Introduction to the Macroeconomy 10. Measuring macroeconomic variables and policy issues 11. Expenditure and Fiscal Policy 12. Money, Banking and Interest 13. Inflation, output and economic policy 14. Supply side policies and economic growth Section 5: Global Economics 15. Exchange rates and the balance of payments 16. Globalization

2010 (April 2009) / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073527307

A Dushkin Title http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073527300.mhtml

TAKING SIDES: WORLD POLITICS, 14/e presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor's manual with testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by a book website. Visit www.mhcls.com. New to this editioN To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077311892). CoNteNts Unit 1 Microeconomic Issues Issue 1. Are Profits the Only Business of Business? Issue 2. Are CEOs Paid What They Are Worth? Issue 3. Is OSHA Working Effectively to Protect the Safety of Construction Workers? Issue 4. Is the New Medicare Part D Drug Benefit Good Health Care Policy? Issue 5. Are Health Savings Accounts Working Effectively? Issue 6. Is It Time to Reform Medical Malpractice Litigation? Unit 2 Macroeconomic Issues Issue 7. Is Wal-Mart Good for the Economy? Issue 8. Should Social Security Be Changed to Include Personal Retirement Accounts? Issue 9. Should Unemployment Benefits Be Extended? Issue 10. Do American Consumers Need a Credit Card Bill of Rights? Issue 11. Should Minimum Wage and Living Wage Laws Be Eliminated? Issue 12. Do Unskilled Immigrants Hurt the Economy? Unit 3 The World Around Us Issue 13. Is a Fair Trade Policy Superior to a Free Trade Policy? Issue 14. Is Loan Mitigation the Answer to the Housing Foreclosure Problem? Issue 15. Will Biofuels Like Ethanol Reduce U.S. Dependence on Foreign Oil? Issue 16. Are Spending Cuts the Right Way to Balance the Federal Government's Budget? Issue 17. Has the North American Free Trade Agreement Benefited the Economies of Canada, Mexico, and the United States? Issue 18. Do the Testing and Accountability Elements of the No Child

33

ECONOMICS

Left Behind Act Prevent a Proper Cost-Benefit Evaluation? Issue 19. Is the Inequality in U.S. Income Distribution Surging? Issue 20. Is the Treasury's $700 Billion Bailout the Solution to the Credit Crisis? 20. Companies Slam on the Brakes 21. The End of Economics 22. The Elephant in the Room 23. Growth Factor 24. The Tax Reform Revolution 25. Fixing the Tax System 26. What Should Central Banks Do? 27. How Does Monetary Policy Affect the U.S. Economy? 28. Bank ATMs and ATM Surcharges 29. A Quiet Revolution in Money 30. Toward a Cashless Society 31. Record $482 Billion `09 Deficit Forecast Unit 5: The Changing Global Economy 32. Update on the State of the Future 33. Consumer Trends in Three Different "Worlds," 34. Refighting NAFTA 35. Fighting The Global Slump: Less Is Dangerous 36. Eliminating Child Labor 37. Asymmetric Globalization: Global Markets Require Good Global Politics 38. Will the World Run Dry? Global Water and Food Security 39. Half a Tank: The Impending Arrival of Peak Oil 40. Do Global Attitudes and Behaviors Support Sustainable Development?

New

*9780073528564*

ANNUAL EDITIONS: ECONOMICS 35th Edition

By Don Cole, Drew University

2010 (February 2009) / 256 pages ISBN: 9780073528564

http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073528560.mhtml

Annual Editions is a series of over 65 volumes, each designed to provide convenient, inexpensive access to a wide range of current articles from some of the most respected magazines, newspapers, and journals published today. Annual Editions are updated on a regular basis through a continuous monitoring of over 300 periodical sources. The articles selected are authored by prominent scholars, researchers, and commentators writing for a general audience. The Annual Editions volumes have a number of common organizational features designed to make them particularly useful in the classroom: a general introduction; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites; and a brief overview for each section. Each volume also offers an online Instructor's Resource Guide with testing materials. Using Annual Editions in the Classroom is the general instructor's guide for our popular Annual Editions series and is available in print (0073301906) or online. Visit www.mhcls.com for more details. New to this editioN To purchase an electronic eBook version of this title, visit www. CourseSmart.com (ISBN 0077309367). CoNteNts Unit 1: Introduction 1. How Much for a Life? Try $3 Million to $5 Million 2. There Is No Such Thing as a War for Free, 3. More, Bigger, Faster 4. Counter-Terrorism: The Private Cost of More Security Unit 2: Microeconomics 5. Gas Costs Squeeze Daily Life 6. Airlines 7. The Real Price of Gas 8. Antitrust Inquiry Launched into Intel, 9. Modernizing U.S. Antitrust Law: The Role of Technology and Innovation 10. Climate Change and the Economy 11. Congested Parks--A Pricing Dilemma Unit 3: The Economics of Work and Income 12. Building a More-Humane Economy 13. Outsized Offshore Outsourcing 14. The New Suburban Poverty 15. The Gender Gyp 16. New Floor Set for Wages 17. Workplace Abuse: Why the Golden Age of Labor May Be Over Unit 4: Macroeconomics 18. Countdown to a Meltdown 19. How Obama Will Stoke the Economy 2010 (September 2009) / 456 pages ISBN: 9780073375939 ISBN: 9780070166707 [IE]

New

*9780073375939*

International Edition

ISSUES IN ECONOMICS TODAY 5th Edition

By Robert Guell, Indiana State University--Terre Haute

http://www.mhhe.com/guell5e

Issues in Economics Today is a modern issues book built to meet instructor and student needs simultaneously. This title was developed toallowinstructorsthemaximumflexibilitytoteachthismaterialina mannerthatfitstheirpersonalstyle.Thiseditionincludes8intensive core theory chapters and 35 shorter issues chapters. The book is designed to allow faculty the flexibility in approach as well. Some instructors like to intertwine theory and issues while others like to lay thetheoreticalfoundationfirstbeforeheadingintotheissues.With flexibilityinmind,instructorscansetathemefortheircourseandpick issues consistent with that theme while others will let their students decide what issues interest them. The Fifth Edition continues to stay on the cusp of recent events and topics through a conversational writing style that connects with the reader. The housing bubble, the recession of 2007-2009, federal spending, poverty in the United States vs. other developed countries, the environment, and foreign exchange rates are only a few of the events and important topics covered in the Fifth edition. New to this editioN New Chapters: In its Fifth edition, Issues in Economics Today introduces three new chapters that examines the housing bubble, the causes, consequences, and responses to the 2007-2009 recession, and foreign exchange rates.

34

ECONOMICS

- New Chapter 11, The Housing Crisis comes from the web and places in the book a revised version of the Housing Bubble chapter that has resided on the web for two editions. This chapter examines the causes of this crisis, its origins and its effects. - New Chapter 12, The Recession of 2008-2009 looks at the recession that began in 2007, focusing on the housing issue without making the housing bubble chapter itself seem redundant, and then moves to put the TARP and stimulus package discussion in the context of the time in which they were enacted. - New Chapter 16, International Finance and Exchange Rates pulls the foreign exchange discussion out of a chapter devoted to the IMF and gives it a deeper treatment. This chapter is part of an ongoing commitment to international issues. Updated Data and Information: Data graphs and tables were updated to include the latest available information. Reorganization of chapters: The Fifth edition reorganizes the 35 issues chapters to better meet the needs of students. Web Chapters: Previous edition chapters on Anti-Trust, Head Start, and Rent Control are now located on the Web site as optional chapters. CoNteNts Chapter 1: Economics: The Study of Opportunity Cost 1A: Graphing: Yes, You Can Chapter 2: Supply and Demand Chapter 3: The Concept of Elasticity and Consumer and Producer Surplus Chapter 4: Firm Production, Cost, and Revenue Chapter 5: Perfect Competition, Monopoly, and Economic versus Normal Profit Chapter 6: Every Macroeconomic Word You Ever Heard: Gross Domestic Product, Inflation, Unemployment, Recession, and Depression Chapter 7: Interest Rates and Present Value Chapter 8: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Chapter 9: Fiscal Policy Chapter 10: Monetary Policy Chapter 11: The Housing Crisis Chapter 12: The Recession of 2008-2009 Chapter 13: Federal Spending Chapter 14: Federal Deficits, Surpluses, and the National Debt Chapter 15: International Trade: Does it Jeopardize American Jobs? Chapter 16: International Finance and Exhange Rates Chapter 17: NAFTA, GATT, WTO: Are Trade Agreements Good for Us? Chapter 18: Economic Growth and Development Chapter 19: The International Monetary Fund: Doctor or Witch Doctor? Chapter 20: The Line Between Legal and Illegal Goods Chapter 21: The Environment Chapter 22: Health Care Chapter 23: Government Provided Health Insurance: Medicaid, Medicare, and the Child Health Insurance Program Chapter 24: The Economics of Prescription Drugs Chapter 25: Economics and the Law Chapter 26: The Economics of Crime Chapter 27: The Economics of Race and Sex Discrimination Chapter 28: Farm Policy Chapter 29: Minimum Wage Chapter 30: Ticket Brokers and Ticket Scalping Chapter 31: Why Did This Textbook Cost so Much? Chapter 32: Education Chapter 33: Poverty and Welfare Chapter 34: Social Security Chapter 35: Personal Income Taxes Chapter 36: Energy Prices Chapter 37: If We Build It, Will They Come? And Other Sports Questions Chapter 38: The Stock Market and Crashes Chapter 39: Unions Chapter 40: The Cost of War and Occupation Chapter 41: The Economics of Terrorism Chapter 42: Wal-Mart: Always Low Prices (and Low Wages)--Always Chapter 43: The Economic Impact of Casino Gambling

New

International Edition

*9780073511337*

ECONOMICS OF SOCIAL ISSUES 19th Edition

By Ansel M Sharp, University of the South, Charles A Register, Florida Atlantic UniversityBoca Raton and Paul W Grimes, Mississippi State University 2010 (September 2009) / 512 pages ISBN: 9780073511337 ISBN: 9780070172678 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/sharp19e

Sharp, Register, and Grimes' Economics of Social Issues originated the social issues approach to teaching basic economic principles. Thiseditionreflectstheimportantsocietaltrendsandpublicdebates current at the time. Currency and relevance are the motivations behind themajorchangesthatprevioususerswillquicklyfindinthisedition. Each chapter presents economic concepts then places them within the context of very current issues facing society. Economics of Social Issues has garnered a loyal user following for its timely and impartial handling of current social issues that dominate the news. As the major social issues facing our society change, so does this textbook. While the issues are contemporary and the supporting information updated, the authors remain objective. New to this editioN New Chapter 13 "Money, Banking, and the Financial System: Old Problems with New Twists": Chapter 13 is a new chapter on money, banking and the financial system. This new chapter provides an introduction to financial markets allowing for an examination of the financial crisis and its accompanying recession. This modification will provide instructors with all the tools necessary to explain and discuss these major economic events. Revised and updated Chapter 12 "Unemployment and Inflation: Can We Find a Balance?": This new edition combines the topics of unemployment and inflation into one chapter. This reorganization will allow instructors the flexibility to use the recent macroeconomic problems as an opportunity to teach important lessons. Updated economic issues: Chapter 2 includes updates on China's economic and social progress with special emphasis on its ongoing fight with pollution; Chapter 5 includes a discussion of the sociological statement implicitly being made when goods and/or services are made illegal; and Chapter 6 includes a revised summary of the latest available information on the effectiveness of voucher and charter school programs. Updated data: All data found in the 19th edition has been thoroughly revised and updated with the latest available economic statistics. Additionally, the authors updated review questions and the recommended readings list to reflect new or modified content. The end-of-chapter list of websites points readers to original data sources for the latest figures released after publication. CoNteNts 1 Alleviating Human Misery: The Role of Economic Reasoning 2 Economic Systems, Resource Allocation, and Social Well-Being: Lessons from China's Transition

35

ECONOMICS

3 Government Control of Prices in Mixed Systems: What Are the Actual Outcomes? 4 Pollution Problems: Must We Foul Our Own Nests? 5 Economics of Crime and Its Prevention: How Much Is Too Much? 6 The Economics of Education: Crisis and Reform 7 Poverty and Discrimination: Why Are So Many Still Poor? 8 The Economics of Monopoly Power: Who Does What to Whom? 9 The Economics of Professional Sports: What Is the Real Score? 10 Competition in the Global Marketplace: Should We Protect Ourselves from International Trade? 11 Economic Growth: Why Is the Economic Road So Bumpy? 12 Money, Banking, and the Financial System: Old Problems with New Twists 13 Unemployment and Inflation: Can We Find a Balance? 14 Government Spending, Taxation, and the National Debt: Who Wins and Who Loses? 15 Social Security and Medicare: How Secure Is Our Safety Net for the Elderly? Glossary Index Chapter 15 ­ The Demand for Money Chapter 16 ­ The Fed, Money, and Credit Chapter 17 ­ Policy Chapter 18 ­ Financial Markets and Asset Prices Part 5 ­ Big Events, International Adjustments, and Advanced Topics Chapter 19 ­ Big Events: The Economics of Depression, Hyperinflation, and Deficits Chapter 20 ­ International Adjustment and Interdependence Chapter 21 ­ Advanced Topics Appendix Glossary Index

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS Theory and Policy, 3rd Edition

By G S Gupta, Professor at Ahmedabad 2007 (November 2007) / 528 pages ISBN: 9780070668072

McGraw-Hill India Title

Intermediate Macroeconomics

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 10th Edition

By Rudiger Dornbusch (deceased), Stanley Fischer, Mass Institute of Tech and Richard Startz, University of Washington 2008 (August 2007) / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073128115 ISBN: 9780071259248 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/guptamacro3e

CoNteNts PART I: INTRODUCTION AND MEASUREMENT 1. Introduction: An Overview 2. National Income 3. Inflation, Unemployment and Poverty 4. Money, Fiscal and Foreign Sector Variables PART II: BHEAVIOURAL AND TECHNOLOGICAL FUNCTIONS 5. Consumption Function 6. Investment Function 7. Government, Foreign Trade and Foreign Exchange Rate Functions 8. Money Demand and Supply Functions 9. Production Function, Factor Market and Aggregate Suply Function PART III: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS AND STABILISATION POLICY: MACROECONOMIC MODELS 10. Business Cycles, Stabilisation Policies and Economic Models 11. Classical and Keynesian Fixed Price Models 12. Keynesian Flexible Price Model, Open Economy and Policy Debates 13. New Classical and New Keynesian Models 14. Unemployment and Inflation: Causes, Consequences and Cures PART V: ECONOMIC GROWTH AND THE STATE OF MACROECONOMICS 15. Economic Growth 16. State of Macroeconomics Appendices Index

http://www.mhhe.com/dornbusch10e

Dornbusch, Fischer, and Startz has been a long-standing, leading intermediate macroeconomic theory text since its introduction in 1978. This revision retains most of the text's traditional features, including a middle-of-the-road approach and very current research, while updating and simplifying the exposition. This revision focuses on making the text even easier to teach from. The only pre-requisite continues to be principles of economics. CoNteNts Part 1 ­ Introduction and National Income Accounting Chapter 1 ­ Introduction Chapter 2 ­ National Income Accounting Part 2 ­ Growth, Aggregate Supply and Demand, and Policy Chapter 3 ­ Growth and Accumulation Chapter 4 ­ Growth and Policy Chapter 5 ­ Aggregate Supply and Demand Chapter 6 ­ Aggregate Supply: Wages, Prices, and Unemployment Chapter 7 ­ The Anatomy of Inflation and Unemployment Chapter 8 ­ Policy Preview Part 3 ­ First Models Chapter 9 ­ Income and Spending Chapter 10 ­ Money, Interest, and Income Chapter 11 ­ Monetary and Fiscal Policy Chapter 12 ­ International Linkages Part 4 ­ Behavioral Foundations Chapter 13 ­ Consumption and Saving Chapter 14 ­ Investment Spending

36

ECONOMICS

International Edition

MACROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Bradford DeLong, University of California--Berkeley 2006 / 544 pages ISBN: 9780071268769 [IE]

Intermediate Microeconomics

http://www.mhhe.com/economics/delong2

CoNteNts Part I Preliminaries 1 Introduction to Macroeconomics 2 Measuring the Macroeconomy 3 Thinking Like an Economist Part II Long-Run Economic Growth 4 The Theory of Economic Growth 5 The Reality of Economic Growth: History and Prospect Part III Flexible-Price Macroeconomics 6 Building Blocks of the Flexible-Price Model 7 Equilibrium in the Flexible-Price Model 8 Money, Prices, and Inflation Part IV Sticky-Price Macroeconomics 9 The Sticky-Price Income-Expenditure Framework: Consumption and the Multiplier 10 Investment, Net Exports, and Interest Rates: The IS Curve 11 The Money Market and the LM Curve 12 The Phillips Curve and Expectations Part V Macroeconomic Policy 13 Stabilization Policy: The Budget Balance, the National Debt, and Investment International Economic Policy 14 Changes in the Macroeconomy and Changes in Macroeconomic Policy 15 The Future of Macroeconomics Epiloge

New

*9780073375946*

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS AND BEHAVIOR 8th Edition

By Robert H Frank, Cornell University

2010 (September 2009) / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073375946 ISBN: 9780070166745 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/frank8e

Robert Frank's Microeconomics and Behavior covers the essential topics of microeconomics while exploring the relationship between economics analysis and human behavior. The book's clear narrative appeals to students, and its numerous examples help students develop economic intuition. This book introduces modern topics not often found in intermediate textbooks. Its focus throughout is to develop a student's capacity to "think like an economist." New to this editioN New coverage of the efficient markets hypothesis. This behavioral analysis of the hypothesis has been added to Chapter 15, helping students understand the implications of consumer confidence on stock prices. Cleaner, more streamlined aesthetic that mirrors the core principles approach of the text. The design has also been pedagogically enriched to include pictures illustrating the economic naturalist examples that are a hallmark of the text, making it more accessible to students than ever. Fully updated throughout. All examples and data have been carefully examined and updated throughout the text, and the supplement program has undergone a similar treatment. CoNteNts Part 1 Introduction 1 Thinking Like an Economist 2 Supply and Demand Part 2 The Theory of Consumer Behavior 3 Rational Consumer Choice 4 Individual and Market Demand 5 Applications of Rational Choice and Demand Theories 6 The Economics of Information and Choice under Uncertainty 7 Explaining Tastes: The Importance of Altruism and Other Nonegoistic Behavior 8 Cognitive Limitations and Consumer Behavior Part 3 The Theory of the Firm and Market Structure 9 Production 10 Costs 11 Perfect Competition 12 Monopoly 13 Imperfect Competition: A Game-Theoretic Approach Part 4 Factor Markets 14 Labor

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

37

ECONOMICS

15 Capital Part 5 Externalities, Public Good, and Welfare 16 Externalities, Property Rights, and the Coase Theorem 17 Government Index 18W General Equilibrium and Market Efficiency (online)

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS

By B Douglas Bernheim, Stanford University and Michael D Whinston, Northwestern University 2008 (December 2007) / 672 pages ISBN: 9780072900279 ISBN: 9780071277556 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/bernheim1e

New

*9780077121778*

MICROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Wyn Morgan, University of Nottingham, Michael L Katz, University of California-Berkeley and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University

Bernheim and Whinston's Microeconomics focuses on the core principles of the intermediate microeconomic course: individuals and firmsmakingdecisions,competitivemarkets,andmarketfailures.An accessible text that does not require knowledge of calculus, Microeconomics utilizes examples and integrates topics that will stimulate and motivate students. Key advantages of Bernheim and Whinston's approach are: 1) A fresh, up-to-date treatment of modern microeconomic theory. 2) A clear and engaging writing style, along with innovative pedagogy that provides students with more accessible ways to understand and master difficult concepts. 3) Numerous real-world applications that are closely tied to the theoretical material developed in the text. 4) Teaches students to solve a wide range of quantitative problems without requiring calculus. CoNteNts Part I: Introduction 1. Preliminaries 2. Supply and Demand 3. Balancing Benefits and Costs Part II: Individual Decision Making IIA: Consumption Decisions 4. Principles and Preferences 5. Constraints, Choices, and Demand 6. From Demand to Welfare IIB: Production Decisions 7. Technology and Production 8. Cost Minimization 9. Profit Maximization IIC: Additional Topics 10. Decisions Involving Time 11. Decisions involving uncertainty 12. Decisions Involving Strategy (Game Theory) 13. Behavioral Economics Part III: Markets IIIA. Competitive Markets 14. Equilibrium and Efficiency IIIB: Imperfectly Competitive Markets 17. Monopoly 18. Pricing 19. Oligopoly 20. Externalities and Public Goods 21. Information and Contracts

2009 (March 2009) / 704 pages ISBN: 9780077121778

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/morgan McGraw-Hill UK Title

Microeconomics, 2nd European Edition offers comprehensive and accessible coverage of microeconomic theory, explaining how this is used to analyse and evaluate contemporary market systems. The book draws on relevant real world examples to highlight how theory can help to solve or understand a range of problems and is a central basis for thinking like an economist. New to this editioN New Learning Outcomes, which act as signposts to the core concepts that students should grasp in each chapter CoNteNts 1. The Market Economy Part 1: The Household 2. Consumer Choice 3. Comparative Statics and Demand 4. Price Changes and Consumer Welfare 5. The Household as Supplier Part 2: The Firm 6. The Firm and it's Goals 7. Technology and Production 8. Cost Part 3: The Competitive Model 9. The Price-Taking Firm 10. Equilibrium in Competitive Markets 11. General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics Part 4: Market Power 12. Monopoly 13. More on Price-Making Firms 14. Game Theory 15. Oligopoly and Strategic Behaviour Part 5: Extensions and Missing Markets 16. Asymmetric Information 17. Externalities of Public Goods 18. Choice Under Uncertainty

38

ECONOMICS

International Edition

MICROECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Michael L Katz, University of California, Berkeley, and Harvey S Rosen, Princeton University 1998 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780071153546 [IE] CoNteNts Chapter 1 The Market Economy. Part I The Household: Chapter 2 Consumer Choice. Chapter 3 Comparative Statics and Demand. Chapter 4 Price Changes and Consumer welfare. Chapter 5 The Household as Supplier. Chapter 6 Choice Under Uncertainty. Part II The Firm: Chapter 7 The Firm and Its Goals. Chapter 8 Technology and Production. Chapter 9 Cost. Part III The Competitive Model: Chapter 10 The Price-Taking Firm. Chapter 11 Equilibrium in Competitive Markets. Chapter 12 General Equilibrium and Welfare Economics. Part IV Market Power: Chapter 13 Monopoly. Chapter 14 More on Price-Making Firms. Chapter 15 Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior. Chapter 16 Game Theory. Chapter 17 Asymmetric Information. Chapter 18 Externalities and Public Goods.

New

*9780073375960*

International Edition

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS & BUSINESS STRATEGY 7th Edition

By Michael Baye, Indiana University-Bloomington

2010 (October 2009) / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073375960 ISBN: 9780071267441 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/baye7e

Baye's Managerial Economics and Business Strategy remains the best-selling managerial economics textbook in which it continues to provide students with the tools from intermediate microeconomics, game theory, and industrial organization to make sound managerial decisions. Baye is known for its real-world examples, frontier research, inclusion of modern topics not found in other managerial books, as well as balanced coverage of traditional and modern microeconomic tools. The Seventh Edition retains all of the key signature features of previous editions and incorporates new features to enhance students' learning experiences and make it easier to teach from the book. These include updated headlines, new and updated inside business applications, and new end-of-chapter material. New to this editioN

Managerial Economics

New

*9780073375915*

International Edition

Updated Headlines: Updated and current headlines begin each chapter with a real-world economic problem. These problems are essentially hand-picked "mini-cases" designed to motivate students to better understand the chapter material. By consulting the end of chapter answers (Answering the Headline), students learn basic economic thinking. New and Updated Inside Business applications: These new Inside Business boxes illustrate real-world applications of theory developed in the chapter; these are drawn from both current economic literature and the popular press. New end-of-chapter material: Over 25 new problems and applications were added to the Seventh Edition; new material is included at the end of each chapter set so that existing problem numbers match those in the Sixth Edition, making for an easy transition. Updated Supplements: The new Online Learning Center Web site offers full teaching notes and solutions to Memos for the Time Warner case-plus a host of additional supplements. These include over 10 additional full-length cases complete with expanded teaching notes and links to chapter content, complete solutions to all end-ofchapter problems, an updated and expanded text bank, animated Power Point presentations, chapter summaries, chapter outlines, the Digital Image Library and more. CoNteNts Chapter 1: The Fundamentals of Managerial Economics Chapter 2: Market Forces: Demand and Supply Chapter 3: Quantitative Demand Analysis Chapter 4: The Theory of Individual Behavior Chapter 5: The Production Process and Costs Chapter 6: The Organization of the Firm Chapter 7: The Nature of Industry Chapter 8: Managing in Competitive, Monopolistic, and Monopolistically Competitive Markets Chapter 9: Basic Oligopoly Models

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 10th Edition

By Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles Maurice (deceased) 2011 (January 2010) / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073375915 ISBN: 9780071221207 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/thomas10e

(Details unavailable at press time)

39

ECONOMICS

Chapter 10: Game Theory: Inside Oligopoly Chapter 11: Pricing Strategies for Firms with Market Power Chapter 12: The Economics of Information Chapter 13: Advanced Topics in Business Strategy Chapter 14: A Manager's Guide to Government in the Marketplace Case Study: Challenges at Time Warner: Appendix A: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems Appendix B: Additional Readings and References

International Edition

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 9th Edition

By Christopher R Thomas, University of South Florida and S Charles Maurice (Deceased) 2008 (March 2007) / 704 pages ISBN: 9780073346564 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071265546 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/thomas9

International Edition

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS & ORGANIZATIONAL ARCHITECTURE 5th Edition

By James Brickley and Jerold Zimmerman of University of Rochester, Clifford W Smith, Jr 2009 (October 2008) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780073375823 ISBN: 9780071284806 [IE]

Thomas and Maurice's Managerial Economics teaches students how to use microeconomic theory to analyze business decisions. In a clear and engaging writing style, Christopher Thomas carries on the tradition he and Charles Maurice shepherded for eight previous editions in the 9th edition. The 9th Edition explores the current market forces that create both opportunities and constraints for business enterprises. The book has enjoyed success in part because of its mid-level of rigor, clarity of presentation, and end-of-chapter material. CoNteNts Part I: some preliminaries Chapter 1 Managers, profits, and markets Chapter 2 Demand, supply, and market equilibrium Chapter 3 Marginal analysis for optimal decision making Chapter 4 Basic estimation techniques Part II: Demand analysis Chapter 5 Theory of consumer behavior Chapter 6 Elasticity and demand Chapter 7 Demand estimation and forecasting Part III: Production and cost analysis Chapter 8 Production and cost in the short run Chapter 9 Production and cost in the long run Chapter 10 Production and cost estimation / On the website: Special Topic Module 1: Linear programming Part IV: Profit-maximization in various market structures Chapter 11 Managerial decisions in competitive markets Chapter 12 Managerial decisions for firms with market power Chapter 13 Strategic decision making in oligopoly markets Part V: Advanced managerial decision making Chapter 14 Advanced techniques for profit maximization Chapter 15 Decisions under risk and uncertainty On the website: Special Topic Module 2: Investment decisions Appendix: statistical tables Answers to technical problems

http://www.mhhe.com/brickley5e

Managerial Economics and Organizational Architecture, 5e helps the student to gain an understanding of the basic tools of economics used to solve important business problems. It also provides an indepthanalysisofthefirmandcorporategovernancetopics.TheFifth Edition has an improved focus on decision-making and managerial applications, within the structure of an organization. CoNteNts PART 1: Basic Concepts Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Economists' View of Behavior Chapter 3: Markets, Organizations, and the Role of Knowledge PART 2: Managerial Economics Chapter 4: Demand Chapter 5: Production and Cost Chapter 6: Market Structure Chapter 7: Pricing with Market Power Chapter 8: Economics of Strategy: Creating and Capturing Value Chapter 9: Economics of Strategy: Game Theory Chapter 10: Incentive Conflicts and Contracts PART 3: Designing Organizational Architecture Chapter 11: Organizational Architecture Chapter 12: Decision Rights: The Level of Empowerment Chapter 13: Decision Rights: Bundling Tasks into Jobs and Subunits Chapter 14: Attracting and Retaining Qualified Employees Chapter 15: Incentive Compensation Chapter 16: Individual Performance Evaluation Chapter 17: Divisional Performance Evaluation Capstone Case Study on Organizational Architecture: Arthur Andersen LLP PART 4: Applications of Organizational Architecture Chapter 18: Corporate Governance Chapter 19: Vertical Integration and Outsourcing Chapter 20: Leadership: Motivating Change within Organizations Chapter 21: Understanding the Business Environment: The Economics of Regulation Chapter 22: Ethics and Organizational Architecture Chapter 23: Organizational Architecture and the Process of Management Innovation Glossary Index

40

ECONOMICS

Environmental Economics

International Edition

ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 5th Edition

By Barry C Field, University of Mass-Amherst and Martha K Field, Greenfield Comm College 2009 (September 2008) / 448 pages ISBN: 9780073375762 ISBN: 9780071276245 [IE]

BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 2nd Edition

By Justin Paul 2007 (December 2007) / 512 pages ISBN: 9780070220928

McGraw-Hill India Title http://www.mhhe.com/bussenv2e

CoNteNts PART 1: POLITICAL ECONOMY, DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS, GOVERNMENT AND SOCIETY 1. Economic Systems 2. Economic Growth and Development PART II: INDIAN ECONOMY AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 3. Anatomy of Indian Economy 4. Globalisation and Business Environment PART III: BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT IN THE INDUSTRIAL SECTOR 5. Industrial Sector ­ Past, Present and Future 6. Industry Analysis ­ Textiles, Electronics and Automobiles 7. Industry Analysis ­ FMCG, Chemicals and Pharmacueticals PART IV: ECONOMIC POLICIES 8. Privatisation ­ Problems and Prospects 9. Fiscal Policy, Union Budget and Taxation 10. Monetary Policy and Banking Sector Reforms PART V: TECHNOLOGY AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 11. Technological Environment: Developments in the Banking Sector PART VI: INVESTMENT ENVIRONMENT, OPPORTUNITIES AND INDICATORS: LEGAL AND REGULATORY SYSTEMS 12. Capital Market, Stock Exchanges and Present Scenario 13. Legal Environment of Business, Mergers and Acquisitions PART VII: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS, ENVIRONMENT AND EXTERNAL SECTOR 14. WTO, Agreements and Current Issues 15. India's Trade Policy 16. External Sector ­ BoP, Currency Convertibility, ADR-GDRs and FEMA 17. Global Outsourcing: Trends and Debate PART VIII: SOCIAL ENVIRONMENT 18. Social Environment in India and China 19. Corporate governance and Corporate Social Responsibility PART IX: GLOBAL ECONOMY AND BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 20. Business Environment in Europe 21. Business Environment in SAARC Countries 22. Business Environment in South America 23. Business Environment in North America

http://www.mhhe.com/field5e

Environmental Economics is an introduction to the basic principles of environmental economics as they have been developed in the past and as they continue to evolve. The examples discussed in this textbook represent only a sample of the full range of issues that actually exists. For this reason, the Fifth Edition sticks to the basic ideas and ways that environmental economists have found to make thebasicconceptsandmodelsmorespecificandrelevanttoconcrete environmental issues. The basic structure and sequence of chapters areunchangedbutcontainsnewandupdatedmaterialthatreflects the new research efforts by environmental economists over the last few years. CoNteNts Section 1: Introduction Chapter 1: What is Environmental Economics? Chapter 2: The Economy and the Environment Section 2: Analytical Tools Chapter 3: Benefits and Costs, Supply and Demand Chapter 4: Economic Efficiency and Markets Chapter 5: The Economics of Environmental Quality Section 3: Environmental Analysis Chapter 6: Frameworks of Analysis Chapter 7: Benefit-Cost Analysis: Benefits Chapter 8: Benefit-Cost Analysis: Costs Section 4: Environmental Policy Analysis Chapter 9: Criteria for Evaluating Environmental Policies Chapter 10: Decentralized Policies: Liability Laws, Property Rights, Voluntary Action Chapter 11: Command-and-Control Strategies: The Case of Standards Chapter 12: Incentive-Based Strategies: Emission Charges and Subsidies Chapter 13: Incentive-Based Strategies: Transferable Discharge Permits Section 5: Environmental Policy in the United States Chapter 14: Federal Water Pollution-Control Policy Chapter 15: Federal Air Pollution Control Policy Chapter 16: Federal Polity on Toxic and Hazardous Substances Chapter 17: State and Local Environmental Issues Section 6: International Environmental Issues Chapter 18: Comparative Environmental Policies Chapter 19: Economic Development and the Environment Chapter 20: The Global Environment Chapter 21: International Environmental Agreements Appendix: Abbreviations and Acronyms used in the book

41

ECONOMICS

Econometrics

New

International Edition

ESSENTIALS OF ECONOMETRICS 4th Edition

By Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy

Chapter 8: Multicollinearity: What Happens if Explanatory Variables are Correlated? Chapter 9: Heteroscedasticity: What Happens if the Error Variance is Nonconstant? Chapter 10: What Happens if Error Terms are Correlated? Part III: Advanced Topics in Econometrics Chapter 11: Simultaneous Equation Models Chapter 12: Selected Topics in Single-Equation Regression Models Appendices Introduction: Basics of Probability and Statistics Appendix A: Review of Statistics: Probability and Probability Distributions Appendix B: Characteristics of Probability Distributions Appendix C: Some Important Probability Distributions Appendix D: Statistical Inference: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing Appendix E: Statistical Tables Appendix F: Computer Output of EViews, Minitab, Excel, and STATA

2010 (May 2009) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073375847 ISBN: 9780071276078 [IE]

International Edition

BASIC ECONOMETRICS 5th Edition

By Damodar N Gujarati, United States Military Academy West Point 2009 (October 2008) / 944 pages ISBN: 9780073375779 ISBN: 9780071276252 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/GujaratiEss4e

The primary objective of the fourth edition of Essentials of Econometrics is to provide a user-friendly introduction to econometric theory and techniques. This text provides a simple and straightforward introduction to econometrics for the beginner. The book is designed to help students understand econometric techniques through extensive examples, careful explanations, and a wide variety of problem material. In each of the editions, I have tried to incorporate major developmentsinthefieldinanintuitiveandinformativewaywithout resort to matrix algebra, calculus, or statistics beyond the introductory level. The fourth edition continues that tradition. New to this editioN New text organization: In order to streamline topics and jump right into information about linear regression techniques, we have moved the background statistics material from the second through fifth chapters into the appendix. This allows for easy reference to more introductory material for those who need it without disturbing the main content of the text. Several new examples have been added: Practically all the data used in the illustrative examples in the previous edition have been updated. In several chapters, the authors have included extended concluding examples that illustrate the various points made in the text. Concrete computer printouts: Concrete computer printouts of several examples are included in the book. Most of these results are based on EVIEWS (version 6) and STATA (version 10), and MINITAB (version 15). New diagrams and data-based exercises: Several new diagrams, graphs and data-based exercises are included in various chapters. Different use of data: Small-sized data are included in the book, but large sample data are posted on the book's web site, thereby minimizing the size of the text. The web site will also publish all the data used in the book. CoNteNts Chapter 1: The Nature and Scope of Econometrics Part I: The Linear Regression Model Chapter 2: Basic Ideas of Linear Regression Chapter 3: The Two-Variable Model: Hypothesis Testing Chapter 4: Multiple Regression: Estimation and Hypothesis Testing Chapter 5: Functional Forms of Regression Models Chapter 6: Dummy Variable Regression Models Part II: Regression Analysis in Practice Chapter 7: Model Selection: Criteria and Tests

http://www.mhhe.com/gujarati5e

Gujarati and Porter's Basic Econometrics provides an elementary but comprehensive introduction to econometrics without resorting to matrix algebra, calculus, or statistics beyond the elementary level. Withtheadditionofover100newdatasets,aswellassignificantly updated research and examples, the Fifth Edition responds to important developments in the theory and practice of econometrics. Basic Econometricsiswidelyusedbystudentsofallfieldsastheexpanded topics and concrete applications throughout the text apply to a broad range of studies. CoNteNts Part I: Single-Equation Regression Model Chapter 1: The Nature of Regression Analysis Chapter 2: Two-Variable Regression Analysis: Some Basic Ideas Chapter 3: Two Variable Regression Model: The Problem of Estimation Chapter 4: Classical Normal Linear Regression Model (CNLRM) Chapter 5: Two-Variable Regression: Interval Estimation and Hypothesis Testing Chapter 6: Extensions of the Two-Variable Linear Regression Model Chapter 7: Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Estimation Chapter 8: Multiple Regression Analysis: The Problem of Inference Chapter 9: Dummy Variable Regression Models Part II: Relaxing the Assumptions of the Classical Model Chapter 10: Multicollinearity: What happens if the Regressor are Correlated Chapter 11: Heteroscedasticity: What Happens if the Error Variance is Nonconstant? Chapter 12: Autocorrelation: What Happens if the Error Terms are Correlated Chapter 13: Econometric Modeling: Model Specification and Diagnostic Testing Part III: Topics in Econometrics Chapter 14: Nonlinear Regression Models Chapter 15: Qualitative Response Regression Models Chapter 16: Panel Data Regression Models Chapter 17: Dynamic Econometric Model: Autoregressive and Distributed-Lag Models. Part IV: Simultaneous-Equation Models Chapter 18: Simultaneous-Equation Models. Chapter 19: The Identification Problem. Chapter 20: Simultaneous-Equation Methods.

42

ECONOMICS

Chapter 21: Time Series Econometrics: Some Basic Concepts Chapter 22: Time Series Econometrics: Forecasting Appendix A: Review of Some Statistical Concepts Appendix B: Rudiments of Matrix Algebra Appendix C: The Matrix Approach to Linear Regression Model Appendix D: Statistical Tables Appendix E: Computer Output of EViews, MINITAB, Excel, and STATA Appendix F: Economic Data on the World Wide Web Chapter 7. Instrumental Variables and Model Specification. Chapter 8. Forecasting with a Single-Equation Regression Model. Chapter 9. Single-Equation Estimation. Chapter 10. Nonlinear and Maximum-Likelihood Estimation.

International Edition

ECONOMETRIC METHODS 4th Edition

By John Johnston, University of California, Irvine and John DiNardo, Massachusetts Institute of Technology 1997 / 480 pages ISBN: 9780071153423 [IE with 3.5" Disk] ISBN: 9780071259644 [IE with CD] CoNteNts 1 Relationships Between Two Variables 2 Further Aspects of Two Variable Relationships 3 The k-Variable Linear Equation 4 Some Tests of the k-Variable Linear Equation for Specification Error 5 Maximum Likelihood (ML), Generalized Least Squares (GLS), and Instrumental Variable (IV) Estimators 6 Heteroscedasticity and Autocorrelation 7 Single Equation Modeling I: The Univariate Case 8 Single Equation Modeling II: The Multivariate Case 9 Multiple Equation Models 10 Generalized Method of Moments 11 A Smorgasbord of Computationally Intensive Methods 12 Limited Dependent Variable and Related Models 13 Panel Data

International Edition

ECONOMETRICS

By Stephen Schmidt, Union College 2005 (March 2004) / 524 pages ISBN: 9780071113960 [IE with Data CD] ISBN: 9780071105415 [IE with Data CD, Revised]

http://www.mhhe.com/economics/schmidt1

CoNteNts Part 1: Econometric Analysis Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 Designing an econometric project Part 2: Probability and Statistics Chapter 3 Random variables Chapter 4 Estimation Chapter 5 Hypothesis testing Part 3: Linear Regression Chapter 6 Least Squares Regression Chapter 7 Properties of the least squares estimator Chapter 8 Multivariate regression Part 4: Topics in Linear Regression Chapter 9 Selecting a Functional Form Chapter 10 Determining the econometric specification Chapter 11 Instability of the regression equation Part 5: Violations of the Regression Model Chapter 12 Autocorrelation Chapter 13 Heteroskedasticity Chapter 14 Estimating multiple equations Part 6: Advanced Topics Chapter 15 Endogenous variables Chapter 16 Forecasting Chapter 17 Time series analysis Chapter 18 Nonlinear models Chapter 19 Dummy dependent variables Chapter 20 General discrete choice models

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND ECONOMETRICS 2nd Edition

By Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University 2002 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780071348522

A Schaum Publication

CoNteNts Introduction. Descriptive Statistics. Probability and Probability Distributions. Statistics Inference: Estimation. Statistical Inference: Testing Hypothesis. Statistics Examination. Simple Regression Analysis. Multiple Regression Analysis. Problems in Regression Analysis. Further Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. Simultaneous-Equations Methods. Time Series Econometrics. Statistics Examination. Bionomial Distribution. Poisson Distribution. Standard Normal Distribution. Table of Random Numbers. Student t Distribution. Chi-Square Distribution. F Distribution. Durbin-Watson Statistics. Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests.

International Edition

ECONOMETRIC MODELS AND ECONOMIC FORECASTS 4th Edition

By Robert S Pindyck, Massachusetts Institute of Technology and Daniel L Rubinfeld, University of California, Berkeley 1998 ISBN: 9780079132925 ISBN: 9780071158367 [IE] CoNteNts The Basics of Regression Analysis: Chapter 1. Introduction to the Regression Model. Chapter 2. Elementary Statistics. Chapter 3. The Two-Variable Regression Model. Chapter 4. The Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 5. Using the Multiple Regression Model. Chapter 6. Serial Correlation and Heterosedasticity.

43

ECONOMICS

Mathematical Economics

MATHEMATICS FOR ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS

By Rebecca Taylor, Nottingham Trent University 2008 (April 2008) / 512 pages ISBN: 9780077107864

PART 5 Dynamic Analysis Chapter 14 Economic Analysis and Integral Calculus Chapter 15 Continuous Time: First Order Differential Equations Chapter 16 Higher-Order Differential Equations Chapter 17 DiscreteTime: First Order Difference Equations Chapter 18 Higher Order Difference Equations Chapter 19 Simultaneous Differential Equations and Difference Equations NEW Chapter 20: Introduction to Optimal Control Theory

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/taylor

For many students embarking on an economics or business course, the level of mathematics required to understand key topics can at firstseemdaunting.Thisstudentfriendlytexttakesastep-by-step approach to explaining mathematical principles and applying these to an economic and business context. The range of study tools employed throughout the text caters for different learning styles and levels of understanding, encouraging students to take an active role in their learning of the subject. CoNteNts Chapter 1 ~ Mathematical Review Chapter 2 ~ Linear Equations Chapter 3 ~ Linear Equations--Further Topics Chapter 4 ~ Linear Programming Chapter 5 ~ Finance & Growth Chapter 6 ~ Non-Linear Equations Chapter 7 ~ Differentiation Chapter 8 ~ Partial Differentiation Chapter 9 ~ Integration Chapter 10 ~ Matrices

International Edition

THE STRUCTURE OF ECONOMICS A Mathematical Analysis, 3rd Edition

By Eugene Silberberg, University of Washington and Wing Suen 2001 / 688 pages ISBN: 9780072343526 (Out of Print) ISBN: 9780071181365 [IE] CoNteNts 1. Comparative Statics and the Paradigm of Economics 2. Review of Calculus (One Variable) 3. Functions of Several Variables 4. Profit Maximization 5. Matrices and Determinants 6. Comparative Statics: The Traditional Methodology 7. The Envelope Theorem and Duality 8. The Derivation of Cost functions 9. Cost and Production Functions: Special Topics 10. The Derivation of Consumer Demand Functions 11. Special topics in Consumer Theory 12. Intertemporal Choice 13. Behavior under Uncertainty 14. Maximization with Inequality and Nonnegativity Constraints 15. Contracts and Incentives 16. Markets with Imperfect Information 17. General Equilibrium I: Linear Models 18. General Equilibrium II: Nonlinear Models 19. Welfare Economics 20. Resource Allocation over Time: Optimal Control theory

International Edition

FUNDAMENTAL METHODS OF MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Alpha C Chiang, University of Connecticut and Kevin Wainwright, Simon Fraser University 2005 / 696 pages ISBN: 9780070109100 ISBN: 9780071238236 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/www.mhhe.com/economics/chiang4e

CoNteNts PART 1 Introduction Chapter 1: The Nature of Mathematical Economics Chapter 2: Economic Models PART 2 Static (or Equilibrium) Analysis Chapter 3: Equilibrium Analysis in Economics Chapter 4: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra Chapter 5: Linear Models and Matrix Algebra (continued) PART 3 Comparative-Static Analysis Chapter 6: Comparative Statics and the Concept of the Derivative Chapter 7: Rules of Differentiation and their use in Comparative Statics Chapter 8: Comparative-Static Analysis of General-Function Models PART 4 Optimization Problems Chapter 9: Optimization: A Special Variety of Equilibrium Analysis Chapter 10: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions Chapter 11: The Case of More Than One Choice Variable Chapter 12: Optimization with Equality Constraints NEW Chapter 13: Further Topics in Optimization (includes Envelope Theorem and Duality

SCHAUM'S EASY OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS

By Edward T Dowling, Fordham University 2006 / 160 pages ISBN: 9780071455343

A Schaum Professsional Publication

When you are looking for a quick nuts-and-bolts overview, there's no series that does it better. Schaum's Easy Outline of Introduction toMathematicalEconomicsisapared-down,simplified,andtightly focused version of its predecessor. Designed to appeal to underprepared students and readers turned off by dense text Cartoons, sidebars, icons, and other graphic pointers get the material across fast Concise text focuses on the essence of the subject Deliversexperthelpfromteacherswhoareauthoritiesintheirfields Perfect for last-minute test preparation

44

ECONOMICS

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By Edward T. Dowling, Fordham University 2001 / 523 pages ISBN: 9780071358965

Money and Banking

International Edition

MONEY, BANKING AND FINANCIAL MARKETS 2nd Edition

By Stephen G Cecchetti, Brandeis University 2008 (August 2007) / 704 pages ISBN: 9780073523095 ISBN: 9780071287722 [IE]

A Schaum Professional Publication

CoNteNts Review. Economic Applications of Graphs and Equations. The Derivative and the Rules of Differentiation. Uses of the Derivative in Mathematics and Economics. Calculus of Multivariable Functions. Caculus of Multivariable Functions in Economics. Exponential and Logarithmic Functions in Economics. Differentiation of Exponential and Logarithmic Functions. The Fundamentals of Linear (or Matrix) Algebra. Matrix Inversion. Special Determinants and Matrices and Their Use in Economics. Comparative Statics and Concave Programming. Integral Calculus: The Indefinite Integral. Integral Calculus: The Definite Integral. First-Order Differential Equations. First Order Difference Equations. Second-Order Differential Equations and Difference Equations. Simultaneous Differential and Difference Equations. The Calculus of Variations. Optimal Control Theory.

http://www.mhhe.com/cecchetti2e

Cecchetti's Money, Banking, and Financial Markets, 2e offers a fresh, modern, and more student-friendly approach to the subject. Studentswillfindthematerialmorerelevantandinterestingbecause of the book's unique emphasis on the Five Core Principles, the early introduction of risk, and an integrated global perspective. Cecchetti is THE money and banking book for today's students. By focusing on the big picture via core principles, Cecchetti teaches students the rationaleforfinancialrulesandinstitutionalstructuresothatevenwhen thefinancialsystemevolves,students'knowledgewillnotbeoutof date. The author draws on his vast experience, which includes: VP at the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, publishing in and editing various journals, consulting for the European Central Bank, the Bank of England, the Bank of Israel, and the Reserve Bank of Australia, as well as his years of teaching at various schools including Ohio State, Brandeis, Princeton, and Oxford University. CoNteNts Part I. Money and the Financial System Chapter 1 An Introduction to Money and the Financial System Chapter 2 Money and the Payments System Chapter 3 Financial Instruments, Financial Markets, and Financial Institutions Part II. Interest Rates, Financial Instruments, and Financial Markets Chapter 4 Future Value, Present Value, and Interest Rates Chapter 5 Understanding Risk Chapter 6 Bonds, Bond Prices, and the Determination of Interest Rates Chapter 7 The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates Chapter 8 Stocks, Stock Markets, and Market Efficiency Chapter 9 Derivatives: Futures, Options, and Swaps Chapter 10 Foreign Exchange Part III. Financial Institutions Chapter 11 The Economics of Financial Intermediation Chapter 12 Depository Institutions: Banks and Bank Management Chapter 13 Financial Industry Structure Chapter 14 Regulating the Financial System Part IV. Central Banks, Monetary Policy, and Financial Stability Chapter 15 Central Banks in the World Today Chapter 16 The Structure of Central Banks: The U.S. Federal Reserve & European Central Bank Chapter 17 The Central Bank Balance Sheet and the Money Supply Process Chapter 18 Monetary Policy: Using Interest Rates to Stabilize the Domestic Economy Chapter 19 Exchange Rate Policy and the Central Bank Part V. Modern Monetary Economics Chapter 20 Money Growth, Money Demand, and Monetary Policy Chapter 21 Modern Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 22 Understanding Business Cycles Chapter 23 Monetary Policy, Output, and Inflation in the Short Run

ComplimeNtary Copies

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

45

ECONOMICS

International Economics

New

New Appendixes: The authors have included in new appendixes to Chapters 25 and 26 materials that develops a more formal geological link between national income and the exchange rate. CoNteNts Chapter 1 The World of International Economics PART 1 The Classical Theory of Trade Chapter 2 Early Trade Theories: Mercantilism and the Transition to the Classical World of David Ricardo Chapter 3 The Classical World of David Ricardo and Comparative Advantage Chapter 4 Extensions and Tests of the Classical Model of Trade PART 2 Neoclassical Trade Theory Chapter 5 Introduction to Neoclassical Trade Theory: Tools to Be Employed Chapter 6 Gains from Trade in Neoclassical Theory Chapter 7 Offer Curves and the Terms of Trade Chapter 8 The Basis for Trade: Factor Endowments and the Heckscher-Ohlin Model Chapter 9 Empirical Tests of the Factor Endowments Approach PART 3 Additional Theories and Extensions Chapter 10 Post-Heckscher-Ohlin Theories of Trade and IntraIndustry Trade Chapter 11 Economic Growth and International Trade Chapter 12 International Factor Movement PART 4 Trade Policy Chapter 13 The Instruments of Trade Policy Chapter 14 The Impact of Trade Policies Chapter 15 Arguments for Interventionist Trade Policies Chapter 16 Political Economy and U.S. Trade Policy Chapter 17 Economic Integration Chapter 18 International Trade and the Developing Countries PART 5 Fundamentals of International Monetary Economics Chapter 19 The Balance-of-Payments Accounts Chapter 20 The Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 21 International Financial Markets and Instruments: An Introduction Chapter 22 The Monetary and Portfolio Balance Approaches to External Balance Chapter 23 Price Adjustments and Balance-of-Payments Disequilibrium Chapter 24 National Income and the Current Account PART 6 Macroeconomic Policy in the Open Economy Chapter 25 Economic Policy in the Open Economy Under Fixed Exchange Rates Chapter 26 Economic Policy in the Open Economy Under Flexible Exchange Rates Chapter 27 Prices and Output in the Open Economy: Aggregate Supply and Demand PART 7 Issues in World Monetary Arrangements Chapter 28 Fixed or Flexible Exchange Rates? Chapter 29 The International Monetary System: Past, Present, and Future References for Further Reading Photo Credits Index

*9780073511344*

International Edition

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 7th Edition

By Dennis R Appleyard, Davidson College, Alfred J Field, University of NC-Chapel Hill and Steven Cobb, University of North Texas

2010 (October 2009) / 800 pages ISBN: 9780073511344 ISBN: 9780070172685 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/appleyard7e

Appleyard, Field, and Cobb's International Economics 7e text is an International Economics textbook that offers a consistent level of analysis and treatment of the two main subdivisions of international economics--international trade theory and policy and international monetary theory and policy. As the authors write this edition, the world has become painfully aware that increased globalization links countries together strongly in times both of recession and prosperity. The growing awareness of the importance of international issues is also evidenced in increased student interest in such issues, particularly those related to employment, international working conditions, and equity. Comprehensive and clear, International Economics helps students move beyond recognition toward an understanding of current and future international events. As with each prior edition, the authors provide a clear and comprehensive text that will help students move beyond simple recognition of international issues toward a level of understanding of current and future international developments that will be of use to them in analyzing the problem at hand and selecting a policy position. New improvements covering the emerging issues in the global economy are designed to help readers both understand and appreciate the growing importance of the global economy in their lives. New to this editioN NEW and updated pedagogical boxes:

-"In The Real World" boxes are designed to provide examples of current international issues and developments drawn straight from the news that illustrate the concepts developed in the chapter. -"Concept Boxes" have been updated in situations where particularly criticalconceptswouldbenefitfromfurtherelaborationorgraphical representation. -"TitansofInternationalEconomics"boxesprofileprominentfigures in international economics. Updated topics of discussion: Includes recent developments in U.S. trade policy, major changes in the European Union, special issues related to developing nations as well as implications of the recent worldwide financial crisis/recession. Updated Chapter-Opening Vignettes: This feature was met with positive feedback after it was introduced in previous editions; as a result, they were updated in order to focus on the material's realworld applicability. Added Material: New material has been added regarding vertically integrated supply chains in Chapter 10. This has been added in conjunction with imperfect competition and intra-industry trade.

46

ECONOMICS

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS, GLOBALIZATION, AND POLICY A Reader, 5th Edition

By Philip G King, San Francisco State University and Sharmila Kumari King, University of the Pacific 2009 (September 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073375816 The King reader is a collection of articles on international economics by leading economists drawn from various scholarly sources (e.g., Foreign Affairs, Current Issues in Economics and Finance, Finance and Development, Federal Reserve Publications, the Journal of Economic Perspectives). Previously known as International Economics and International Economic Policy, the new title is briefer and yet more descriptive,sincethetermglobalizationhasbeenaddedtoreflect the content of the book, which is also used in courses devoted to globalization, particularly the economic aspects of globalization. The Fifth Edition focuses on real debates within the discipline of economics and political economy, not on phony "pro-cons" debates which often obscure the real issues. The reader continues to be unique as the most relevant in today's market. CoNteNts Preface INTERNATIONAL TRADE Section 1: Issues in Trade and Protectionism 1. How Costly is Protectionism? 2. Grain Drain: The Hidden Cost of U.S. Rice Subsidies 3. International Trade: Why We Don't Have More of It Section 2: Outsourcing, the WTO, and the Environment 4. Bridging the Trade-Environment Divide 5. Labor Standards: Where Do They Belong on the International Trade Agenda? 6. Beyond the Outsourcing Angst: Making America More Productive 7. Offshoring: The Next Industrial Revolution? 8. Trade in Heath Care: Changing Paradigms in a Global Economy Section 3: NAFTA, FDI, and other Trade Issues 9. Recent US Trade Policies in Latin America: From Multilateralism to Regionalism 10. Does Foreign Direct Investment Help Emerging Economies? 11. Have U.S. Import Prices Become Less Responsive to Changes in the Dollar? Section 4: Immigration 12. Global Migration 13. America's Stake in Immigration: Why Almost Everybody Wins Section 5: Globalization 14. The Global Governance of Trade as if Development Really Mattered 15. Farm Fallacies That Hurt the Poor 16. Are We Underestimating the Gains from Globalization for the United States? 17. What's So Special about China's Exports? INTERNATIONAL FINANCE Section 6: Trade Deficit Disorder 18. Twin Deficits, Twenty Years Later 19. Why a Dollar Depreciation May Not Close the U.S. Trade Deficit 20. Trade Deficits Aren't as Bad as You Think Section 7: Exchange Rate Regimes and Macroeconomic Stabilization Policies 21. Does the Exchange Rate Regime Matter for Inflation and Growth? 22. China's Controversial Exchange Rate Policy 23. To Float or Not to Float? Exchange Rate Regimes and Shocks 24. Moving to a Flexible Exchange Rate: How, When, and How Fast? 25. Official Dollarization and the Banking System in Ecuador and El Salvador Section 8: Europe and the Euro Zone 26. The Euro: Ever More Global 27. Integration and Globalization: The European Bellwether Section 9: Financial Crises and Capital Flows 28. Asia Ten Years After 29. Financial Crises of the Future 30. Financial-Sector Foreign Direct Investment and Host Countries: New and Old Lessons 31. Appraising the IMF's Performance: A review of the first three studies by the new Independent Evaluation Office 32. Are Sovereign Wealth Funds here to Stay? Section 10: Foreign Aid 33. Aid and Growth 34. Microfinance: Banking for the Poor

International Edition

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 14th Edition

By Thomas Pugel, New York University 2009 (November 2008) / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073375755 ISBN: 9780071280792 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/pugel14e

International Economics, 14e continues to combine rigorous economic analysis with attention to the issues of economic policy that arealiveandimportanttodayinthisfield.Writteninaconciseand readable format, Pugel uses economic terminology when enhancing the analysis so that the reader can build their understanding of global economic developments and evaluate proposals for changes in economic policies. The text is informed by current events and includes the latest in applied international research, all the time avoiding jargon for jargon's sake. Like earlier editions, Pugel also places international economics events within a historical framework. The overall treatment continues to be intuitive rather than mathematical and is strongly oriented towards policy. CoNteNts Chapter 1: International Economics Is Different Part I: The Theory of International Trade Chapter 2: 2. The Basic Theory Using Demand and Supply Chapter 3: Why Everybody Trades: Comparative Advantage Chapter 4: Trade: Factor Availability and Factor Proportions Are Key Chapter 5: Who Gains and Who Loses from Trade? Chapter 6: Scale Economies, Imperfect Competition, and Trade Chapter 7: Growth and Trade Part II: Trade Policy Chapter 8: Analysis of a Tariff Chapter 9: Nontariff Barriers to Imports Chapter 10: Arguments For and Against Protection Chapter 11: Pushing Exports Chapter 12: Trade Blocs and Trade Blocks Chapter 13: . Trade and the Environment Chapter 14: Trade Policies for Developing Countries Chapter 15: Multinationals and Migration: International Factor Movements Part III: Understanding Foreign Exchange Chapter 16: Payments Among Nations Chapter 17: The Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 18: Forward Exchange and International Financial Investment Chapter 19: What Determines Exchange Rates? Chapter 20: Government Policies Toward the Foreign Exchange Market Chapter 21: International Lending and Financial Crises Part IV: Macro Policies for Open Economies Chapter 22: How Does the Open Macroeconomy Work? Chapter 23: Internal and External Balance with Fixed Exchange Rates Chapter 24: Floating Exchange Rates and Internal Balance Chapter 25: National and Global Choices: Floating Rates and the Alternatives Appendix A: The Web and the Library: International Numbers and Other Information Appendix B: Deriving Production-Possibilities Curves Appendix C: Offer Curves Appendix D: The Nationally Optimal Tariff Appendix E: Accounting for International Payments

47

ECONOMICS

Appendix F: Many Parities at Once Appendix G: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy Appendix E: Devaluation and the Current Account Balance

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 4th Edition

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University--Bronx 1996 / 288 pages ISBN: 9780070549500

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 5th Edition

By Francis Cherunilam, Cochin University of Science and Technology 2008 (May 2008) / 780 pages ISBN: 9780070263642

A Schaum Professional Publication

Outstanding for its easy-to-understand explanations of international economics, this guide covers all course fundamentals and supplements any class text. It takes students through the solution of hundreds of problems dealing with demand and supply in trade, the foreignexchangemarkets,flexibleandfixedexchangeratesandmuch more.Alsoincludespracticemidtermandfinalexams.

McGraw-Hill India Title www.mhhe.com/intec05c

The book has been written keeping in mind the undergraduate and postgraduate students of international economics. It is designed to provide an analytical and critical account of theories and issues. At the same time it discusses the subject matter systematically and lucidly so that an average student can easily understand it. The book aims to serve as a concise and comprehensive textbook for students of internationaleconomics.ThefieldofInternationalEconomicsisvery dynamic, characterizes as it is by almost continuous changes in many variables which shape the structure and nature of the global economy and set the trends. The revision is done with the objective of making thecoverageupdatedandtoincorporatethesignificantchangesand trends since the publication of the last edition. CoNteNts PART I: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS AND THE GLOBAL ECONOMY 1. Introduction 2. International Economic Gap and Nieo 3. Global Trade 4. Globalisation PART 2: BASES OF TRADE AND DEVELOPMENT 5. Analytical Tools 6. Theories of International Trade 7. Gains From Trade and Terms of Trade 8. Economic Growth and Trade PART 3: TRADE POLICIES AND ISSUES 9. Trade Strategy 10. Trade Barriers 11. Cartels, Commodity Agreements and State Trading 12. Social Issues in International Trade PART 4: ECONOMIC INTEGRATION AND COOPERATION 13. Economic Integration 14. South-South Cooperation PART 5: INTERNATIONAL MONETARY ECONOMICS 15. Balance of Payments 16. Policies for Internal and External Balance 17. International Monetary System 18. Foreign Exchange 19. International Liquidity and Reserves 20. International Banking and Eurocurrency Market PART 6: INTERNATIONAL FACTOR MOVEMENT 21. International Capital Flows 22. Multinational Corporations 23. Transfer of Technology 24. Official Development Assistance 25. International Debt 26. International Migration PART 7: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORGANISATIONS 27. IMF and Development Organisations 28. World Trade Organisation PART 8: TRADE POLICY AND PERFORMANCE OF INDIA 29. Trade Regulation and Promotion 30. Trade and BOP of India

Labor Economics

New

*9780073511368*

International Edition

LABOR ECONOMICS 5th Edition

By George J Borjas, Harvard University-Cambridge

2010 (February 2009) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073511368 ISBN: 9780071270274 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/borjas5e

Labor Economics, 5e is a well-received text that blends coverage of traditional topics with modern theory and developments into a superb Labor Economics book. The Fifth Edition builds on the features and conceptsthatmadethefirstfoureditionssuccessful,updatingand adding new content to keep the text on the cusp of recent events intheLaborEconomicsfield.Theneweditioncontinuestobethe most concise book in the market as the instructor is able to teach all relevant material in a semester long class. Despite the book's brevity,theinstructorwillfindthatallofthekeytopicsinlaboreconomics are covered. The Fifth Edition is will allow students to learn topics in thisfieldthroughabookthatisnotencyclopedic.Throughupdated pedagogy, new end-of-chapter material, and an even stronger instructor support, the Fifth edition of Labor Economics remains one of the most relevant textbooks in the market. New to this editioN Revised and Updated Chapter 2 on Labor Supply: Chapter 2 of this new edition presents the basic theory of labor supply, including both the labor-leisure decision at a point in time as well as the decision of how a person allocates his or her time over time. Presentation of the labor supply discussion has been tightened and shortened into one new chapter so that the book doesn't mirror and encyclopedic read to students. Updated "Web Links": Each chapter contains "Web Links," guiding students to Web sites that provide additional data or policy discussions.

48

ECONOMICS

Updated list of "Selected Readings": There is an updated list of "Selected Readings, "that includes both standard references in a particular area and recent applications. New end-of-chapter problems: There are approximately 14 new problems per chapter located at the end-of-chapter. New and detailed policy applications: The text has added detailed policy applications in labor economics and to use the evidence reported in state-of-the-art research articles to illustrate the many uses of modern labor economics. Some specific application included in the Fifth Edition are: -Several new "Theory at Work" boxes. The sidebars now include a discussion of the impact of the military deployment of parents on the human capital of children; the importance of nature and nurture in determining intergenerational correlations in skills; the impact of the terrorist attacks of 9/11 on the earnings of Arabs and Muslims employed in the United States; and the role of gender differences in labor market competition. -Anapplicationofthetheoryofmandatedbenefitstohealthinsurance. -A discussion of the labor market impact of employer sanctions that canbeimposedwhenafirmhiresunauthorizedworkers. -An updating of the material on immigration, including an analysis of laborflowsintoandoutofPuertoRico. -A new section discussing how labor markets adjust to the costly disruption caused by severe hurricanes. -An extension of the theory of compensating differentials to examine whydifferentfirmschoosetoofferdifferentwage-amenitiespackages to their workers. -A discussion of how the outcomes of union representation elections influencethestockmarketvalueoffirms. CoNteNts Chapter 1: Introduction to Labor Economics Chapter 2: Labor Supply Chapter 3: Topics in Labor Supply Chapter 4: Labor Demand Chapter 5: Labor Market Equilibrium Chapter 6: Compensating Wage Differentials Chapter 7: Human Capital Chapter 8: The Wage Structure Chapter 9: Labor Mobility Chapter 10: Labor Market Discrimination Chapter 11: Labor Unions Chapter 12: Incentive Pay Chapter 13: Unemployment

New

International Edition

*9780073375953*

CONTEMPORARY LABOR ECONOMICS 9th Edition

By Campbell R McConnell, University of Nebraska--Lincoln, Stanley L Brue, Pacific Lutheran University and David Macpherson, Florida State University-Tallahassee

2010 (September 2009) / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073375953 ISBN: 9780070166752 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/mcconnellCLE9e

Contemporary Labor Economics, 9e presents the "new" labor economics in a readable and logical fashion. The authors' focus in this edition isclearlyonlaboreconomicsasanappliedfieldofmicroandmacro theory. This volume is based on the assumption that labor economics is no longer an area tangential to the core of analytical economics but rather a critical component of that core. However, since traditional topics such as labor law, structure of unions, and collective bargaining also play an important role in labor markets, they are also presented. In the Ninth Edition, the authors deliver new and updated discussions of public policy issues and expanded and updated coverage of the current economic crisis. New to this editioN New Unions and Collective Bargaining Chapter: The authors have streamlined and reorganized the material on unions and collective bargaining in Chapters 6 and 10 to form the core of Chapter 10 in this new edition. Expanded and updated coverage of the economic crisis: This new edition has updated data and a number of discussions related to the economic crisis. This new information will have students focus on the rapidly changing economy. Some of the new and updated coverage that students will have access to are the new World of Work boxes on a recession proof industry (Chapter 6), new limits on executive compensation in banking (Chapter 7), auto worker union concessions (Chapter 11), outsourcing of terminations (Chapter 18), and the effect of unemployment news on stock prices (Chapter 18). New discussion of public policy issues: This edition includes a number of new discussions of public policy issues including the GED program, executive compensation limits, union organizing legislation, occupational licensing, religious discrimination, and income inequality. New "World of Work" Sections: Fifteen of the World of Work boxes are new to this edition, in order to provide the most current information available to students. The new titles to the edition include: Work Hours Linked to Mother Nature; What is a GED worth?; The Prevalence and Effects of Occupational Licensing; and Rising Leisure Time Inequality. CoNteNts Chapter 1 Labor Economics: Introduction and Overview Chapter 2 The Theory of Individual Labor Supply Chapter 3 Population, Participation Rates, and Hours of Work Chapter 4 Labor Quality: Investing in Human Capital Chapter 5 The Demand for Labor Chapter 6 Wage Determination and the Allocation of Labor Chapter 7 Alternative Pay Schemes and Labor Efficiency Chapter 8 The Wage Structure Chapter 9 Mobility, Migration, and Efficiency Chapter 10 Labor Unions and Collective Bargaining Chapter 11 The Economic Impact of Unions

49

ECONOMICS

Chapter 12 Government and the Labor Market: Employment, Expenditures, and Taxation Chapter 13 Government and the Labor Market: Legislation and Regulation Chapter 14 Labor Market Discrimination Chapter 15 Job Search: External and Internal Chapter 16 The Distribution of Personal Earning Chapter 17 Labor Productivity: Wages, Prices, and Employment Chapter 18 Employment and Unemployment Appendix: Information Sources in Labor Economics Glossary Answers to "Your Turn" Questions Name Index Subject Index Chapter 9: Zoning and Growth Controls Part III: Urban Transportation Chapter 10: Externalities from Autos Chapter 11: Mass Transit Part IV: Urban Crime Chapter 12: Crime Part V: Housing Chapter 13: Why is Housing Different? Chapter 14: Housing Policy Part VI: Local Government Chapter 15: The Role of Local Government Chapter 16: Local Government Revenue Appendix: Tools of Microeconomics

Urban Economics

International Edition

URBAN ECONOMICS 7th Edition

By Arthur O'Sullivan, Lewis & Clark College 2009 (September 2008) / 496 pages ISBN: 9780073375786 ISBN: 9780071276290 [IE]

Public Finance

New

*9780073511351*

International Edition

PUBLIC FINANCE 9th Edition

By Harvey Rosen, Princeton University and Ted Gayer, Georgetown University

http://www.mhhe.com/osullivan7e

The Seventh edition of Urban Economics continues to be the market leading textbook due to its thorough content and concise writing style. The new edition continues to cover urban economics as the discipline that lies at the intersection of geography and economics. UrbanEconomicsincorporatestheremarkableprogressinthefieldof urbaneconomicsfromthelastfifteenyears.Italsoexploresthelocationdecisionsofutility-maximizinghouseholdsandprofit-maximizing firms,anditshowshowthesedecisionscausetheformationofcities of different size and shape. The framework of this edition continues to be divided into six sections: -Part I explains why cities exist and what causes hem to grow or shrink -Part II examines the market forces that shape cities and the role of government in determining land-use patterns -Part III looks at the urban transportation system -Part IV uses a model of the rational criminal to explore the causes of urban crime and its spatial consequences -Part V explains the unique features of the housing market and examines the effects of government housing policies -Part VI explains the rationale for our fragmented system of local government and explores the responses of local governments to intergovernmental grants and the responses of taxpayers to local taxes. CoNteNts Part I: Market Forces in the Development of Cities Chapter 2: Why Do Cities Exist? Chapter 3: Why Do Firms Cluster? Chapter 4: City Size Chapter 5: Urban Growth Part II: Land Rent and Land-Use Patterns Chapter 6: Urban Land Rent Chapter 7: Land-Use Patterns Chapter 8: Neighborhood Choice

2010 (September 2009) / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073511351 ISBN: 9780071267885 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/rosen9e

Public Finance 9/e benefits from the combined efforts of Harvey Rosen's market-leading book and co-author Ted Gayer's research and government agency experience. This combination of experience is able to explain as clearly as possible how the tools of economics can be used to analyze government expenditure and tax policies. This new edition incorporates recent developments and along the way takes students to the frontiers of current research and policy. While the information presented is cutting edge and reflects the workofeconomistscurrentlyactiveinthefield,theapproachmakes the text accessible to undergraduates whose only prior exposure to economics is at the introductory level. All of the changes in the Ninth edition were made to further the authors' goal of providing students with a clear and coherent view of the role of government spending and taxation. The authors' years of policy experience have convinced themselvesthatmodernpublicfinanceprovidesapracticalandinvaluable framework for thinking about policy issues. The goal is simple: to emphasize the links between sound economics and the analysis of real-world policy problems. New to this editioN Financial Crisis Coverage: The existing financial crisis will long be remembered by the current generation of students. Arguments that government polices toward housing may have contributed to the crisis are integrated throughout the text. For example, the political economy chapter (Chapter 6) and Chapters 5, 15, and 18, highlight examples of government subsidizing of the housing market.

50

ECONOMICS

Current Issues: Throughout the text readers will find the latest literature applied to the analysis of new polices and policy proposals. The chapters on the United States Revenue System (Part V) provide numerous updates on tax policies stemming from recent legislation and from proposals made by President Obama. Expanded Climate Change Coverage: The Ninth edition expands its coverage of climate change policy. New discussions include focusing on the choice between a carbon tax and a cap-and-trade program to regulate greenhouse gases. Climate change policies are hot topic items where students can become engaged and more involved with real-world coverage. Expanded Coverage on Health Care: The chapter on government and the market for health care (Chapter 10) considerably expands the material on reform options. It now includes a discussion of the individual mandate program recently instituted in the state of Massachusetts, as well as a new discussion of international experiences with single-payer health care systems. Updated End-of-Chapter Material: The authors have expanded the discussion questions at the end of each chapter, in order to provide students with further opportunities to master the tools of public finance. CoNteNts Part I Getting Started 1 Introduction 2 Tools of Positive Analysis 3 Tools of Normative Analysis Part II Public Expenditure: Public Goods and Externalities 4 Public Goods 5 Externalities 6 Political Economy 7 Education 8 Cost-Benefit Analysis Part III Public Expenditures: Social Insurance and Income Maintenance 9 The Health Care Market 10 Government and the Market for Health Care 11 Social Security 12 Income Redistribution: Conceptual Issues 13 Expenditure Programs for the Poor Part IV Framework for Tax Analysis 14 Taxation and Income Distribution 15 Taxation and Efficiency 16 Efficient and Equitable Taxation Part V The United States Revenue System 17 The Personal Income Tax 18 Personal Taxation and Behavior 19 The Corporation Tax 20 Deficit Finance 21 Fundamental Tax Reform: Taxes on Consumption and Wealth Part VI Multigovernment Public Finance 22 Public Finance in a Federal System Appendix Glossary References Author Index Subject Index

International Edition

PUBLIC FINANCE

By Laurence Seidman, University of Delaware 2009 (September 2008) / 416 pages ISBN: 9780073375748 ISBN: 9780071276306 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/seidman1e

Public Finance is an approachable text designed with students in mind. The 13 chapters are intentionally written to be taught easily in one semester without skipping material or losing any information. Public Finance contains all the necessary tools and core chapters that are integral to any Public Finance course in a clear and easy-to-read format. The concise sections and lucid examples are engaging for students, without being dense or tedious. This First Edition text incorporates research from across the discipline and provides empirical tie-ins to the real world. The author also covers special topic chapters that definepublicfinance,likeeducation,socialsecurity,andhealthcare. CoNteNts A Note to Professors 1 Introduction to Public Finance 2 Externalities and the Environment 3 Public Goods and Political Economy 4 Cost-Benefit Analysis 5 Social Security 6 Health Insurance 7 Tax Incidence and Inefficiency 8 Income Taxes 9 Consumption Taxes 10 State and Local Public Finance 11 Education 12 Low-Income Assistance 13 Government Borrowing Index

PUBLIC ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By Peter Abelson, University of Sydney 2008 (February 2008) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780070139053

McGraw-HIll Australia Title http://www.mhhe.com/au/abelson2e

Public Economics: Principles and Practice is the leading Australian text inthefieldofpubliceconomics.Inthissecondedition,PeterAbelson introduces the key principles and factors that form the basis of public economics and outlines how they can be applied to practical issues. providesanunderstandingofthefieldofpubliceconomics

studies the role of government in economic efficiency and distribution successfully strikes a balance between academic rigour and reader accessibility This title is perfectly pitched at undergraduate students in public economics/publicfinanceandgraduatestudentsinvolvedinpublic policy and public administration. CoNteNts Part 1: Nature of Government 1 Foundations of Public Economics 2 Government in Practice Part 2: Markets and Government 3 Competitive markets: Efficiency and Welfare 4 Market Failures, Equity and Government

51

ECONOMICS

5 Economic Growth and Government Part 3: Economic Evaluation and Public Policy 6 Valuing Individual Preferences 7 Social Welfare and Economic Evaluation 8 Cost-Benefit Analysis Part 4: Public Choice 9 Public Choice and Individual Values 10 Public Choice in Practice Part 5: Building Economic Foundations 11 Public Goods 12 Education 13 Externalities and Environment 14 Competition Policy and Industry Regulation 15 Information and Safety Part 6: Public Supply of Goods and Services 16 Delivering Efficient Public Services 17 Pricing Public Services 18 Public or Private Ownership 19 Economic Infrastructure: Transport Part 7: Public Finance and Taxation 20 Introduction to Public Finance 21 Incidence of Taxation 22 Taxation and Efficiency 23 Optimal Taxation and Tax Reform 24 Borrowing and Debt Part 8: Taxation in Practice 25 Taxation of Personal Income 26 Corporate Taxation 27 Other Tax Issues: Consumption, Wealth, and Non-Profit Organisations Part 9: Social Welfare and Income Redistribution 28 Poverty and Inequality 29 Welfare by Market Regulation 30 Income Redistribution and Other Welfare Policies 31 Welfare for the Workforce, Families, and the Aged 32 Health Part 10: Multi-Government Systems 33 Multilevel Government 34 Globalisation and Government Part 11: Conclusion 35 Concluding Observations / Epilogue Glossary References Index

Advanced Macroeconomics

New

INTRODUCING ADVANCED MACROECONOMICS 2nd Edition

*9780077117863*

By Peter Birch Sorensen and Hans Jorgen Whitta-Jacobsen of University of Copenhagen 2010 (March 2010) / 864 pages ISBN: 9780077117863

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/sorensen

CoNteNts Part I Basic Theory and Empirics about Prosperity and Growth Chapter 2 Some Facts about Prosperity and Growth Chapter 3 Capital Accumulation and Growth: The Basic Solow Model Chapter 4 Wealth Accumulation and Capital Mobility: The Solow Model for a Small Open Economy Part II Exogenous Growth Chapter 5 Technological Progress and Growth: The General Solow Model Chapter 6 Education and Growth: The Solow Model with Human Capital Chapter 7 Limits to Growth? The Solow Model with Scarce Natural Resources Part III Endogenous Growth Chapter 8 Productive Externalities and Endogenous Growth Chapter 9 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Macroeconomic Modelling Chapter 10 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Micro Foundations Part IV Structural Unemployment Chapter 11 Some Facts and Introductory Theory about Unemployment Chapter 12 Efficiency Wages and Unemployment Chapter 13 Trade Unions and Unemployment Chapter 14 The Economy in the Short Run: Some Facts about Business Cycles Part V The Building Blocks for the Short Run Model Chapter 15 Investment and Asset Prices Chapter 16 Consumption, Income and Wealth Chapter 17 Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 18 Inflation, Unemployment and Aggregate Supply Part VI The Short Run Model for the Closed Economy Chapter 19 Explaining Business Cycles: Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand in Action Chapter 20 Stabilization Policy: Why and How? Chapter 21 Stabilization Policy with Rational Expectations Chapter 22 The Limits to Stabilization Policy: Credibility, Uncertainty and Time Lags Part VII The Short Run Model for the Open Economy Chapter 23 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy Chapter 24 The Open Economy with Fixed Exchange Rates Chapter 25 The Open Economy with Flexible Exchange Rates Chapter 26 The Choice of Exchange Rate Regime and the Theory of Optimum Currency Areas

52

ECONOMICS

Advanced Microeconomics

Developmental Economics

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF MICROECONOMIC THEORY 4th Edition

By Dominick Salvatore, Fordham University 2006 (May 2006) / 384 pages ISBN: 9780071462365

New

*9780077114534*

DEVELOPMENT ECONOMICS

By David Forsyth, Emeritus Professor of Economics at Strathclyde, Mozammel Huq, Senior Lecturer in Economics at Strathclyde and Anthony Clunies-Ross, Emeritus Professor of Economics at Strathclyde

A Schaum Professional Publication

CoNteNts Chapter 1 Macroeconomics for the Long Run and for the Short Run Book One: The Long Run: Economic Growth, Long Run Unemployment, and Structural Economic Policy Part I Basic Theory and Empirics about Prosperity and Growth Chapter 2 Some Facts about Prosperity and Growth Chapter 3 Capital Accumulation and Growth: The Basic Solow Model Chapter 4 Wealth Accumulation and Capital Mobility: The Solow Model for a Small Open Economy Part II Exogenous Growth Chapter 5 Technological Progress and Growth: The General Solow Model Chapter 6 Education and Growth: The Solow Model with Human Capital Chapter 7 Limits to Growth? The Solow Model with Scarce Natural Resources Part III Endogenous Growth Chapter 8 Productive Externalities and Endogenous Growth Chapter 9 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Macroeconomic Modelling Chapter 10 R&D-Based Models of Endogenous Growth: Micro Foundations Part IV Structural Unemployment Chapter 11 Some Facts and Introductory Theory about Unemployment Chapter 12 Efficiency Wages and Unemployment Chapter 12 Trade Unions and Unemployment Book Two The Short Run: Economic Fluctuations, Short Run Unemployment, and Stabilisation Policy Chapter 14 The Economy in the Short Run: Some Facts about Business Cycles Part V The Building Blocks for the Short Run Model Chapter 15 Investment and Asset Prices Chapter 16 Consumption, Income and Wealth Chapter 17 Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Chapter 18 Inflation, Unemployment and Aggregate Supply Part VI The Short Run Model for the Closed Economy Chapter 19 Explaining Business Cycles: Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand in Action Chapter 20 Stabilization Policy: Why and How? Chapter 21 Stabilization Policy with Rational Expectations Chapter 22 The Limits to Stabilization Policy: Credibility, Uncertainty and Time Lags Part VII The Short Run Model for the Open Economy Chapter 23 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply in the Open Economy Chapter 24 The Open Economy with Fixed Exchange Rates Chapter 25 The Open Economy with Flexible Exchange Rates Chapter 26 The Choice of Exchange Rate Regime and the Theory of Optimum Currency Areas

2009 (April 2009) / 664 pages ISBN: 9780077114534

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/huq

Broad beliefs about the economics of `developing countries' and of the development process have changed considerably since the subject became of wide interest in the 1950s; due largely to changes in the world and in the application of economic policies within developing countries. Subjects such as environment, gender, poverty, famine and globalization have come to be of increasingly important public interest. The extreme divergence of experience among regions of the world has also made it more and more questionable whether it even makes sense to think of a single and distinctive `economics of developing countries'. This textbook presents a concise and up-to-date examinationofthefieldofdevelopmenteconomics,bringingtogether historical perspectives, current issues and policy implications. Each chapter can be read as a stand-alone unit, or as part of the wider economic debates presented throughout the book. Features Coverage - This book deals with all the traditional development economics topics but also widens the scope to consider new issues such as Governance. Structure - the careful structure of the text allows it to evolve with the subject Supporting Features - a supporting website accompanies this text, and contains many useful materials such as Lecture Outlines and PowerPoint Slides for Lecturers, and Learning Objectives for Students. CoNteNts PART 1 History, ideologies and methods 1. Recognizing the development imperative 2. Economic development: the story over fifty years 3. Ideologies and methods of development economics 4. Macroeconomic theories of economic growth 5. The development process: landmark theories PART 2 Governance 6. Governance questions 1: corruption 7. Governance questions 2: public-sector scope, enhancement and reform 8. Civil society: role and potential PART 3 Central global questions 9. Globalization: trade, trade policy, international economic relations 10. Poverty, equity and well-being 11. Sustainable development, environmental evaluation, natural resources

53

ECONOMICS

12. Stabilization in developing countries PART 4 Real resources and sectoral considerations 13.Population and labour supply 14. Migration and urbanization 15. Gender and development 16. Agricultural development, food supply and rural transformation 17. Industrialization and development 18. Building technological capability PART 5 Finance 19. Domestic finance 20. Elaboration of economic project-appraisal 21. Foreign aid 22. Loans and debt 23. Foreign direct investment 24. International migration and remittances PART 6 Conclusion 25. Guidelines, judgements and possibilities 7. Growth effects and factor market integration 8. Economic Integration, labour markets and migration Part 3: EU Policies 9. The Common Agricultural Policy 10. Location effects, economic geography and regional policy 11. EU Competition and state aid policy 12. EU trade policy Part 4: Monetary Integration: History and Principles 13. Essential Macroeconomic Tools 14. Essentials Lessons from History 15. Partial Integration: The European Monetary System 16. Optimum Currency Areas Part 5: Monetary and Fiscal Policy in the EU 17. The Single Currency 18. Fiscal Policy and the Stability Pact 19. The Financial Markets and the Euro

Regional Economics

THE EUROPEAN UNION Economics, Policies and History, 2nd Edition

By Susan Senior Nello, University of Seina, Italy 2008 (December 2008) / 544 pages ISBN: 9780077118136

McGraw-Hill UK Title

New

http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/senior

*9780077121631*

THE ECONOMICS OF EUROPEAN INTEGRATION 3rd Edition

By Richard Baldwin and Charles Wyplosz

In The European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2nd Edition theauthorbuildsonthesuccessandpopularityofthefirstedition by using a combination of economics, politics and history, to give the reader a strong grounding in European integration and why and how policies are put in place. The book is designed to appeal to a broad range of people studying the European Union. Susan Senior Nello's clear, non-technical explanations and use of appendices for more detailed discussion of theory, ensures the book will appeal to students from a range of disciplines. CoNteNts Guided Tour Technology to Enhance Learning and Teaching Preface Acknowledgements 1 An Introduction to European Integration: Definitions and Terminology 2 A Brief History of European Integration 3 The Decision-Making Institutions of the European Union 4 The Theory of Trade and the EU 5 The Economics of Integration 6 The Single Market 7 The Lisbon Strategy and Beyond 8 Movement of Labour, Immigration and Asylum 9 The Theory of Economic and Monetary Union 10 The Long Road to Economic and Monetary Union 11 The EU Budget 12 The Common Agricultural Policy 13 Fisheries Policy 14 Environmental and Energy Policies 15 Regional Policy 16 Social and Employment Policies 17 Competition and Industrial Policies 18 The EU and the GATT/WTO 19 EU Trade and Aid Policies 20 EU Enlargement

2009 (May 2009) / 560 pages ISBN: 9780077121631

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/baldwinandwyplosz

The Economics of European Integration, 3rd edition, builds on the success and popularity of the 2nd edition and provides students with an accessible presentation of the facts, theories and controversies driving rapid change in the heart of Europe. The authors combine essential elements of European history, institutions, law, politics and policies with clear and accessible explanations of the economic principles of European integration. The result is an expert analysis of the contemporary status of integration within the European Union. Designed for students taking modules in European economics, the book offers a rigorous yet clear exposition of economic arguments alongside examples, illustrations, and questions that bring the contemporary topic to life. The up-to-date economics coverage is also ideal for students taking economics modules that do not require extensive analysis of social and policy issues. CoNteNts Part 1: History, Facts and Institutions 1. History 2. Facts, Law, institutions and the budget 3. Decision Making Part 2: The Microeconomics of Economic Integration 4. Essential Microeconomic tools 5. The essential economics of preferential liberalization 6. Market Size and scale effects

54

ECONOMICS

Asian Economics

THE HONG KONG ECONOMY From Recovery to Restructure

By Kui-Wai Li 2005 / 480 pages ISBN: 9780071247801

An Asian Publication

New

*9780071232067*

CHINESE ECONOMY

By Prof Cai Fang, Prof Justin Lin Yifu and Prof Cao Yong

2009 (December 2008) / 880 pages ISBN: 9780071232067

An Asian Publication

The Chinese economy is dynamic and complex. It has undergone rapid as well as radical structural changes over the past three decades since economic reform begain in 1978. At the beginning of the reform, China was a closed, highly undeveloped economy, It has now become one of the most important players in the global economy in internationaltrade,internationalfinance,internationalenvironmental development, and many other areas. This book aims to study the chinese economy by looking at the nation's market-oriented reform of economic systems and market development. One has a direct impact on the other - china's current economic success would not have been achieved without market-oriented reform, which progressed systematically and stably with the support of continous economic development. The authors systematically discuss the progress of reform, the establishment of various markets and the market operation system, as well as the issues encountered in the process. With contributions from top economists in China today, The Chinese Economy is a must-read for international business investors, policy makers, researchers, and the layperson with a strong interest in understanding China's challenging and amazing economy. CoNteNts 1. Historical View of the Chinese Economy 2. Geographic Conditions and Natural Resources 3. Population and the Changing Trend of Demographic Structure 4. Allocation of the Labor Force and the Development of the Labor Market 5. Reform of the Banking System and the Development of the Financial Market 6. Reforming and Developing the Agricultural Economy 7. Reforms of the Industrial Enterprise System and the Development of the Industrial Economy 8. Aggregate Economy and Macroeconomic Dynamics 9. Economic Growth and Industrial Structural Change 10. Divergence of Regional Economic Growth and the Policies of Regional Development 11. Integration into the World Economy 12. Sustainable Development and the Environmental Challenge for the Chinese Economy 13. Governmental Economic Function and Fiscal Policy 14. The Establishment of the Social Security System 15. Concluding Remarks: Achievements and Challenges.

The prolonged post-Asian Financial Crisis economic recession in Hong Kong requires a new analysis. By looking at the economic performance since the 1980s, this book focuses on analysing the macroeconomic intricacies facing the Hong Kong economy. The economic boom in the pre-Asian Financial Crisis years has also given rise to various structural imbalances that could not sustain the economy after the burst of the bubble. The large non-tradable services sector could arguably be the basis of imbalance. The short-term investment behaviour exhibited in the pre-1997 years has not fully adjusted. Demand-driven solutions can provide short-term rescue and recovery, while economic restructuring requires supply-driven solutions. There is still room for economic expansion in Hong Kong; the focus should return to the basics of economic growth and trade rather than relying on redistributive instruments and heavy government expenditures. Economic integration with the Mainland economy produces both complements and competition; strategies adopted should enable Hong Kong investors to make use of the growing economic pie in Mainland China. By considering the various macroeconomic issues, the book provides useful analysis for readers to arrive at their own economic decisions. CoNteNts List of Figures List of Tables Preface 1 Hong Kong's Development and the Economism Paradigm 2 Economic Performance Patterns since the 1980s 3 Productivity, Unit Labour Cost and Competitiveness 4 Fiscal Policy: Challenge, Dilemma and Leadership 5 he Monetary and Financial Sector 6 The Real Estate Market 7 Trade and Changes in Comparative Advantage 8 Economic Integration: The Competitivity-Complementarity Model 9 Where is the Hong Kong Economy Heading? References Index

55

ECONOMICS

Professional References

CoNteNts Contents Introduction Section I 1. The Market is the Message 2. How Much Risk Is Too Much Risk? 3. Hyman Minsky, A Lefty Who Had It Right Section II: Asset Market Upheaval: The Cycle Driver for the Past 20 Years 4. Not Iraq and Tanks, Debt and Banks, the 1990 Recession 5: Tulips in Tokyo: The Asset Inflation/Deflation That Consigned Japan to a Lost Decade 6: The Asian Contagion: What Went Up Went Down, With a Vengeance! 7: The 2000 Recession, From Brave New World Boom to Wild Technology Share Price Bust 8: The Spectacular Slide For House Prices, Consumer Purchasing Power, the 2008 Recession Section III: Concluding Observations 9: Mainstream Economics: A Slavish Devotion To Rational Market Theories 10: The Politics of Economics: Confusing Free Market Triumph with free market infallibility 11: The Punch Line: Embrace Capitalism but don't forget the seat belts and the air bags

TOWARDS THE NEXT ECONOMICS

By Peter F Drucker, Harvard Business School Press 2010 (February 2010) / 208 pages ISBN: 9781422131558

A Professional Reference Title

A collection of Peter Drucker's classic essays from 1972 - 1980. A collection of Peter Ferdinand Drucker's legendary essays on business, management, economics and society, written between 1972 and1980.Theyreflectaninternationalviewpointandareconcerned with what Drucker called "social ecology" and especially institutions - governments, organized science, business or schools. This hardcover release is being published as part of the Harvard Business Press Drucker Library. CoNteNts Preface Chapter 1: Toward the Next Economics Chapter 2: Saving the Crusade: The High Cost of Our Environmental Future Chapter 3: Business and Technology Chapter 4: Multinationals and Developing Countries: Myths and Realities Chapter 5: What Results Should You Expect? A User's Guide to MBO Chapter 6: The Coming Rediscovery of Scientific Management Chapter 7: The Bored Board Chapter 8: After Fixed Age Retirement is Gone Chapter 9: Science and Industry: Challenges of Antagonistic Interdependence Chapter 10: How to Guarantee Non-performance Chapter 11: Behind Japan's Success Chapter 12: A View of Japan Through Japanese Art Index

AGENDA FOR A NEW ECONOMY

By David Korten 2009 (February 2009) / 192 pages ISBN: 9781605092898

A Professional Reference Title

Today's economic crisis is the worst since the Great Depression. However, as David Korten shows in this timely new book, the steps being taken to address it including pouring trillions of dollars into bailouts for the Wall Street institutions that created the mess `do nothing to dealwiththerealityofafailedeconomicsystem.Thefinancialfailure now in the public spotlight is only the tip of the iceberg. The system's social and environmental failures are even more destructive. Putting patches on a failed system is like treating a cancer with band-aids. KortenidentifiesinthisbookthedeepersourcesofthefailureinWall Street institutions that have perfected the art of creating money out of nothing without producing anything of real value in return. Its major players engage in speculative trading, buy into asset bubbles, strip corporate assets, create debt pyramids, and engage in predatory lending in the mortgage and credit card markets. The success of Wall Street money managers up until the collapse created an economic mirage of phantom wealth that led us to believe that Wall Street was making us ever richer as a society even as we aggressively destroyed the economic, social, and natural capital that are the essential foundation of our well-being and of all real wealth. As the handsomely rewarded Wall Street money managers increased their claims on the shrinking pool of real wealth of everyone else, most people struggled ever harder to make ends meet even during the supposed economic boom. Korten argues that our hope lies not with Wall Street, but with Main Street, which is comprised for the most part of enterprises engaged in creating real wealth from real resources to meet real needs. Because the relationship between Wall Street and Main Street is ratherlikethatofacancertoitshost,ratherthanseekingtofixWall Street, we need to hasten its death. Korten outlines an agenda to liberate the latent entrepreneurial energies of Main Street from Wall Street's deadly grip and bring into being a New Economy devoted to creating the real wealth needed to provide a better life for all while bringinghumanconsumptionintobalancewithfiniteecosystems.By changing our economic priorities, measures of success, marketplace rules,powerstructures,sourcesoffinancing,andeventheveryway we create money, we can build a new economy that generates real wealth instead of phantom wealth. Korten's intention is not to offer finalanswers,butrathertoprovokediscussionofoptionsthatpowerful interests prefer not be mentioned. The many hard-hitting conclusions andrecommendationspresentedinthisbookbythisinfluentialand respected author are sure to make it a controversial and widely read contribution to the current economic debate.

THE COST OF CAPITALISM Understanding Marketin Mayhem and Stabilizing Our Economic Future

By Robert Barbera 2009 (February 2009) / 240 pages ISBN: 9780071628440

A Professional Reference Title

While mainstream financial analysts are stringing together ad hoc explanationsforthefinancialcrisisof2008,arelativelysmallgroup of economists saw this coming. In The Cost of Capitalism, Robert J. Barbera explains why. Barbera makes the case that investors and policy-makers can reduce the risk of truly gruesome outcomes if they betterplanfortheviolenteconomicstorms,whichhistoryconfirmsare always over the horizon. Investors will learn how to gird themselves for the roller-coaster ride that is free market capitalism; policy makerswillfindouthowtoplanforcrisestheyknowwilloccuratsome point; and academic economists will rethink their pursuit of ever more elaborate mathematical models that bear no resemblance to the real world. The message is simple: Stop pretending that people arealwaysrationalandthatmarketsarealwaysefficient--andbe prepared for market mayhem.

56

ECONOMICS

CoNteNts Part 1: The Case for a New Economy 1. Looking Upstream 2. A Design Choice 3. More than Tinkering at the Margins Part II: The Case for Eliminating Wall Street 4. Modern Alchemy and the Sport of Money Making 5. Five Millenia of Power and Privilege 6. The High Cost of Phantom Wealth Part III: Agenda for a Healthy Main Street 7. Support the Real Wealth Economy 8. Measure What We Want 9. Convert Banking and Insurance to a Service Sector 10. Apply Market Rules Adam Smith Would Love 11.Issue Debt-Free Money 12. Grow Secure, Caring Communities Part IV: Change the Story, Change the Future 13. An Address to the Nation President Obama Couldn't Deliver 14. When the People Lead, the Leaders will Follow

CONCISE GUIDE TO MACROECONOMICS

By David Moss 2007 (July 2007) / 208 pages ISBN: 9781422101797

A Harvard Professional Reference Title

CoNteNts Acknowledgments Introduction PART I: UNDERSTANDING THE MACRO ECONOMY Chapter 1: Output Chapter 2: Money Chapter 3: Expectations PART II: SELECTED TOPICS ­ BACKGROUND AND MECHANNICS Chapter 4: A Short History of Money and Monetary Policy in the United States Chapter 5: The Fundamentals of GDP Accounting Chapter 6: Reading a Balance of Payments Statement Chapter 7: Understanding Exchange Rates Conclusion: Putting the Pieces Together

STATE OF THE UNIONS How Labor Can Strengthen the Middle Class, Improve Our Economy, and Regain Political Influence

By Philip M Dine 2008 (August 2007) / 276 pages ISBN: 9780071488440

A Professional Reference Title

From steel workers, Teamsters, and coal miners to teachers, actors, and civil servants, union members once accounted for more than one third of the American workforce. At a mere 12 percent, union membership today is a shadow of what it once was. What happened to organized labor in America and what can be done to restore it to its role of the defender of middle-class values and economic well-being? Award-winning investigative reporter Philip M. Dine takes us on a riveting journey through America's cities and back roads, its factories and union halls, to answer those questions. From the health care crisis to massivejobflightoverseas,fromrampanthomeforeclosurestoillegal immigration, he clearly shows how virtually every major economic, political, and social trend impacting our way of life is tied to the state of America's unions. Combining a compelling narrative with expert analysis,Dineoffersfirsthandaccountsoftheunionmembersstriving to make their voices heard in a political landscape increasingly shaped by corporate interests, including how: The women of Delta Pride-a major player in the multi-billion dollar catfish industry-went up against generations of racial and economic prejudice Iowa's firefighters union flexed its collective muscle to score a major political victory in the 2004 caucus The American Federation of Teachers and the AFL-CIO played a key role in bringing down the Iron Curtain The Teamsters enlisted community support to temporarily stop a move by Mr. Coffee to relocate to Mexico and saved nearly 400 manufacturing jobs in the Cleveland area A reporter who has covered labor for two decades, Dine not only details where labor has gone wrong, but he also offers sage advice on how it can adapt to a global economy to recover the ground it lost over the last quarter century.

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

ComplimeNtary Copies

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

57

ECONOMICS

58

OPERATIONS / DECISION SCIENCES

Business/Systems Dynamics .............................................................................61 Data Mining ........................................................................................................79 Introductory Operations Management ................................................................61 Management Science Text .................................................................................67 Operation Management Software.......................................................................67 Operation Management Supplement..................................................................66 Operation Research ...........................................................................................79 Operations Strategy............................................................................................72 Production/Inventory Control ..............................................................................69 Professional References ....................................................................................80 Project Management ..........................................................................................70 Purchasing and Supply Chain Management ......................................................74 Quality Control/Management ..............................................................................73 Service Operations Management .......................................................................74 Upper Level Operations Management................................................................69

59

NEW TITLES

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

2011

Introduction to Management Science, 4e MH Operations Management Video Series: Volume 17 DVD, 13e Operations and Supply Management, 13e Project Management: The Managerial Process, 5e Purchasing and Supply Management, 14e Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 5e Managing Operations Across the Supply Chain Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management, 6e

Author

Hillier Jacobs Jacobs Larson Leenders Schroeder Swink Vollmann

ISBN

9780077400309 9780077327385 9780073525228 9780073403342 9780073377896 9780073403380 9780073403311 9780073377827

Page

67 66 61 70 74 61 61 69

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

2010

Purchasing and Supply Management, 2e Supply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Managing Projects: A TeamBased Approach with Student CD Supply Management, 8e Production and Operations Management, 4e [India] Operations Management [UK] Total Quality Management, 2e [India] Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Operations and Supply Management: The Core, 2e Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Supply Chain Management for Retailing [India] Operations Management in Asia [Asian]

Author

Benton Bowersox Brown Burt Chary Davis Gupta Hillier Jacobs Leong Ray Stevenson/Sum

ISBN

9780073525198 9780073377872 9780077356453 9780073381459 9780070091535 9780077117856 9780070153646 9780077298340 9780073403335 9780071275965 9780070145047 9780071270625

Page

74 75 70 76 63 62 73 79 62 67 76 63

60

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Business / Systems Dynamics

Introductory Operations Management

International Edition

BUSINESS DYNAMICS Systems Thinking And Modeling For A Complex World

By John Sterman 2000 / 768 pages ISBN: 9780072389159 (with CDROM) ISBN: 9780071241076 [IE with CDROM] CONTENTS Introduction Part I. Perspective and Process Chapter 1. Learning In and About Complex Systems Chapter 2. System Dynamics in Action Chapter 3. The Modeling Process Chapter 4. Structure and Behavior Of Dynamic Systems Part II. Tools for Systems Thinking Chapter 5. Causal Loop Diagrams Chapter 6. Stocks and Flows Chapter 7. Dynamics of Stocks and Flows Chapter 8. Closing the Loop: Dynamics of Simple Structures Part III. The Dynamics of Growth Chapter 9. SShaped Growth: Epidemics, Innovation Diffusion, And the Growth of New Products Chapter 10. Path Dependence and Positive Feedback Part IV. Tools For Modeling Dynamic Systems Chapter 11. Delays Chapter 12. CoFlows and Aging Chains Chapter 13. Modeling Human Behavior: Bounded Rationality or Rational Expectations Chapter 14. Forecasts and Fudge Factors: Modeling Expectation Formation Chapter 15. Supply Chains and The Origin of Oscillations Chapter 16. Managing Supply Chains in Manufacturing Chapter 17. The Labor Supply Chain and The Origin of Business Cycles Chapter 18. The Invisible Hand Sometimes Shakes: Commodity Cycles Validation and Model Testing Appendix A: Numerical Integration Appendix B: Noise References Index

New

*9780073525228*

International Edition

OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 13th Edition

By F Robert Jacobs, Indiana UniversityBloomington and Richard B Chase, University of Southern California 2011 (March 2010) / 800 pages ISBN: 9780073525228 ISBN: 9780071220903 [IE] (Details unavailable at press time)

New

*9780073403311*

International Edition

MANAGING OPERATIONS ACROSS THE SUPPLY CHAIN

By Morgan Swink, Steven Melnyk and M Bixby Cooper of Michigan State University-East Lansing and Janet Hartley, Bowling Green State University 2011 (February 2010) / 512 pages ISBN: 9780073403311 ISBN: 9780071221191 [IE] (Details unavailable at press time)

New

*9780073403380*

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 5th Edition

By Roger Schroeder, University of MinnesotaMinneapolis 2011 (January 2010) / 560 pages ISBN: 9780073403380 ISBN: 9780071289580 [IE] CONTENTS About the Author Preface PART ONE Introduction Chapter 1 The Operations Function Chapter 2 Operations and Supply Chain Strategy Chapter 3 Product Design PART TWO Process Design Chapter 4 Process Selection Chapter 5 Service Process Design Chapter 6 ProcessFlow Analysis Chapter 7 Lean Thinking and Lean Systems

61

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

PART THREE Quality Chapter 8 Managing Quality Chapter 9 Quality Control and Improvement PART FOUR Capacity and Scheduling Chapter 10 Supply Chain Management Chapter 11 Forecasting Supplement: Advanced Methods Chapter 12 Capacity Planning Supplement: Mathematical Models Chapter 13 Scheduling Operations Chapter 14 Project Planning and Scheduling PART FIVE Inventory Chapter 15 IndependentDemand Inventory Chapter 16 Materials Requirements Planning and ERP PART SIX Case Studies APPENDIXES PHOTO CREDITS INDEX NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON Strengthened Supply Chain Management Material: This is particularly true in the areas of purchasing and strategic sourcing, and in lean supply chain analysis. Sustainability Coverage: Sustainability is introduced in Chapter One and then is a major component of the Strategy chapter (Chapter 2). Sustainability has been woven into the book in several areas including quality management and value stream mapping, purchasing and global sourcing, and lean supply chain analysis. Reorganization Based on Input from Users: The authors split out the Strategy material from the first chapter and created a new chapter 2 focused on Strategy and Sustainability. Another change was to move Project Management from Chapter 2 to Chapter 6, within the `Process Management' section. End of Chapter "Super Quiz": Designed to allow students to see how well they understand the material using a format that is similar to what they might see in an exam. The super quiz includes many `straight forward' review questions, but also has a selection which `test' for mastery and integration/application level understanding, i.e. the kind of questions that make an exam challenging. The super quizzes include short answers at the bottom so students can see how they perform. Screencam TutorialsStepbyStep Workthrough of the Text Examples. These ScreenCam tutorials are intended to serve as an always available detailed review of the analytics within the text. They will be available free to students on the text Web site. High Interest Company Coverage: They include Apple, GE, Toshiba, HarleyDavidson, FedEx, WalMart and many more. Test Bank questions have been tagged with Bloom's Taxonomy and the applicable AACSB area making it easier to tie assessment to student learning outcomes. McGrawHill Connect Plus Operations Management. McGrawHill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Operations Management. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Operations Management, Connect Plus Operations Management provides all of the Connect Operations Management features plus the following: · · An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. And, Connect Plus is now available with a new book at no additional charge! Connect Features available with this title: * EndofChapter Content * Algorithmically Generated EndofChapter Problems * Test Bank * Algorithmically Generated Test Bank * Instructor Resources * Tegrity

New

*9780077117856*

UK Adaptation

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

By Davis, Davis & Heineke 2010 (February 2010) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780077117856

McGaw-Hill UK Title

(Details unavailable at press time)

New

*9780073403335*

International Edition

OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT The Core, 2nd Edition

By F Robert Jacobs, Indiana UniversityBloomington and Richard B Chase, University of Southern California

· ·

2010 (November 2009) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073403335 ISBN: 9780077397012 (with Student Videos DVD) ISBN: 9780070172265 [IE]

CONTENTS Strategy and Sustainability Chapter 1: Operations and Supply Chain Management Chapter 2: Strategy and Sustainability Manufacturing and Service Processes Chapter 3: Strategic Capacity Management Chapter 4: Production Processes Chapter 5: Service Processes Chapter 6: Quality Management and Sixsigma Chapter 7: Projects Supply Chain Processes Chapter 8: Global Sourcing and Procurement Chapter 9: Location, Logistics and Distribution Chapter 10: Lean and Sustainable Supply Chains

http://mhhe.com/jacobs2e

Jacobs and Chase continue to lead the field of Operations Management with cutting edge uptodate content, technology, and motivation. Now, in this Second Edition Jacobs and Chase focus on the core concepts of operations and supply management. This condensed text was constructed with sections on the four essential core areas--strategy, process management, supply chain management, and inventory and control (supply and demand planning). This set of four core areas was first suggested by a panel of OM instructor's at the Decision Science Institute meeting, and has been verified by market research which examined course syllabi from across the US. The Second Edition provides increased emphasis on supply management concepts, integrates sustainability as a strategic consideration, and includes updated company applications, problems, and cases.

62

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Supply and Demand Planning Chapter 11: Demand Management and Forecasting Chapter 12: Aggregate Operations Planning Chapter 13: Inventory Control Chapter 14: Material Requirements Planning Appendix A. Linear Programming Using the Excel Solver B. Learning Curves C. Answers to Selected Problems D. Present Value Table E. Negative Exponential Distribution F. Areas of the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution Chapter 6 Batching and Other Flow Interruptions: Setup Times and the Economic Order Quantity Model Chapter 7 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: Waiting Time Problems Chapter 8 The Impact of Variability on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 9 Quality Management, Statistical Process Control, and Six Sigma Capacity Chapter 10 Lean Operations and the Toyota Production System Chapter 11 Betting On Uncertain Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 12 MakeToOrder and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 13 Service Levels and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order Upto Inventory Model Chapter 14 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncertainty Chapter 15 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 16 Supply Chain Coordination Appendix A: Statistics Tutorial B: Tables C: Evaluation of the Loss Function D: Equations and Approximations E: Solutions to Selected Practice Problems Glossary References Index of "How to" exhibits Summary of key equations Index

New

*9780071270625*

Asian Adaptation

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT IN ASIA

By Stevenson and Sum, National University of Singapore 2009 (December 2009) ISBN: 9780071270625

An Asian Publication

Operations Management: An Asian Perspective features the very latest concepts and applications in this dynamic field, while preserving the foundations that have made the text a market leader. The book is intended as an introductory textbook, and covers both strategic issues and practical applications. Among the topics are forecasting, product and service design, capacity planning, management of quality and quality control, inventory management, scheduling, supply chain management, and project management. Examples and case studies have been adapted for the Asian context to make the text more approachable for students in Asia. Stevenson and Sum's careful explanations and easy-to-follow format supports students in understanding operations management concepts and applying tools and methods. The material in this text places an emphasis on problem solving. By providing detailed examples, solved problems, operation tours, and rich discussion questions, problems, and case assignments, students learn by doing with this book.

New

PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 4th Edition

*9780070091535*

By S N Chary, Indian Institute of Management--Bangalore 2009 (June 2009) / 848 pages ISBN: 9780070091535

McGrawHill India Title http://www.mhhe.com/chary4e

Production and Operations Management is a vital management discipline in the emerging economies of the world. This book is primarily meant for the students of this stream. It showcases how to plan and control operations to maximize productivity, quality and customer satisfaction. With three new chapters and small sections added in most of the chapters, this edition comprises all the current trends in this subject. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON Outsourcing

International Edition

MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND An Introduction to Operations Management, 2nd Edition

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch of University of Pennsylvania 2009 (April 2008) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073525167 ISBN: 9780071263313 [IE]

www.mhhe.com/cachon_terwiesch2

MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND by Cachon and Terwiesch is the most authoritative, cuttingedge book for operations management MBAs. The book demands rigorous analysis on the part of students without requiring consistent use of sophisticated mathematical modeling to perform it. When the use of quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a practical business solution. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluating Process Capacity Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 The Link between Operations and Finance

Environmental Considerations in Production & Operations Management Where is Production and Operations Management Headed?

An indispensable text for the students of management, engineering, ICWAI and IIB courses A good source of reference for practicing executives

CONTENTS PART I: ROLE OF PRODUCTION & OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT IN BUSINESS WORLD Chapter 1. Production and Operations Management Function Chapter 2. Operations Strategy Chapter 3. Services PART II: USEFUL BASIC TOOLS Chapter 4. Relevant Cost Concepts

63

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Chapter 5. Queuing Theory Chapter 6. Forecasting PART III: IMPERATIVES OF QUALITY AND PRODUCTIVITY Chapter 7. Quality Management Chapter 8. Product Design Chapter 9. Maintenance Management Chapter 10. Job Evaluation PART IV: SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT Chapter 11. Materials Requirement Planning Chapter 12. Materials Management: An Integrated View Chapter 13. Supply Chain Management Chapter 14. Outsourcing PART V: SPATIAL DECISIONS IN PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Chapter 15. Plan Layout Chapter 16. Location of Facilities PART VI: TIMING DECISIONS Chapter 17. Scheduling Chapter 18. Project Management: I Chapter 19. JustInTime Production PART VII: PRESENT CONCERN AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS Chapter 20. Where is Production and Operations Management Headed? 14. Sales and Operations Planning 15. Inventory Control 16. Material Requirements Planning 17. Scheduling 17A ­ Simulation 18. Constraint Management Supplements A. Financial Analysis B. Operations Technology Appendices A. Answers to Selected Problems B. Learning Curve Tables C. Present Value Table D. Negative Exponential Distribution: Values of E. Areas of the Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 10th Edition

By William J Stevenson, Rochester Institute of Technology 2009 (October 2008) / 944 pages ISBN: 9780073377841 ISBN: 9780077284091 (with Student DVD Package) ISBN: 9780070091771 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/stevenson10e

International Edition

OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 12th Edition

By Robert Jacobs, Indiana UniversityBloomington, Richard Chase, University of Southern California and Nicholas Aquilano, University of Arizona 2009 (February 2008) / 832 pages ISBN: 9780077228934 (with Student DVD) ISBN: 9780071284189 [IE with Student DVD]

The Tenth Edition of Operations Management features the latest concepts and applications while preserving the core concepts that have made the text a market leader. Stevenson's careful explanations and approachable format supports students in understanding the important operations management concepts as well as applying tools and methods. By providing detailed examples, solved problems, questions, and cases students learn by doing, and the Tenth Edition continues to offer more support for `doing Operations' than any other. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Operations Management 2 Competitiveness, Strategy, and Productivity 3 Forecasting 4 Product and Service Design 4S Supplement: Reliability 5 Strategic Capacity Planning for Products and Services 5S Supplement: Decision Theory 6 Process Selection and Facilities Layout 6S Linear Programming 7 Design of Work Systems 7S Learning Curves 8 Location Planning and Analysis 8S The Transportation Model 9 Management of Quality 10 Quality Control 10S Acceptance Sampling 11 Supply Chain Management 12 Inventory Management 13 Aggregate Planning 14 MRP and ERP 15 Lean Operations 15S Supplement: Maintenance 16 Scheduling 17 Project Management 18 Management of Waiting Lines

http://www.mhhe.com/jacobs12e

Operations and Supply Management, as the title indicates, provides increased emphasis on supply chain management in the 12e. The 12e continues its market leading uptodate coverage of service operations as well. The text includes solved examples and problems, enough cases for MBA courses to use without supplementing, and the industry leading technology support suite. CONTENTS Section One ­ Strategy 1. Introduction to the Field 2. Operations and Supply Strategy 2A ­ Product Mix Problem/Linear Programming 3. Project Management 4. Product and Service Design Section Two ­ Processes 5. Strategic Capacity Management 5ALearning Curves 6. Process Analysis 6A ­ Job Design and Work Measurement 7. Manufacturing Processes 7A ­ Manufacturing Process Design 8. Service Processes 8AWaiting Line Analysis 9. SixSigma Quality 9AProcess Capability and SPC Section Three ­ Supply Chains 10. Strategic Sourcing 10AFacility Location Analysis) 11. Logistics 11A ­ Supply Chain Network Analysis 12. Lean Manufacturing Section Four ­Enterprise Resource Planning Systems 13. Demand Management

64

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

OPERATIONS NOW Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with Student DVD, 3rd Edition

By Byron Finch, Miami University--Oxford 2008 (November 2006) ISBN: 9780073297057 (Out of Print) ISBN: 9780071285728 [IE] crossfunctional curriculum where students are required to purchase more than one text. The cases offer variety in length and rigor; and several are from Harvard and Darden. This mix makes the book appropriate for both undergraduates and MBA students. CONTENTS Part I: Introduction 1. The Operations Function 2. Operations and Supply Chain Strategy 3. Product Design Part II: Process Design 4. Process Selection 5. Service Process Design 6. Choice of Technology 7. ProcessFlow Analysis Part III: Quality 8. Managing Quality 9. Quality Control and Improvement Part IV: Capacity and Scheduling 10. Supply Chain Management 11. Forecasting 12. Facilities and Aggregate Planning 13. Scheduling Operations 14. Project Scheduling Part V: Inventory 15. Inventory 16. Materials Requirement Planning 17. JIT and Lean Thinking Cases

http://www.mhhe.com/opsnow3e

Operations Now introduces the operations function from a vantage point that encompasses both the entire organization and the broader supply network. The author begins his discussion of operations management by first establishing the goal to which any high quality operation must aspire: the goal of profitability. Operations Now presents operations within a context that acknowledges its interactions both within and without all functional areas of an organization, including the links throughout the supply chain. Thus, students not majoring in operations management immediately understand why they are studying a subject that had heretofore seemed to them irrelevant; operations majors receive valuable instruction in how their chosen field affects and facilitates other functional areas within the enterprise and aligns with the overall goals of the organization. CONTENTS UNIT ONE: FOUNDATIONS FOR SUCCESS Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Profitability: Business Success from Operations' Success Chapter 3: Strategy and Value: Competing through Effective Operations and Supply Chain Management Chapter 4: Processes: Products and Services to Match Customer Needs UNIT TWO: COMPONENTS OF VALUES Chapter 5: Cost: The Price of Value Creation Chapter 6: Quality: Frameworks for Product and Service Improvement Chapter 7: Quality Tools: From Process Performance to Process Perfection Chapter 8: Timeliness: Scheduling and Project Management UNIT THREE: MANAGING RESOURCES TO CREATE VALUE Chapter 9: Supply Chain Management: Managing Business to Business Interaction Chapter10: Demand Forecasting: Building the Foundation for Resource Planning Chapter 11: Inventory: Managing to Meet Demand Chapter 12: Logistics: Positioning Goods in the Supply Chain Chapter 13: Lean Systems: Eliminating Waste through the Supply Chain Chapter 14: Capacity: Matching Productive Resources to Demand Chapter 15: Constraint Management: Simplifying Complex Systems Chapter 16: Facilities: Making Location and Layout Decisions Chapter 17: Workforce: Optimizing Human Capital

International Edition

INTERACTIVE MODELS FOR OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT WITH CD

By Byron Finch, Miami University of OHOxford 2007 (November 2005) ISBN: 9780072857108 ISBN: 9780072982749 (with CD) ISBN: 9780071108416 [IE with CD] CONTENTS Unit 1: Demand Forecasting: The Time Series Components Model / The Simple Exponential Smoothing Model / The Trend Enhanced Exponential Smoothing Model / The Linear Trend Equation Model / The Simple Linear Regression Model Unit 2: Financial Decision Making: The Breakeven Model / The Variance Analysis Model Unit 3: Capacity Management: The Learning Curve Model / The Overbooking Model / The Aggregate Planning Model Unit 4: Quality Management: The Xbar and Rchart Model Unit 5: Inventory Management and Scheduling: The Economic Order Point Model / The Economic Order Point with Quantity Discounts Model / The Reorder Point Model / The Material Requirements Planning Model / The Risk Pooling Model / The Bullwhip Effect Model / The Sequencing Rules Model Unit 6: Facility Decisions Models: The ProcessOriented Layout Model / The Center of Gravity Model Unit 7: Process Simulation Models: The Waiting Line Simulation Model / The Production Line Simulation Model / The Kanban Simulation Model / The Constraint Management Simulation Model

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 4th Edition

By Roger Schroeder, University of MinnesotaMinneapolis 2008 (November 2007) / 544 pages ISBN: 9780073377865 ISBN: 9780071263863 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/schroeder4e

Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, is an ideal book for the instructor seeking a short text with cases. This book employs a crossfunctional perspective, appealing to nonmajors and practical for use in an MBA level course in operations management. The size and price of the book also make the text attractive for the

65

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5th Edition

By Mark Davis, Bentley College and Janelle Heineke 2005 / 768 pages ISBN: 9780072994353 (with Student CD and PowerWeb) - Out of Print ISBN: 9780071117241 [IE with CD and Powerweb] Chapter 12: Human Resources in OM Supplement: Four methods of developing Time Standards Chapter 13: Managing Materials: Timing and Quantities Supplement: Economic Order Quantity: Theory and Derivations Chapter 14: Facilities Management Chapter 15: Managing Continuous and Repetitive Operations Chapter 16: Managing Job and Batch Operations Chapter 17: Managing Projects

http://www.mhhe.com/davis5e

CONTENTS PART I Operations Management in Today's Business Environment 1 Introduction to Operations Management 2 Operations Strategy: Defining How Firms Compete S2 Financial Analysis in Operations Management 3 The Role of Technology in Operations 4 Supply Chain Management 5 Integrating Manufacturing and Service PART II Process Decisions 6 New Product and Service Development, and Process Selection 7 Project Management 8 Process Measurement and Analysis S8 Job Design and Work Performance Measurement 9 Quality Management S9 Quality Tools for Improving Processes 10 Lean Production PART III Facility Decisions 11 Facility Location and Capacity 12 Facility Layouts S12 Forecasting PART IV Aggregate Planning and Inventory Decisions 13 Aggregate Planning 14 Inventory Systems for Independent Demand 15 Inventory Systems for Dependent Demand PART V Daily Operational Decisions 16 Waiting Line Management S16 Waiting Line Theory 17 Scheduling

Operation Management Supplement

New

MH OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT VIDEO SERIES Volume 17 DVD 13 Edition

*9780077327385*

By World Class Communication, F Robert Jacobs, Indiana UniversityBloomington and Richard Chase, University of Southern California 2011 (March 2010) ISBN: 9780077327385 (Details unavailable at press time)

International Edition

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 7th Edition

By Edward M Knod, Western Illinois University and Richard Schonberger, University of Washington 2001 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780072460506 (with CD, Mandatory Package) - Out of Print ISBN: 9780071202169 [IE with CD]

MCGRAWHILL/IRWIN OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT VIDEO SERIES Volume 14 DVD 12th Edition

By World Class Communication, F Robert Jacobs, Indiana UniversityBloomington and Richard Chase, University of Southern California 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 9780073278780 (Details unavailable at press time)

www.mhhe.com/pom

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Operations Management: Introductory Concepts Chapter 2: OM Strategy: Dynamic Competitiveness Chapter 3: Principles of Operations Management Chapter 4: Demand Management and Forecasting Supplement: Least Squares Trend and Correlation Coefficients Chapter 5: Capacity Planning and Master Scheduling Supplement: Aggregate capacity Planning with Excel? Chapter 6: Order Fulfillment and Purchasing Chapter 7: Designing for Customers' Needs Chapter 8: The Quality Imperative Supplement: Quality Pioneers of the Twentieth Century Chapter 9: Process Control and Improvement Chapter 10: FlowControl: Eliminating Process Wastes Chapter 11: TimingAnother Imperative

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 2nd Edition

By Joseph Monks, Gonzaga University 1996 / 352 pages ISBN: 9780070427648

A Professional Reference Title

(International Edition is not available for sale in Japan) CONTENTS 1. Operations Management: Definition, Mission, and Productivity Concepts 2. Quality Management of Competitive Operations 3. Operations Decision Making (BreakEven Analysis, Decision Trees, and Statistical Methods)

66

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

4. Forecasting (Statistical Methods) 5. Financial Analysis for Operations (PresentValue Criteria) 6. Facility Location (Transportation Linear Programming) 7. Layout of Facilities (Line Balancing) 8. Product Design: Goods and Services (Linear Programming) 9. Process Planning and Analysis (Simulation) 10. Job Design and Work Measurement (Statistical Sample Size) 11. Aggregate Planning and Master Scheduling 12. Materials Management: Purchasing, Inventory and JIT Systems (Calculus) 13. Inventory Control: Order Points, Safety Stocks, and Service Levels (Statistical Methods) 14. Material Requirements Planning: MRP and CRP 15. Operations Scheduling and Control (Assignment Linear Programming) 16. Operations Analysis and Maintenance (Calculus, Learning Curves, Queuing and Simulation) 17. Project Management (CPM/PERT) 18. Quality Control (Statistical Methods) / Appendixes

Management Science Text

New

*9780077400309*

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE 4th Edition

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University of Washington 2011 (March 2010) ISBN: 9780077400309 ISBN: 9780071289313 [IE] (Details unavailable at press time)

Operation Management Software

New

*9780071275965*

BUSINESS MODELING WITH SPREADSHEET

By ThinYin Leong and Michelle Cheong

International Edition

SAP R/3 ENTERPRISE SOFTWARE An Introduction

By Roger Hayen, Central Michigan University 2007 (May 2006) / 192 pages ISBN: 9780072990676 ISBN: 9780071268912 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/hayen

CONTENTS Preface Part 1 Understanding Enterprise Software Chapter 1 Overview Chapter 2 Navigation and Systems Operation Chapter 3 Application Modules Chapter 4 Businesses Processes Chapter 5 Web Application Server Chapter 6 Internet Enabled Solutions Chapter 7 Configuration Chapter 8 Implementation Framework Chapter 9 Organization Structure Chapter 10 Customizing Tools Part 2 Displaying SAP R/3 Information Chapter 11 Exploring System Capabilities Part 3 Processing SAP R/3 Transactions Chapter 12 Customer Order to Cash Cycle Processes Summary Appendix Quick Check Answers

2009 (August 2008) / 200 pages ISBN: 9780071275965

An Asian Publication

The true potential of spreadsheet software lies in their application in what is now referred to as exploratory modeling, which enables business and financial analysts to work on the fly on unstructured problems. Business Modeling with Spreadsheets offers a rich set of business contexts that make learning about spreadsheets interesting and the skills acquired more effective and enduring. Unlike the existing titles in the market, this book is wholly dedicated to the art of exploratory spreadsheet modeling. Practice problems that readers encounter on a daytoday basis are presented, with the aim of helping them to derive generally applicable principles and to link principle to practice. Undergraduates and professionals whose work involves managing finance, accounts, and operations will find this book a refreshing learning guide and reference resource. Although Excel 2003 is the main spreadsheet software covered in this book, it also includes useful comments to guide users of Excel 2007 and StarOffice8 Calc. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Spreadsheet Modeling Chapter 2: Problem Solving and Spreadsheet Engineering Chapter 3: Data Lookup and Linkup Chapter 4: Functional Relationships Chapter 5: Making Assumptions Chapter 6: Risks and Uncertainties Chapter 7: Processes and Time Chapter 8: Analyzing the Data Appendix A: Excel Features and Functions Appendix B: Visual Basic for Application Index

67

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3rd Edition

By Frederick Hillier, Stanford University and Mark Hillier, University of Washington 2008 (March 2007) / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073129037 ISBN: 9780073337975 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071259279 [IE with Student CD and Passcode Card) CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1 The Art and Science of Becoming a More Effective and Efficient Problem Solver Chapter 2 Introduction to Spreadsheet Modeling Chapter 3 Probability and Statistics--A Foundation for Becoming a More Effective and Efficient Problem Solver Chapter 4 Decision Analysis: Building the Structure for Solving the Problem Chapter 5 Simulation Modeling Chapter 6 Linear Regression Modeling Chapter 7 Introduction to Forecasting Chapter 8 Introduction to Optimization Models Chapter 9 Project Management: PERT/CPM Chapter 10 Introduction to Visual Basic Programming Appendix A Useful Information

http://www.mhhe.com/hillier3e

Introduction to Management Science, 3e, offers a unique model approach and integrates the use of Excel. Through this approach students are better able to grasp the essential concepts covered in the course and see their utility. Each chapter includes a case study that is meant to show the students a real and interesting application of the topics addressed in that chapter. These cases and related applications cuts across all functional areas of business and show how management science techniques apply in the business environment. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Linear Programming: Basic Concepts Chapter 3: Linear Programming: Formulation and Applications Chapter 4: The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets Chapter 5: WhatIf Analysis for Linear Programming Chapter 6: Network Optimization Problems Chapter 7: Using Binary Integer Programming to Deal with YesorNo Decisions Chapter 8: Nonlinear Programming Chapter 9: Decision Analysis Chapter 10: Forecasting Chapter 11: Queueing Models Chapter 12: Computer Simulation: Basic Concepts Chapter 13: Computer Simulation with Crystal Ball

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT SCIENCE

By William D Stevenson, North Carolina State University and Ceyhun Ozgur, Valparaiso University 2007 (February 2006) / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073252902 (with Spreadsheets and Student CD) ISBN: 9780071257732 [IE with Student CD and Spreadsheet] ISBN: 9780073253367 (Instructor's Edition with Student CD t/a Text)

http://www.mhhe.com/stevensonozgur1e

CONTENTS Part 1 Introduction and Forecasting. 1Introduction to Management Science, Modeling, and Excel Spreadsheets. 2 Forecasting. Part 2 Deterministic Decision Models. 3Linear Programming: Basic Concepts and Graphical Solutions. 4Linear Programming: Applications and Solutions. 5 Linear Programming: Sensitivity Analysis, Duality, and Specialized Models. 6 Transportation, Assignment, and Transshipment Problems. 7 Integer Programming. 8 Network Optimization Models. 9 Nonlinear Optimization Models. 10 MultiCriteria Models. Part 3 Probabilistic Decision Models. 11 Decision Theory. 2 Markov Analysis. 13 Waiting Line Models. 14 Simulation. CDRom Modules. Chapter 4S Simplex Algorithm. Chapter 6S Transportation and Assignment Solution. Procedures. Chapter 7S Branch and Bound Method for Integer. Programming Problems. Chapter 9S Mini ­Review: Differential Arithmetic

International Edition

SPREADSHEET MODELING FOR BUSINESS DECISIONS

By John Kros, East Carolina University 2008 (January 2007) ISBN: 9780073317922 (with Student CDROM & Crystal Ball Access Passcode Card) ISBN: 9780077212797 (with Student CD, at Risk & Crystal Ball Access Cards) ISBN: 9780071286541 [IE with Crystal Ball Access Card and Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/kros1e

Spreadsheet Modeling for Business Decisions focuses on five fundamental topics of business decision modeling; emphasizing the effective communication of results to the appropriate business decision maker. The topics include spreadsheet modeling, data management and modeling, simulation and linear regression modeling, and decision making under uncertainty. The text strives to educate managers in the process of becoming more effective and efficient problem solvers by providing the most important and useful topics within business decision models while at the same time preparing students to apply those topics to realworld problems, to integrate the use of common software packages into their analysis and solutions, and to prepare written and verbal conclusions from that analysis.

68

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Upper Level Operations Management

International Edition

PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS 6th Edition

By Steven Nahmias, Santa Clara University 2009 (March 2008) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780073377858 ISBN: 9780071263702 [IE]

evolved, the authors show explicitly how users can achieve Lean Manufacturing objectives (faster response, less inventory) using the integration aspects of MRP/ERP/SCM systems along with the variance analysis methods of Six Sigma. Factory Physics provides the overarching framework that coordinates all of these initiatives into a singlefocused strategy. CONTENTS PART I: THE LESSONS OF HISTORY Chapter 1: Manufacturing in America Chapter 2: Inventory Control: From EOQ to RDP Chapter 3: The MRP Crusade Chapter 4: The JIT Revolution Chapter 5: What Went Wrong PART II: FACTORY PHYSICS Chapter 6: A Science of Manufacturing Chapter 7: Basic Factory Dynamics Chapter 8: Variability Basics Chapter 9: The Corrupting Influence of Variability Chapter 10: Push and Pull Production Systems Chapter 11: The Human Element in Operations Management Chapter 12: Total Quality Manufacturing PART III: PRINCIPLES IN PRACTICE Chapter 13: A Pull Planning Framework Chapter 14: Shop Floor Control Chapter 15: Production Scheduling Chapter 16: Aggregate and Workforce Planning Chapter 17: Supply Chain Management Chapter 18: Capacity Management Chapter 19: SynthesisPulling It All Together

http://www.mhhe.com/nahmias6e

Production and Operations Analysis, 6/e by Steven Nahmias provides a survey of the analytical methods used to support the functions of production and operations management. This latest edition maintains the focus on continual process improvement while enhancing the technical content of the book. Both analytical methods centered on factory and service processes, as well as process issues across the supply chain, are included. As always, the text presents the most cuttingedge quantitative models used in operations in a clear, accessible manner. While the familiar structure and organization of the text remains the same as previous editions, the current edition includes several new topics aimed at enhancing the technical content of the book. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Strategy and Competition Chapter 2 Forecasting Chapter 3 Aggregate Planning Supplement 1 Linear Programming Chapter 4 Inventory Control Subject to Known Demand Chapter 5 Inventory Control Subject to Uncertain Demand Chapter 6 Supply Chain Management Chapter 7 Push and Pull Production Control Systems: MRP and JIT Chapter 8 Operations Scheduling Supplement 2 Queuing Theory Chapter 9 Project Scheduling Chapter 10 Facilities Layout and Location Chapter 11 Quality and Assurance Chapter 12 Reliability and Maintainability Appendix Tables Index

Production/Inventory Control

New

International Edition

FACTORY PHYSICS 3rd Edition

By Wallace Hopp, Northwestern University and Mark Spearman, Facotyr Pysics, Inc 2008 (October 2007) / 752 pages ISBN: 9780072824032 ISBN: 9780071232463 [IE]

MANUFACTURING PLANNING AND CONTROL FOR SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT 6th Edition

*9780073377827*

By Thomas Vollmann, William Lee Berry, Ohio State University Columbus, David Clay Whybark, University of North Carolina 2011 (March 2010) / 768 pages ISBN: 9780073377827 (Details unavailable at press time)

http://www.mhhe.com/pom

After a brief introductory chapter, Factory Physics 3/e is divided into three parts: I ­ The Lessons of History; II ­ Factory Physics; and III ­ Principles in Practice. The scientific approach to manufacturing and supply chain management, developed in Part II, is unique to this text. No other text or professional book provides a rigorous, principlesbased foundation for manufacturing management. The Third Edition offers tighter connections between Lean Manufacturing, MRP/ ERP, Six Sigma, Supply Chain Management, and Factory Physics. In addition to enhancing the historical overview of how these systems

69

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS ANALYSIS 6th Edition

By Steven Nahmias, Santa Clara University 2009 (March 2008) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780073377858 ISBN: 9780071263702 [IE] 15 Advanced JIT 16 Advanced Scheduling Systems 17 Advanced Concepts in Sales and Operations Planning 18 Frontiers

http://www.mhhe.com/nahmias6e

Production and Operations Analysis, 6/e by Steven Nahmias provides a survey of the analytical methods used to support the functions of production and operations management. This latest edition maintains the focus on continual process improvement while enhancing the technical content of the book. Both analytical methods centered on factory and service processes, as well as process issues across the supply chain, are included. As always, the text presents the most cuttingedge quantitative models used in operations in a clear, accessible manner. While the familiar structure and organization of the text remains the same as previous editions, the current edition includes several new topics aimed at enhancing the technical content of the book. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Strategy and Competition Chapter 2 Forecasting Chapter 3 Aggregate Planning Supplement 1 Linear Programming Chapter 4 Inventory Control Subject to Known Demand Chapter 5 Inventory Control Subject to Uncertain Demand Chapter 6 Supply Chain Management Chapter 7 Push and Pull Production Control Systems: MRP and JIT Chapter 8 Operations Scheduling Supplement 2 Queuing Theory Chapter 9 Project Scheduling Chapter 10 Facilities Layout and Location Chapter 11 Quality and Assurance Chapter 12 Reliability and Maintainability Appendix Tables Index

Project Management

New

*9780073403342*

International Edition

PROJECT MANAGEMENT The Managerial Process, 5th Edition

By Erik W Larson and Clifford F Gray of Oregon State University 2011 (March 2010) / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073403342 ISBN: 9780071289290 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/graylarson5e

(Details unavailable at press time)

New

*9780077356453*

International Edition

MANAGING PROJECTS A TeamBased Approach with Student CD

By Karen Brown, Thunderbird School of Global and Nancy Lea Hyer, Vanderbilt UniversityNashville

International Edition

MANUFACTURING PLANNING AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 5th Edition

By Thomas Vollmann, William Lee Berry, Ohio State University Columbus, David Clay Whybark, University of North Carolina 2005 / 736 pages ISBN: 9780072299908 ISBN: 9780071121330 [IE]

2010 (November 2009) ISBN: 9780077356453 ISBN: 9780071267519 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/brownhyer1e

Students today are likely to be assigned to project teams or to be project managers almost immediately in their first job. Managing Projects: A TeamBased Approach was written for a wide range of stakeholders, including project managers, project team members, support personnel, functional mangers who provide resources for projects, project customers (and customer representatives), project sponsors, project subcontractors, and anyone who plays a role in the project delivery process. The need for project management is on the rise as product life cycles compress, demand for IT systems increases, and business takes on an increasingly global character. This book adds to the project management knowledge base in a way that fills an unmet need--it shows how teams can apply many of the standard project management tools, as well as several tools that are relatively new to the field. Managing Projects: A TeamBased Approach offers the academic rigor found in most textbooks along with the practical attributes often found more often in trade/professional publications.

http://www.mhhe.com/vollmann5

CONTENTS 1 Integration and Supply Chains 2 Demand Management 3 Sales and Operations Planning 4 ERPIntegrated Systems 5 Basic Inventory Concepts 6 Master Production Scheduling 7 MRP (Materials Requirements Planning) 8 JIT 9 Capacity Planning 10 Production Activity Control 11 Supply Chain 12 Implementation 13 MPC Systems and Strategy 14 Advanced MRP

70

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

FEaTurES A process context demonstrates how the various tools fit together as part of a cohesive project management process, demonstrating the iterative nature of project planning and execution. A team orientation shows how project management concepts and tools work in team settings. This book includes tools not found, as a comprehensive set, in any other project management book. The concept of "active learning" is introduced in and employed throughout the textbook. Balanced tool set. The most effective project managers are those who know when they need to be analytical and when a more creative approach is warranted--this text presents ideas for making these distinctions and tools for use in each type of situation. Focus on pedagogy. This book was developed around teaching and learning. The material is presented in a way that will both enhance an instructor's ability to teach from the book, and support the solo learner. Includes illustrations of stateoftheart technology tools such as MSProject and MindManager. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Managing Projects: What and Why Chapter 2: The Effective Project Manager Chapter 3: Project Selection: Doing the Right Thing Chapter 4: Project Initiation: Setting the Stage for Action Chapter 5: Project Definition: Creating and Using the Work Breakdown Structure Chapter 6: Assessing and Preparing for Project Uncertainties Chapter 7: Project Scheduling: Adding the Time Dimension Chapter 8: Modifying Project Schedules to Accommodate Time and Resource Constraints Chapter 9: Monitoring and Controlling Project Performance Chapter 10: Finishing Well: Project Closure and Learning Appendix A: Quick Guide to Using Microsoft Project Professional 2007® Appendix B: Decision Analysis Concepts and Tools Chapter 8: Scheduling Resources and Costs Chapter 9: Reducing Project Duration Chapter 10: Leadership: Being an Effective Project Manager Chapter 11: Managing Project Teams Chapter 12: Outsourcing: Managing Interorganizational Relations Chapter 13: Progress and Performance Measurement and Evaluation Chapter 14: Project Audit and Closure Chapter 15: International Projects Chapter 16: Oversight Appendix 1: SimProject Case Appendix 2: Computer Project Exercises

International Edition

SIMPROJECT VERSION 2.0 PASSCODE (STANDALONE) WITH MS PROJECT 2007 4th Edition

By Jeffrey K Pinto and Diane H Parente 2008 (August 2007) ISBN: 9780077210984 (Out of Print) ISBN: 9780071275392 [IE] SimProject is a webbased project management simulation that provides virtual experience in managing projects. Firsthand experience as a successful project manager is gained through the use of multiple scenarios, competitive and collaborative project teams. SimProject comes with a 60day Microsoft Project trial for each student. The Player's Manual is downloaded from the SimProject website once a student registers. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON The MS Project 2007 trial time was cut to sixty days from prior versions (Microsoft's condition for all publishers packaging the 2007 trial software with a book). Options for instructors who want a longer trial version of Microsoft Project 2007 follow: 1. Instructors and students may download a free 180day trial of Microsoft Professional 2007. MS Professional has the same capabilities as MS Project. Here's a direct link to the download: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=8e6c99 7769af4cbc8f39d0111088ed48&DisplayLang=en This information, including the link, is being added to the Gray/Larson 4e OLC, and to the SimProject homepage and interior pages. 2. Membership to the MSDN Academic Alliance. An annual electronic membership costs $499 and gives students, faculty, and computer labs access to the complete suite of Microsoft developer tools, servers, and operating systems for instructional use. This includes Microsoft Project 2007. Membership enables students and faculty to install all software on their personal PCs. Visit www.msdnaa.net for more information or to purchase membership. FEaTurES Computer simulations sharpen skills required for project managers and team members in business: team development, collaboration, global thinking, predilection to consider the ramifications of decisions and their effect on the bottom line SimProject teaches students to manage a project from initiation to completion. Within this framework, the student employs and develops skills pertinent to: personnel selection and training; team and personal motivation; conflict management; and stakeholder management. Students will be required to use planning and scheduling techniques such as: work breakdown structures, PERT/CPM, and development risk analysis. The topical coverage correlates with the Project Management Institute's Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), insuring that the students gain exposure to those topics recognized by the key professional organization for project manager.

International Edition

PROJECT MANAGEMENT The Managerial Process, 4th Edition

By Clifford Gray and Erik Larson of Oregon State University 2008 (June 2007) / 576 pages ISBN: 9780073525150 ISBN: 9780073348179 (with MS Project CD and Student CD) ISBN: 9780071266260 [IE with MS Project CD and Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/graylarson4e

As the marketleading textbook on the subject, Project Management: The Managerial Process, 4e is distinguished by its balanced treatment of both the technical and behavioral issues in project management as well as by its coverage of a broad range of industries to which project management principles can be applied. It focuses on how project management is integral to the organization as a whole. The 4th edition reflects the latest changes found in the practice. Other texts discuss the topics covered in this text but they do not view oversight as the project manager's operating environment, as does Gray/Larson. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Modern Project Management Chapter 2: Organization Strategy and Project Selection Chapter 3: Organization: Structure and Culture Chapter 4: Defining the Project Chapter 5: Estimating Project Times and Costs Chapter 6: Developing a Project Plan Chapter 7: Managing Risk

71

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

MANAGING PROJECT AND SERVICE DEVELOPMENT Text and Cases

By Stefan H Thomke, Harvard Business School 2007 (January 2006) / 448 pages ISBN: 9780073023014 ISBN: 9780071107556 [IE] 8. Quantitative Project Scheduling Methods 9. Probabilistic Scheduling Models 10. Project Implementation 11. Project Control and Assessment Appendix (Microsoft Project) PMBOK Cross References

http://www.mhhe.com/thomke

CONTENTS Introduction. Module One: Building Capabilities for Experimentation, Learning and Prototyping. Module Overview. Case: The Final Voyage of the Challenger. Case: Apple Powerbook: Design Quality and Time to Market. Case: IDEO Product Development. Case: Bank of America. Article: R&D Comes to Services: Bank of America's Pathbreaking Experiments. Case: Team New Zealand. Article: Enlightened Experimentation: The New Imperative for Innovation. Case: Eli Lilly & Company: Drug Development Strategy. Module Two: Development Process Design and Improvement. Module Overview. Case: Innovation at 3M. Article: Creating Breakthroughs at 3M Note: Understanding User Needs. Case: Product Development at Dell Computer Corporation. Article: Agile Product Development: Managing Flexibility in Uncertain Environments. Case: Developing Products on Internet Time: A Process Design Exercise. Article: Developing Products on Internet Time. Case: BMW AG: The Digital Car Project. Article: The Effect of `FrontLoading' ProblemSolving on Product Development Performance. Case: Bush Boake Allen. Article: Customers as Innovators: A New Way to Create Value. Module Three: Managing Development Networks. Module Overview. Case: Microsoft Office: Finding the Suite Spot. Note: Learning from Projects: Note on Conducting a Postmortem Analysis. Case: We've Got Rhythm! Medtronic Corporation's Cardiac Pacemaker Business. Article: Creating Project Plans to Focus Product Development. Case: Siemens AG: Global Development Strategy. Article: Building Effective R&D Capabilities Abroad. Case: Project Dreamcast: Serious Play at Sega Enterprises Ltd. Article: Increasing Returns and the New World of Business. Case: Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Article: Mastering the Value Chain: An Interview with Mark Levin of Millennium Pharmaceuticals

Operations Strategy

International Edition

OPERATIONS STRATEGY Competiting in the 21st Century

By Sara Beckman, University of CaliforniaBerkeley and Donald Barry Rosenfield, Massachusetts Institute of Technology 2008 (May 2007) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780072500783 ISBN: 9780071274081 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/beckman08

Operations Strategy: Competing in the 21st Century addresses the basic decisions leaders of operations must address: vertical integration, capacity, facilities, process technology, information technology, sourcing, business process management, capabilities development and supply chain integration. In doing so, the book integrates strategic considerations with analytical models, thereby providing a comprehensive view of these critical decisions and the tools used to help make them. The themes and conclusions offered by the authors are based on recent research, particularly from the Leaders for Manufacturing program at MIT. Students and instructors can be sure that they are receiving the most uptodate examples of companies engaged in making these decisions. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Business Strategy Context for Operations Strategy Chapter 2: Vertical Integration Chapter 3: Process Technology Chapter 4: Capacity Strategy Chapter 5: Facilities Strategy and Globalization Chapter 6: Sourcing Chapter 7: Business Process Focused Strategies and Organizational Design Chapter 8: Coordinating the Supply Chain Chapter 9: Information Technology Chapter 10: CrossCutting CapabilitiesLean Operations, Quality, and Flexibility Chapter 11: Strategy Development and Practice

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO INFORMATION SYSTEMS PROJECT MANAGEMENT A Systems Approach, 2nd Edition

By David L. Olson, University of Nebraska Lincoln 2004 / 352 pages ISBN: 9780072872705 (with Student CD) - Out of Print ISBN: 9780071232616 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/olson2e

CONTENTS 1. Introduction to Project Management 2. Human Aspects of Information Systems Project Management 3. Project Organization 4. Project Selection and Approval 5. Requirements Definition 6. System Development 7. Estimation

72

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Quality Control / Management

New

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT 2nd Edition

*9780070153646*

14. OperationsService Sector 1 5. Inspection, Test, and Measurement 16. Quality Assurance Audits Part IV: Statistical Techniques 17. Basic Concepts of Statistics and Probability 18. Statistical Tools for Analyzing Data 19. Statistical Tools for Designing for Quality 20. Statistical Process Control Appendix I: Supplementary Problems Using Minitab Appendix II: Study Guide Examples Appendix III: Tables

By N Srinivasa Gupta and B Valarmanthi of SKP Engineering College 2009 (June 2009) / 224 pages ISBN: 9780070153646

International Edition

QUALITY MANAGEMENT 3rd Edition

By Howard Gitlow, University of Miami, Rosa Oppenheim, Rutgers University, Alan Oppenheim, Montclair State University and David Levine 2005 / 767 pages ISBN: 9780072999839 (with Student CD) - Out of Print ISBN: 9780071123389 [IE with Student CD] CONTENTS Part One: Foundations of Quality Management 1 Fundamentals of Quality 2 Fundamentals of Statistical Studies 3 Defining and Documenting a Process Part Two: Tools and Methods of Analytic Studies 4 Basic Probability and Statistics 5 Stabilizing and Improving a Process with Control Charts 6 Attribute Control Charts 7 Variables Control Charts 8 OutOfControl Patterns 9 Diagnosing a Process 10 Specifications 11 Process Capability and Improvement Studies 12 Taguchi MethodsQuality Improvement in Product and Process Design 13 Inspection Policy Part Three: Administrative Systems for Quality Management 14 Management Commitment to Transformation 15 Management's Intellectual and Emotional Education 16 Daily Management 17 Cross Functional Management 18 Policy Management (Hoshin Kanri) Part Four: Some Current thinking About Statistical Studies and Practice 19 Some Current thinking about Statistical Studies 20 "Six Sigma" Management

McGraw-Hill India Title

A good text book for catering to the requirements of the `B' and `C' category management institutions. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON Chapter-end questions Two-mark questions and answers Numerous flow charts / block diagrams for better understanding Case studies, chapter-end summary

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction to Total Quality Management Chapter 2. Customer Satisfaction Chapter 3. Statistical Process Control Chapter 4. TQM Tools Chapter 5. Quality Systems

International Edition

QUALITY PLANNING AND ANALYSIS From Product Development Through Use, 5th Edition

By Frank M Gryna Jr., University of Tampa, Joseph A DeFeo and Richard C H Chua of Juran Institute 2007 (December 2005) / 704 pages ISBN: 9780072966626 ISBN: 9780071254212 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/gryna

CONTENTS Introduction: A Roadmap for Change Part I: Foundation 1. Basic Concepts 2. Companywide Assessment of Quality 3. Quality Improvement and Cost Reduction 4. Operational Quality Planning and Sales Income 5. Quality Control Part II: Managerial Concepts 6. Process Management 7. Organization for Quality 8. Strategic Quality Management 9. Developing a Quality Culture Part III: Functional Applications 10. Understanding Customer Needs 11. Designing for Quality 12. Supply Chain Management 13. OperationsManufacturing Sector

73

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Service Operations Management

International Edition

SERVICE MANAGEMENT 6th Edition

By James Fitzsimmons, University of Texas at Austin and Mona Fitzsimmons 2008 (December 2007) / 512 pages ISBN: 9780077228491 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071263467 [IE]

Purchasing and Supply Chain Management

New

*9780073377896*

International Edition

PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 14th Edition

By Michael Leenders and P Fraser Johnson of University of Western Ontario, Anna Flynn, Vice president of Institute of Supply Management 2011 (June 2010) / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073377896 ISBN: 9780071289375 [IE] (Details unavailable at press time)

http://www.mhhe.com/fitzsimmons08

Balancing conceptual and applied coverage of all aspects of the management and operation of services, Service Management has maintained the position as market leader through five previous editions. It is the most comprehensive and widely used introduction to service operations on the market, written by one of the top authorities on the subject, and it is designed to develop students' skills in both strategic and operational issues pertaining to services. New material on Professional Service Firms highlights IBM's initiative to establish a Service Science, Management, and Engineering discipline. The Sixth Edition also offers the latest information on SixSigma and RFID, as well as recent developments in other important industry topics. Text coverage spans both qualitative and quantitative aspects of service management and offers flexibility in courses, offering varying approaches to the study of service operations. The ancillary package includes student CDROM and Website that includes selftest quizzes, video clips, ServiceModel Software, and the Mortgage Service Game. CONTENTS PART I: Understanding Services Chapter 1: The Role of Services in an Economy Chapter 2: The Nature of Services Chapter 3: Service Strategy PART II: Designing the Service Enterprise Chapter 4: New Service Development Chapter 5: Technology in Services Chapter 6: Service Quality Chapter 7: Process Improvement (DEA supplement) Chapter 8: The Service Encounter Chapter 9: Supporting Facility and Process Flows Chapter 10: Service Facility Location PART III: Managing Service Operations Chapter 11: Managing Capacity and Demand Chapter 12: Managing Waiting Lines Chapter 13: Service Supply Relationships Chapter 14: Growth and Globalization of Services Chapter 15: Managing Projects PART IV: Quantitative Models for Service Management Chapter 16: Capacity Planning and Queuing Models (Computer Simulation) Chapter 17: Forecasting Demand for Services Chapter 18: Managing Facilitating Goods Appendices: Areas of a Standard Normal Distribution Uniformly Distributed Random Numbers [0,1] Values of Lq for the M/M/c Queuing Model Equations for Selected Queuing Models

New

*9780073525198*

International Edition

PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 2nd Edition

By W C Benton

2010 (November 2009) / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073525198 ISBN: 9780071289139 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/benton2e

The Second Edition of Purchasing and Supply Management focuses on the next generation of professionals as it outlines the most current methods in purchasing and supply chain management. With W.C. Benton's stepbystep approach, both students and professionals can gain analytical purchasing skills. Real case studies and exercises help students transform purchasing theory into purchasing practice and implementation. Some of the topics include purchasing business processes, price cost analysis, professional services, and transportation, global, and healthcare purchasing. Dr. Benton has published more than one hundred articles in the areas of purchasing management, inventory control, supply chain management, quality assurance, and materials management. He has been ranked #1 out of 753 quality and quantity researchers in operations management, has served as a consultant for IBM, RCA, Frigidaire, and state Departments of Transportation, among others, and is the founder of the Purchasing and Supply Management Association (PSMA) at the Fisher College of Business. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON A new chapter on strategic outsourcing has been added. Strategic outsourcing has rapidly become the building block for globalization. Expanded coverage of JIT (Lean) Purchasing demonstrates how the role of purchasing has changed from merely placing orders

74

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

to investigating the supplier's technical and process capabilities. Expanded coverage of Electronic Purchasing shows how epurchasing has fundamentally transformed the traditional indirect purchasing function and has lead to significant cost savings and coordinated efficiency. Expanded coverage on supply chain relationship management examines how any buying organization must maintain strong relationships with its best contract manufacturers and suppliers in order to stay competitive in today's aggressive market sectors. Five new real world cases based on practical organizational situations have been added to reinforce the lessons learned in each chapter. CONTENTS Preface Part 1: Introduction to Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 1: Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2: Purchasing Decisions and Business Strategy Chapter 3: The Legal Aspects of Purchasing Part 2: Materials Management Chapter 4: Materials Management Chapter 5: Inventory Management Chapter 6: JustInTime (Lean) Purchasing Chapter 7: Purchasing Procedures, EPurchasing, and Systems Contracting Part 3: Fundamentals of Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 8: Supplier Selection and Evaluation Chapter 9: Strategic Outsourcing Chapter 10: Global Sourcing Chapter 11: Purchasing, Supply Partnerships, and Supply Chain Power Chapter 12: Total Quality Management (TQM) and Purchasing Part 4: Price/Cost Analysis and Negotiation Strategies Chapter 13: Price Determination Chapter 14: Bargaining and Negotiations Part 5: Special Purchasing Application Chapter 15: Purchasing Transportation Services Chapter 16: Equipment Acquisition and Disposal Chapter 17: Healthcare Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 18: Procuring Professional Services

New

*9780073377872*

International Edition

SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT 3rd Edition

By Donald Bowersox, David Closs and M Bixby Cooper of Michigan State UniversityEast Lansing

2010 (February 2009) / 480 pages ISBN: 9780073377872 ISBN: 9780071276177 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/bowersox3e

Supply Chain Logistics Management is exciting, and promises to bolster traditional logistics courses and invigorate supply chain management courses. By examining traditional logistics issues within the context of the supply chain, this text captures the current trends in Supply Chain Management and Supply Chain Strategy. Most textbooks approach this subject from a limited perspective, studying only internal functions of an organization to the exclusion of issues that relate to the entire supply chain in an integrated enterprise. Supply Chain Logistics Management provides a solid foundation that clearly describes the role of logistics within the supply chain, portraying a complete view of the subject and extending to show how all the pieces fit together. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON New and expanded coverage of integrative supply chain management practices An expanded treatment of collaborative practices in supply chain integration and expanded treatment of the challenges integrating management across the supply chain. A new chapter, Integrated Operations Planning (Chapter 6) has been added to provide additional coverage of supply chain planning; applications; sales and operations planning (S&OP); collaborative planning, forecasting, and replenishment (CPFR); and forecasting. Vast coverage of the most current technology in this industry such as Information Networks, Enterprise Resource Planning and Decision Support Systems. This assures that students are fully trained on the use of these technologies and better prepared to manage these systems upon entering the industry. CONTENTS PART ONE ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT Chapter 1 21st Century Supply Chains Chapter 2 Logistics Chapter 3 Customer Accommodation Chapter 4 Procurement and Manufacturing Chapter 5 Information Technology Chapter 6 Integrated Operations Planning PART TWO ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS OPERATIONS Chapter 7 Inventory Chapter 8 Transportation Infrastructure Chapter 9 Transportation Operations Chapter 10 Warehousing Chapter 11 Packaging and Materials Handling PART THREE ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS DESIGN Chapter 12 Global Supply Chains Chapter 13 Network Design Chapter 14 Network and Operational Planning PART FOUR ­ SUPPLY CHAIN LOGISTICS ADMINSTRATION Chapter 15 Relationship Development Chapter 16 Operational, Financial and Performance Measurement Chapter 17 Supply Chain Risk

75

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

New

International Edition

*9780073381459*

International Edition

MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND An Introduction to Operations Management, 2nd Edition

By Gerard Cachon and Christian Terwiesch of University of Pennsylvania 2009 (April 2008) / 504 pages ISBN: 9780073525167 ISBN: 9780071263313 [IE]

SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 8th Edition

By David N Burt, University of San Diego and Sheila Petcavage

www.mhhe.com/cachon_terwiesch2e

MATCHING SUPPLY WITH DEMAND by Cachon and Terwiesch is the most authoritative, cuttingedge book for operations management MBAs. The book demands rigorous analysis on the part of students without requiring consistent use of sophisticated mathematical modeling to perform it. When the use of quantitative tools or formal modeling is indicated, it is only to perform the necessary analysis needed to inform and support a practical business solution. CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2 The Process View of the Organization Chapter 3 Understanding the Supply Process: Evaluating Process Capacity Chapter 4 Estimating and Reducing Labor Costs Chapter 5 The Link between Operations and Finance Chapter 6 Batching and Other Flow Interruptions: Setup Times and the Economic Order Quantity Model Chapter 7 Variability and Its Impact on Process Performance: Waiting Time Problems Chapter 8 The Impact of Variability on Process Performance: Throughput Losses Chapter 9 Quality Management, Statistical Process Control, and Six Sigma Capacity Chapter 10 Lean Operations and the Toyota Production System Chapter 11 Betting On Uncertain Demand: The Newsvendor Model Chapter 12 MakeToOrder and Quick Response with Reactive Capacity Chapter 13 Service Levels and Lead Times in Supply Chains: The Order Upto Inventory Model Chapter 14 Risk Pooling Strategies to Reduce and Hedge Uncertainty Chapter 15 Revenue Management with Capacity Controls Chapter 16 Supply Chain Coordination Appendix A: Statistics Tutorial B: Tables C: Evaluation of the Loss Function D: Equations and Approximations E: Solutions to Selected Practice Problems Glossary References Index of "How to" exhibits Summary of key equations Index

2010 (January 2009) / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073381459 ISBN: 9780071263306 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/burt8e

Supply Management is a major revision of the classic text in the field of procurement. The Eighth Edition builds on the strengths of prior editions, while including state of the art coverage and enhancements to help prepare students for the globalized world of business they will enter. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON An introduction to the visionary concept of Value Network Management Emphasis on ethics and social responsibility

Expanded coverage of the critical supply management aspects of production and inventory control Focus on positive interrelationships in crossfunctional teams that span the boundaries of the firm A new graphic art presentation of all charts, figures and text

CONTENTS PART 1 The Foundation 1. The Progression to Professional Supply Management 2. Organizational Issues 3. Supply Management: An Organization Spanning Activity 4. A Portfolio of Relationships PART 2 The Requirements Process 5. New Product Development 6. Purchasing Descriptions and Specifications 7. Managing for Quality 8. The Procurement of Equipment 9. Purchasing Services PART 3 Sourcing: Sourcing Perception and Corporate Outsourcing 10. Outsourcing 11. Sourcing 12. Global Supply Management PART 4 Cost Management 13. Total Cost of Ownership 14. Price and Cost Analysis 15. Methods of Compensation 16. Negotiation PART 5 Managing Contracts and Relationships 17. Contract Formation and Legal Issues 18. Contract and Relationship Management 19. Ethics and Social Responsibilities PART 6 Materials Management 20. Production and Inventory Control 21. Demand Management and Logistics PART 7 Implementing Value Network Management 22. Implementing Value Network Management Name Index Subject Index

New

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT FOR RETAILING

By Ray 2009 (August 2009) ISBN: 9780070145047

*9780070145047*

McGraw-Hill India Title

(Details unavailable at press time)

76

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

SUPPLY CHAIN SCIENCE

By Wallace Hopp, University of MichiganAnn Arbor 2008 (October 2007) / 204 pages ISBN: 9780073403328 ISBN: 9780071284769 [IE] Chapter Five: Logistics Costs and TiedUp Capital Chapter Six: Environmental Aspects of Logistics Part Three: Logistics and Supply Chain Structures Chapter Seven: Products in the Logistics System Chapter Eight: Material Supply Structures Chapter Nine: Production Processes and Layouts Chapter Ten: Distribution Structures Part Four: Planning and Control of Logistics and Supply Chain Systems Chapter Eleven: Demand Management Chapter Twelve: Materials Management Chapter Thirteen: Manufacturing Planning and Control Chapter Fourteen: Transport Planning Chapter Fifteen: The Procurement Process Part Five: Supply Chain, IT and Improvement Aspects of Logistics Chapter Sixteen: Emerging Practices in Supply Chain Management Chapter Seventeen: Information Systems for Logistics and Supply Chain Management Appendices Appendix A: ABC Analysis Appendix B: Incremental Inventory Carrying Costs Appendix C: Derivation of the formula for economic order quantity (EOQ) Appendix D: Normal Distribution Function Appendix E: Service Loss Function Appendix F: Exercises: Solutions to Problems

http://highered.mcgrawhill.com/sites/0073403326/information_center_ view0/

Supply Chain Science describes the collection of people, resources, and activities involved in bringing materials and information together to produce and deliver goods and services to customers. Through illustrations and analogies to everyday life, the text presents the key concepts that underlie the behavior of operations systems in a largely nonmathematical way. The goal of SCS is to provide a concise framework for understanding how complex production and supply chain systems behave, and therefore enable managers/students to have a stronger basis for management decision making. The range of problems faced by managers dealing with supply chains is almost infinite, which is why a scientific approach is needed. Many published volumes provide detailed explanations on how to solve problems in supply chain management, but they can provide answers for only a limited set of situations. Hopp's Supply Chain Science explains why systems behave as they do, providing the tools and insights to deal effectively with almost any scenario. CONTENTS Part I: Station Science Chapter 1: Capacity Chapter 2: Variability Chapter 3: Batching Part II: Line Science Chapter 4: Flows Chapter 5: Buffering Chapter 6: Push/Pull Part III: Network Science Chapter 7: Inventory Chapter 8: Risk Chapter 9: Coordination Appendix A: Summary of Notion Appendix B: Supply Chain Science Principles

SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

By Rangarajan, IIM 2008 (September 2008) / 552 pages ISBN: 9780070221635

McGrawHill India Title www.mhhe.com/supplychain

This book is positioned to serve two audiences: the MBA and senior student in a business programme, and the professional working in industry who wishes to gain a deeper understanding of supply chain management and logistics especially in an Indian context. The book thus provides an overview of concepts as well as intensive material for analysis and training in the area that has come to be known as Supply Chain Management. The topics covered are far reaching in practical scope. A special feature of the book is the collection of detailed cases. All cases are situated in the Indian business environment, as it makes a transition from traditional business practices to new ones in an arena of global competition. This attempts to fill a stated gap in the academic and business literature in the area. The cases are all drawn from real organisations and many are presented with actual data and descriptions that provide a realistic picture of issues in supply chain management. CONTENTS 1. An Overview of Supply Chain Management 2. Understanding Supply Chain Dynamics 3. Designing the Supply Chain 4. Performance Measurement 5. SCM Effectiveness and Lean Thinking 6. SCM Across ORganisations: Upstream Interface 7. SCM Across Organisations: Downstream Interface 8. Transportation, Storage and Warehousing 9. role of Information Technology in SCM 10. Quantitative Tools for Supply Chain Management Case Studies: 1. Laxmi Transformers 2. Rajashree Cement ­ Engine on Load 3. Western Oil Ltd (A) 4. Farmaid Tractors Limited 5. SCM at Titan Industries Ltd. 6. CONCOR: Tea Transportation 7. Chilli in Soup (A)

LOGISTICS & SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT

By Jonsson 2008 (March 2008) / 544 pages ISBN: 9780077117382

McGrawHill UK Title www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textooks/jonsson

Logistics and Supply Chain Management is a comprehensive new text that explains the fundamentals of the subject so that the student understands the "game rules" goals and objectives when designing, planning and controlling efficient and effective logistics systems in supply chains. It also includes coverage of information technology, the impact of manufacturing and product structures on logistics and supply chain systems, and the environment. Designed specifically with the student in mind, this book is the perfect companion for introductory courses in logistics and supply chain management. CONTENTS Part One: The Logistics and Supply Chain Management Disciplines Chapter One: Introduction to Logistics and Supply Chain Management Chapter Two: The Logistics System Chapter Three: The Material Flow Part Two: Logistics and Supply Chain Goals and Performance Chapter Four: Customer Service

77

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

8. Bayer Corp Science: Science for a Better Supply Chain 9. Food World (B) 10. Seth Dhaniram ­ C&FA 11. Airfreight Ltd.

International Edition

PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS FOR SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT WITH STUDENT CDROM

By Scott Webster, Syracuse University 2008 (December 2006) / 352 pages ISBN: 9780072872682 ISBN: 9780071285889 [IE]

International Edition

DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE SUPPLY CHAIN 3rd Edition

By David SimchiLevi, Mass Institute of Tech, Sally Kaminsky, College of Staten Island and Edith SimchiLevi, Logic Tools Inc., 2008 (July 2007) / 528 pages ISBN: 9780073341521 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071270977 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/webster1e

Webster's Principles and Tools of Supply Chain Management provides a basic introduction to the concepts and tools of supply chain management and delivers an optimal balance of descriptive and analytical material. The book is divided into three parts: Foundation; Principles and Tools; and Synthesis. Part 1 introduces the basic concepts of supply chain management--concepts that are referred to and expanded upon in subsequent chapters; Part 2 focuses on the application of supply chain concepts within the context of particular supply chain activities (i.e., buy, make, moVe, store, or sell); Part 3, consisting of a single chapter, offers a macro perspective of supply chain management. It reconstructs and synthesizes earlier content while taking a "step back" to review and consider the entire system. A case study is included at the end of each chapter. Some of these cases focus on technology. Chapters that introduce analytical models begin with simple analyses and introduce added complexity and realism as the chapter progresses, thereby offering instructors flexibility with respect to the degree of analytical rigor that they are able to require of their students. CONTENTS Preface PART ONE FOUNDATION 1 Introduction: Operations and Supply Chain Management 2 Information Technology: ERP Systems, SCA Systems, and ECommerce 3 Supply Chain Foundations: System Slack and Related Concepts PART TWO PRINCIPLES AND TOOLS 4 Demand Management: Processing, Influencing, and Anticipating Demand 5 Supply Management: Trends, Technologies, and Tactics 6 Inventory Management I: Deterministic Analysis 7 Inventory Management II: Stochastic Analysis 8 Capacity Management: Analysis and Psychology 9 Production Management: Flow Control and Scheduling 10 Transportation Management: Elements and Insights Supplement A Diagnostic Analysis Illustration Supplement B International Transportation: Services and Legal Requirements 11 Quality Management: Tools for Process Improvement Supplement Creative Problem Solving: Strategies and Pitfalls PART THREE SYNTHESIS 12 Supply Chain Strategy: Frameworks and Synthesis Appendix 1 Principles of Nature: Insights into Human and System Behavior Appendix 2 Linchpin of ECommerce: Basics of Encryption and Digital Signatures Appendix 3 Summary of Notation and Formulas Appendix 4 Standard Normal Probability and Unit Normal Loss Table References / Index

http://www.mhhe.com/simchilevi3e

As the most uptodate, cuttingedge supply chain management book on the market, the Third Edition of Designing and Managing the Supply Chain discusses the problems, models and concepts derived from issues related to effective supply chain management. While many core supply chain management issues are interrelated, the authors have tried to make each chapter as selfcontained as possible so that the reader can refer directly to chapters covering topics of interest. Each chapter utilizes case studies and numerous examples. Mathematical and technical sections can be skipped without loss of continuity. Most textbooks do not include models and decision support systems robust enough for industry, but that is not true of this new edition. The accompanying CDROM also features the return of two simulations, the Computerized Beer Game and the Risk Pool Game and a computerized tool. These simulations help users develop and execute supply chain contracts while also illustrating many of the concepts discussed in the text. CONTENTS Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 2: Inventory Management and Risk Pooling Chapter 3: Network planning Chapter 4: Supply contracts Chapter 5: The Value of information Chapter 6: Supply Chain integration Chapter 7: Distribution strategies Chapter 8: Strategic alliances Chapter 9: Procurement and Outsourcing Strategies Chapter 10: Global Logistics and Risk Management Chapter 11: Coordinated product and supply chain design Chapter 12: Customer Value Chapter 13: Smart Pricing Chapter 14: Information Technology and Business Processes Chapter 15: Technology standards Appendix A: Computerized Beer Game Appendix B: Risk Pool Game Appendix C: Supply Contract Spreadsheet Appendix D: Bidding Game

78

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

International Edition

PURCHASING AND SUPPLY MANAGEMENT 13th Edition

By Michael Leenders and P Fraser Johnson of University of Western Ontario, Anna Flynn, Vice president of Institute of Supply Management and Harold E Fearon, Center for Advanced Purchasing Studies, Emeritus 2006 / 588 pages ISBN: 9780072873795 ISBN: 9780071249669 [IE] Appendix 8: Demonstration of See5 Decision Tree Analysis Chapter 9: Linear ProgrammingBased Methods Chapter 9 Appendix: Data Mining Linear Programming Formulations Part III: BUSINESS APPLICATIONS Chapter 10: Business Data Mining Applications Applications Chapter 11: MarketBasket Analysis Chapter 11 Appendix: MarketBasket Procedure Part IV: DEVELOPING ISSUES Chapter 12: Text and Web Mining Chapter 12 Appendix: Semantic Text Analysis Chapter 13: Ethical Aspects of Data Mining

http://www.mhhe.com/leenders13e

CONTENTS Chapter 1 ­ Purchasing and Supply Management Chapter 2 ­ Supply Organization Chapter 3 ­ Supply Processes Chapter 4 ­ Information Systems and Technology Chapter 5 ­ Quality, Specification and Service Chapter 6 ­ Quantity and Inventory Chapter 7 ­ Transportation and Delivery Chapter 8 ­ Price Chapter 9 ­ Cost Management, Discounts, and Negotiation Chapter 10 ­ Supplier Selection Chapter 11 ­ Investment Recovery Chapter12 ­ Supply Law and Ethics Chapter 13 ­ Research and Metrics Chapter 14 ­ Global Supply Chapter 15 ­ Public Supply Management Chapter 16 ­ Capital Goods Chapter 17 ­ Services Chapter 18 ­ Make or Buy, Insourcing, and Outsourcing Chapter 19 ­ Supplier Relations Chapter 20 ­ Strategy in Purchasing and Supply Management CASE INDEX SUBJECT INDEX

Operation Research

New

*9780077298340*

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH 9th Edition

By Frederick S Hillier, Stanford University

Data Mining

2010 (February 2009) / 1088 pages ISBN: 9780077298340 (with Student Access Card) ISBN: 9780071267670 [IE]

www.mhhe.com/hillier

For over four decades, Introduction to Operations Research by Frederick Hillier has been the classic text on operations research. While building on the classic strengths of the text, the author continues to find new ways to make the text current and relevant to students. One way is by incorporating a wealth of stateoftheart, userfriendly software and more coverage of business applications than ever before. The hallmark features of this edition include clear and comprehensive coverage of fundamentals, an extensive set of interesting problems and cases, and stateofthepractice operations research software used in conjunction with examples from the text. NEw TO ThiS EdiTiON Careful updates have been made to the material and references throughout the book to reflect the current state of the art. Application vignettes have been added that describe dramatic success stories regarding real applications of operations research to excite students about the relevance of the techniques they are learning. The complete articles describing these real applications of operations research also are provided on the website for further reading. Added many other references of articles describing other award winning applications of operations research, and some of these articles also are provided on the website. New problems have been added that involve reading and commenting on one of the provided articles that describe a dramatic application of operations research.

International Edition

INTRODUCTION TO BUSINESS DATA MINING

By David Olson and Yong Shi of University of NebraskaOmaha 2007 (November 2005) / 288 pages ISBN: 9780072959710 ISBN: 9780071244701 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/olson1e

CONTENTS Part I: INTRODUCTION Chapter 1: Initial Description of Data Mining in Business Chapter 2: Data Mining Processes and Knowledge Discovery Chapter 3: Database Support to Data Mining Part II: DATA MINING METHODS AS TOOLS Chapter 4: Overview of Data Mining Techniques Chapter 4 Appendix: Enterprise Miner Demonstration on Expenditure Data Set Chapter 5: Cluster Analysis Chapter 5 Appendix: Clementine Chapter 6: Regression Algorithms in Data Mining Chapter 7: Neural Networks in Data Mining Chapter 8: Decision Tree Algorithms

79

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

A new section has been added on the important emerging topic of revenue management. The chapter on the theory of the simplex method has been reorganized. Further clarified the presentation in numerous spots throughout the book. The Excel® addins have been updated for Excel® 2007.

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH 2nd Edition

By Richard Bronson, Fairleigh Dickinson College and Goovindasami Naadimuthu of Fairleigh Dickinson University 1998 / 456 pages ISBN: 9780070080201

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Tackling the broad range of allocation problems that actually confront engineers, programmers and analysts in today's business and industrial worlds, this book takes readers stepbystep through all the mathematical programming techniquesincluding the trailblazing Karmarkar algorithmneeded to excel in any operations research course. It's easy to see why the first edition of this invaluable study guide sole more than 35,000 copies! It cuts down study time while it builds essential skills.

All companion software available on the website has been updated to the most current version. To purchase an electronic version of this title, visit www.CourseSmart.com (ISBN 9780077279332), or www.VitalSource.com (ISBN 9780077322892). CONTENTS 1 Introduction 2 Overview of the Operations Research Modeling Approach 3 Introduction to Linear Programming 4 Solving Linear Programming Problems: The Simplex Method 5 The Theory of the Simplex Method 6 Duality Theory and Sensitivity Analysis 7 Other Algorithms for Linear Programming 8 The Transportation and Assignment Problems 9 Network Optimization Models 10 Dynamic Programming 11 Integer Programming 12 Nonlinear Programming 13 Metaheuristics 14 Game Theory 15 Decision Analysis 16 Markov Chains 17 Queueing Theory 18 Inventory Theory 19 Markov Decision Processes 20 Simulation Appendix 1 Documentation for the OR Courseware Appendix 2 Convexity Appendix 3 Classical Optimization Methods Appendix 4 Matrices and Matrix Operations Appendix 5 Table for a Normal Distribution Supplements on the Online Learning Center Additional Cases Supplement to Appendix 3.1 More about LINGO Supplement to Chapter 7 Linear Goal Programming and Its Solution Procedures Supplement to Chapter 8 A Case Study with Many Transportation Problems Supplement 1 to Chapter 18 Derivation of the Optimal Policy for the Stochastic SinglePeriod Model for Perishable Products Supplement 2 to Chapter 18 Stochastic PeriodicReview Models Supplement 1 to Chapter 20 VarianceReducing Techniques Supplement 2 to Chapter 20 Regenerative Method of Statistical Analysis 21 The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets 22 Project Management with PERT/CPM 23 Additional Special Types of Linear Programming Problems 24 Probability Theory 25 Reliability 26 The Application of Queueing Theory 27 Forecasting 28 Examples of Performing Simulations on Spreadsheets with Crystal Ball Appendix 6 Simultaneous Linear Equations

Professional References

FLYING HIGH IN A COMPETITIVE INDUSTRY Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines 2nd Edition

By Loizos Heracleous, Nitin Pangarkar and Jochen Wirtz 2009 (December 2008) / 290 pages ISBN: 9780071281966

An Asian Publication A Professional Reference Title

Singapore Airlines (SIA) is widely acknowledged as one of the world's leading airlines, if not the best airline, globally. This book provides insights into a simple but intriguing question: How has SIA managed to outperform other flagcarriers for decades in an industry where it is notoriously difficult to succeed consistently? This updated second edition of Flying High in a Competitive Industry begins with an analysis of the airline industry and its key trends, moving on to a broad outline of SIA's strategic drivers of success. Empirical research was conducted at SIA to gain a deeper understanding of its strategy, core competencies and internal organisation, innovation processes and human resource practices, in order to instill strategy lessons that can inform the strategies of any organisation competing in intensely competitive industries. This book ends with some strategic lessons that apply to any organisation that aims to achieve sustainable success in hypercompetitive markets. CONTENTS Preface Chapter 1 The Airline Industry: Economics and Strategic Trends Chapter 2 Airline Industry Structure: Disastrous Performance and the Route to Success Chapter 3 Key Drivers of SIA's Performance: A Strategic Choice and Resource Deployment Perspective Chapter 4 Achieving CostEffective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines Chapter 5 Innovation as a Key to Sustained Service Excellence Chapter 6 Managing People Effectively to Deliver Sustained Service Excellence Chapter 7 How to Win in CutThroat Industries I: Achieving Strategic Alignment Chapter 8 How to Win in CutThroat Industries II: Strategy, Competencies, Innovation and Culture

80

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Case Study: Strategy and Organisation at Singapore AirlinesCreating a Global Champion

THE SUPPLY-BASED ADVANTAGE

By Stephen Rogers 2009 (March 2009) / 352 pages ISBN: 9780814401552

A Professional Reference Title

TOYOTA'S SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT A Strategic Approach to Toyota's Renowned System

By Ananth Iyer, Sridhar Seshadri and Roy Vasher 2009 (May 2009) / 240 pages ISBN: 9780071615495

A Professional Reference Title

The Toyota Production System is the benchmark used throughout the world for lean thinking. Now you can model your own processes after those of the company that wrote the book on supply chain management. Written by two experts on the subject, along with a former Toyota senior executive, this book details the most celebrated supply chain operation in the world to help you form an integrated, synchronized system that will be the envy of your industry. You will find key insight into the logic behind every point of Toyota's supply chain, along with both the tactics and strategies you can use to build an outstanding system of your own. Toyota Supply Chain Management explains how to achieve balance and efficiency by focusing on: · · · · Variety: Determine your variety of offerings based on operational efficiency and market demand Velocity: Maintain a steady flow through all processes of the supply chain Variability: Manage inconsistencies carefully to reduce cost and improve quality Visibility: Ensure the transparency of all processes to enable continuous learning and improvement

It's not enough for companies to simply try to find ways to save money through suppliers. If suppliers aren't fully integrated into their corporate strategy, there's no way for companies to ensure that they will continue to save money...and that their supply decisions will fit with changing organizational goals. Blending theory, best practices, and relevant examples, The Supply-Based Advantage reveals how to design, build, maintain, and "remodel" an organization's supply base to support its total business strategy and operations. Filled with enlightening examples from companies including Mars, Procter & Gamble, Intel, and Wal-Mart, this book shows how any organization can transform their supply function into a key driver of profit.

MANAGEMENT LESSONS FROM MAYO CLINIC Inside One of the World's Most Admired Service Organizations

By Leonard L Berry, Texas A&M University and Kent D Seltman 2008 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780071590730

A Professional Reference Title

Management Lessons from Mayo Clinic reveals for the first time how this complex service organization fosters a culture that exceeds customer expectations and earns deep loyalty from both customers and employees. Service business authority Leonard Berry and Mayo Clinic marketing administrator Kent Seltman explain how the Clinic implements and maintains its strategy, adheres to its management system, executes its care model, and embraces new knowledge invaluable lessons for managers and service providers of all industries. Drs. Berry and Seltman had the rare opportunity to study Mayo Clinic's service culture and systems from the inside by conducting personal interviews with leaders, clinicians, staff, and patients, as well as observing hundreds of clinicianpatient interactions. The result is a book about how the Clinic's business concept produces stellar clinical results, organizational efficiency, and interpersonal service. By examining the operating principles that guide every management decision at this legendary healthcare institution, the authors Demonstrate how a great service brand evolves from the core values that nourish and protect it Extrapolate instructive business lessons that apply outside healthcare Illustrate the benefits of pooling talent and encouraging teamwork

The authors provide valuable insider tips and offer hands-on guidance for improvingproduction and operations in a variety of industries, including health care, insurance, banking, credit processing, and retailing. With careful attention paid to every aspect of the subject from principles and theories to operations and best practices Toyota Supply Chain Management is the most comprehensive, insightful guide to forging a world-class supply chain system. CONTENTS Ch1. The BullWhip Effect Ch 2. Supply Chain Overview Ch 3. Mix planning Ch 4. Sales Planning and Forecasting Ch 5. Production scheduling Ch 6. Parts ordering and forecasting Ch 7. Inbound logistics Ch 8. Suppliers Ch 9. Production operations Ch 10. Outbound Logistics Ch 11. Dealers Ch 12. The Toyota Way in review Ch 13. How to apply Toyota Way principles to non-automotive supply chains

Relate historical events and perspectives to the presentday Mayo Clinic Share inspiring stories from staff and patients

An innovative analysis of this exemplary institution, Management Lessons from Mayo Clinic presents a proven prescription for creating sustainable service excellence in any organization.

81

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

MAKE OR BREAK How Manufacturers Can Leap from Decline to Revitalization

By Kaj Grichnik and Conrad Winkler of Booz Allen Hamilton 2008 (March 2008) / 192 pages ISBN: 9780071508308 Part 2: Tools and Techniques Chapter 11: A Review of the Standard Tools Chapter 12: The need for systems thinking in project management Chapter 13: Understanding Systems thinking Chapter 14: HT Apply systems thinking in managing projects Chapter 15: Managing project Risks Chapter 16: Improving decisions in projects Part 3: Planning Chapter 17: Developing a Shared Understanding of a Project Chapter 18: Identifying Customer Requirements Chapter 19: Managing resources in project Scheduling Chapter 20: Scheduling Uncertainty in projects Part 4: Control Chapter 21: Tracking progress to Achieve project Control Chapter 22: Accounting and Cost control Chapter 23: Change control in project Chapter 24: Managing vendors in projects Chapter 25: Conducting project reviews Chapter 26: managing quality projects Part 5: Optimizing Project performance Chapter 27: Improving project management processes Chapter 28: Improving Estimating capability Chapter 29: Managing Innovation in projeects

A Professional Reference Title

In a world of emerging markets, changing work forces, and accelerating innovation, manufacturing is once again a key corporate issue. Manufacturing expertise is a strategic competitive advantage, distinguishing winning companies (like Procter & Gamble, Lego, Toyota, Zara, and Tata) from those that have let their capabilities languish. It may not be easy to take back control of production, target sources for scarce (and environmentally sustainable) materials, and cultivate a motivated, talented labor force. But there are ways to do it; and successful companies will need to learn how. The thought leaders at Booz & Company and strategy+business magazine have collaborated to create an uptotheminute exploration of a new era in manufacturing and the requisite strategies for success. Chock full of profiles of the best manufacturing innovations in every business sector from pharmaceuticals to autos to consumer products, and revealing the most effective manufacturing innovations and strategies, Make or Break introduces you to the forces reshaping the industry. The secrets are in this book, including how to meet such interrelated challenges as: Labor relationships and modernization Material shortages Career development of your workforce Expansion of variety Competition on a global scale Complexity solution Environmental issues Integration of resilience into your strategy

SUPPLY CHAIN COST MANAGEMENT

By Jimmy Anklesaria 2007 (November 2007) / 256 pages ISBN: 9780814474754

A Professional Reference Title

For most supply chains, cost reduction is imperative to longterm survival. Yet identifying the costs that can be eliminated--and then doing so effectively-- can prove impossible without the right method. This book introduces the same process the author has used to save companies like IBM, Kodak, and DuPont billions of dollars, simply by harnessing the knowledge of suppliers. Using reallife case studies and examples. The book gives readers everything they need to implement this powerful system, and bring genuine and permanent savings to their company.

Based on leadingedge research, Make or Break is a book for leaders of the manufacturing function, but it is also for any corporate executive who wants to lead his or her industryand for students and researchers seeking to understand why making products will, once again, be seen as the most vital skill set for a vibrant economy.

MASTERING PROJECT MANAGEMENT Applying Advanced Concepts to Systems Thinking, Control & Evaluation, Resource Allocation, 2nd Edition

By James Lewis, The Lewis Institute Inc 2008 (August 2007) / 464 pages ISBN: 9780071462914

International Edition

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 5th Edition

By David Cleland, University of Pittsburgh and Lewis Ireland, President of the American Society 2007 (August 2006) / 688 pages ISBN: 9780071471602 ISBN: 9780071262378 [IE]

A Professional Reference Title

Written by one of the world's most recognized authorities on project management, the field's gold standard reference for nearly a decade has been revised to include more than 35% new or updated material. CONTENTS Part 1: what it's all about Chapter 1: So you want to master project management Chapter 2: The job of managing Chapter 3: Integrating leadership and management Chapter 4: Leading to Learn and Learning to Lead.....Dr. Tom Boldrey Chapter 5: Whole brain project management Chapter 6: HT Achieve High performance Project management Chapter 7: Power and Politics for Project management Chapter 8: Dealing with cultural differences Chapter 9: Defining Success and Failure Chapter 10: Organizing for project management

A Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS PREFACE / ACKNOWLEDGMENTS / INTRODUCTION Part 1: Introduction Chapter 1: The Evolution of Project Management Chapter 2: Why Project Management? Chapter 3: The Project Management Process Part 2: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 4: When to Use Project Management Chapter 5: The Strategic Context of Projects Chapter 6: The Board of Directors and Major Projects Chapter 7: Project Stakeholder Management Chapter 8: Strategic Issues in Project Management Part 3: Organizational Design for Project Management Chapter 9: Organizing for Project Management Chapter 10: Project Portfolio Management

82

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

Chapter 11: Project Authority Chapter 12: Project Management Maturity Part 4: Project Operations Chapter 13: Project Planning Chapter 14: Project Management Information System Chapter 15: Project Monitoring. Evaluation, and Control Chapter 16: The Project Earned Value Management System Chapter 17: Project Termination Part 5: Interpersonal Dynamics in the Management of Projects Chapter 18: Project Leadership Chapter 19: Project Communications Chapter 20: Successful Project Teams Part 6: The Cultural Elements Chapter 21: Continuous Improvement Through Projects Chapter 22: Cultural Considerations in Project Management Part 7: New Prospects Chapter 23: Alternative Project Teams INDEX

International Edition

WORLDCLASS WAREHOUSING AND MATERIAL HANDLING

By Edward Frazelle, The Logistics Institute at Georgia Tech 2002 / 280 pages ISBN: 9780071376006 ISBN: 9780071226868 [IE]

A Professional Reference Title

Warehousing continues to play a critical role in assuring high levels of customer service and overall logistics performance. Efficient warehousing can minimize the effects of supply chain inefficiencies; can improve logistics accuracy and inventory management; and can allow for product accumulation, consolidation, and customization. The cost of warehousing should be commensurate with the contribution of warehousing to overall logistics performance--typically between 2% and 5% of corporate revenue. In worldclass warehousing these costs are minimized while also improving customer service. The principles and systems described in this book are common denominators of worldclass warehousing. The principles have been developed over a decade of logistics research, education and consulting project experience. WorldClass Warehousing and Material Handling can be used to develop a warehouse master plan to support the corporation's overall logistics strategy.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 24 Steps to Help You Master Any Project

By Gary Heerkens, Management Solutions Group 2007 (June 2007) / 128 pages ISBN: 9780071486521 (Hardcover) ISBN: 9780071450874 (Softcover)

A Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS 1. Planning and executing strategy 2. Manage strategically 3. Follow the logic 4. Assess your readiness 5. Plan to plan 6. Define your business 7. Assess your situation 8. Understand your model 9. Know your market 10. Assess the terrain 11. Understand opportunities and threats 12. Set feasible goals 13. Strategize for goals 14. Set priorities 15. Pursue your purpose 16. Follow your mission 17. write the business plan 18. Write the annual plan 19. Get the right people 20. Obtain commitment 21. Align with strategy 22. Work across functions 23. Execute with discipline 24. Monitor and improve 25. Learn, change, institutionalize

International Edition

JURAN'S QUALITY CONTROL HANDBOOK 5th Edition

By Joseph Juran and A. Godfrey 1999 / 1872 pages ISBN: 9780070340039 ISBN: 9780071165396 [IE]

A Professional Reference Title

(International Edition is not for sale in Japan) CONTENTS Part I: Managerial. Part II: Functional. Part III: Industries. Part IV: International. Part V: Statistical.

83

OPERATIONS/DECISION SCIENCES

84

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Business Forecasting .........................................................................................96 Business Research Method................................................................................96 Business Statistics - Supplements .....................................................................94 Business Statistics - Textbook ............................................................................87 Linear Statistics / Regression .............................................................................97 Others .................................................................................................................98

85

NEW TITLES

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2011

Business Statistics in Practice, 6e Applied Statistics in Business and Economics, 3e Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 7e

Author

Bowerman Doane Lind

ISBN

9780073401836 9780073373690 9780077384470

Page

87 87 87

BUSINESS STATISTICS

2010

Essentials of Business Statistics, 3e Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e Basic Statistics using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance [UK] Business Statistics and Operations Research, 2e [India]

Author

Bowerman Doane Lind

ISBN

9780077323134 9780073373652 9780077270018

Page

87 88 94

Lind Nieuwenhuis Rajagopalan

9780073401768 9780077109875 9780070085206

89 92 94

86

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Business Statistics - Textbook

New

*9780077384470*

International Edition

New

*9780073401836*

International Edition

BUSINESS STATISTICS IN PRACTICE 6th Edition

By Bruce L Bowerman and Richard T O'Connell of Miami University of Oh-Oxford

BASIC STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 7th Edition

By Douglas A Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William Marcal, University of Toledo and Samuel Walthen, Coastal Carolina University 2011 (January 2010) ISBN: 9780077384470 ISBN: 9780071220996 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/lindbasic7e

(Details unavailable at press time)

2011 (January 2010) / 896 pages ISBN: 9780073401836 ISBN: 9780071220651 [IE]

New

*9780077323134*

International Edition

ESSENTIALS OF BUSINESS STATISTICS 3rd Edition

By Bruce Bowerman and Richard O'Connell of Miami University of Oh-Oxford, Burdeane Orris, Butler University

http://www.mhhe.com/bowerman6e

(Details unavailable at press time)

New

*9780073373690*

International Edition

APPLIED STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 3rd Edition

By David Doane, Oakland University and Lori Seward, Leeds College of Business

2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 9780077323134 ISBN: 9780071220262 [IE]

www.mhhe.com/bowermaness3e

In Essentials of Business Statistics, Third Edition, we provide a modern, practical, and unique framework for teaching the first course in business statistics. This framework features case study and example driven discussions of all basic business statistics topics. In addition, we have endeavored to make this book the most clearly written, motivating, and easy-to-use business statistics text available. We have rewritten many of the discussions in this third edition and taken great pains to explain concepts simply from first principles. Therefore, the only prerequisite for this book is high school algebra. NEW TO THIS EDITION A shorter and simpler introduction to business processes and an expanded treatment of data acquisition and sampling (in Chapter 1). Two chapters on descriptive statistics.

2011 (January 2010) / 864 pages ISBN: 9780073373690 ISBN: 9780071220705 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/doane3e

(Details unavailable at press time)

Use of the cumulative normal table in the discussion of the normal distribution in Chapter 6 and throughout the rest of the book. A clearer and more motivating discussion of sampling distributions in Chapter 7. A clearer and more motivating introduction to confidence intervals in Chapter 8. A simpler and streamlined discussion of hypothesis testing in Chapter 9. Clearer and simpler chapters on regression analysis.

Increased coverage of Excel, Minitab, and MegaStat (an Excel add-in package included on the text's CD-ROM).

87

BUSINESS STATISTICS

CONTENTS Chapter 1 An Introduction to Business Statistics Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics: Tabular and Graphical Methods Chapter 3 Descriptive Statistics: Numerical Methods Chapter 4 Probability Chapter 5 Discrete Random Variables Chapter 6 Continuous Random Variables Chapter 7 Sampling Distributions Chapter 8 Confidence Intervals Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Chapter 10 Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples Chapter 11 Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance Chapter 12 Chi-Square Tests Chapter 13 Simple Linear Regression Analysis Chapter 14 Multiple Regression and Model Building Chapter 15 (On Website) Process Improvement Using Control Charts · · · · · · · · · · Instructor Resources Excel Links Tegrity Connect Business Statistics / Connect Plus Better non-technical motivation of chapter topics. Improved transitions between concepts within chapters. More and updated mini cases on topics that will interest students. Revisions to graphic illustrations and tables in order to provide a better "picture" of the concept for students. More large real data sets for student assignment projects, included on Student CD. New exercises and examples using real data from Noodles & Company, a rapidly growing casual dining chain whose success is based on a customer-driven business model and decision making using statistical analysis. Updated examples and updated data sets used in exercises. Enlarged and improved test bank for instructors. Added section exercises for review before exams, with complete solutions (Appendix H). Available as a CourseSmart eBook at 55% of the cost of the print textbook. Updated with Excel 2007 as well as Excel 2003.

· · · · ·

New

*9780073373652*

International Edition

ESSENTIALS STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 2nd Edition

By David P Doane, Oakland University and Lori E Seward, University of Colorado-Denver

FEaTurES Essential Statistics in Business and Economics covers all the basic topics in the standard Business Statistics course, both undergraduate and MBA, using real and realistic data sets and modern technology. Visual Statistics, Learning Stats, and MegaStat are integrated within the text and included in the package. Examples, minicases, exercises are almost completely from published research or real applications. Two key example data sets are health care management data and Midwest bank collection data on Automated teller machines. Exercises are included both at the ends of sections and at the ends of chapters. The exercises often include `encouragement' of experimentation and alternative analysis. The text integrates many real world data sets, including large sets featuring health care management and banking/financial data. The treatment of confidence intervals and inference emphasizes proportions because they are more important in business applications. The text also thoroughly integrates p-value interpretations of all tests. Hypothesis Testing chapters and all examples are presented following a consistent five step format. Excel Focused Approach

2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 9780073373652 ISBN: 9780077312367 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071104333 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/doaneess2e

Applied Statistics in Business & Economics, 2e provides a comprehensive introduction to statistics concepts and applications in business and economics. The text and student CD provide state of the art integration of technology in order to focus on the important practical concepts and applications as opposed to mechanics. NEW TO THIS EDITION McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Business Statistics

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Business Statistics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Business Statistics, Connect Plus Business Statistics provides all of the Connect Business Statistics features plus the following: An integrated eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the textbook. Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. And, Connect Plus is now available with a new book at no additional charge! Connect Features available with this title: · · · · End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank Algorithmically Generated Test Bank

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

88

BUSINESS STATISTICS

New

*9780073401768*

International Edition

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 14th Edition

· · · · · · · ·

By Douglas A Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William G Marchal, University of Toledo and Samuel A Wathen, Coastal Carolina University 2010 (January 2009) / 874 pages ISBN: 9780073401768 ISBN: 9780077309428 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071100045 [IE]

· · · FEaTurES

http://www.mhhe.com/lind14e

Lind/14e is a perennial market best seller due to its comprehensive coverage of statistical concepts and methods delivered in a student friendly, step-by-step format. The text presents concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduction. Self reviews and exercises for each section, and review sections for groups of chapters also support the student learning steps. Modern computing applications (Excel, Minitab, and MegaStat for Excel) are introduced, and the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics concepts as applied to business. The fourteenth edition continues as a `students' text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results. NEW TO THIS EDITION McGraw-Hill Connect Plus Business Statistics

There are many new photos throughout with updated exercises in the chapter openers. Much of the relevant data and statistics within the text and exercises have been updated. User friendly Student CD includes MegaStat for Excel 2007, Visual Statistics, data sets, data files, and chapter 20. Available as a CourseSmart eBook at 55% of the cost of the print textbook. The ANOVA chapter has been expanded to include interaction. Revised and expanded exercises are included in all chapters. Additional detail in the software sections has been added where appropriate. Straightforward ­step-by-step presentation, supported by solved examples, self reviews, exercises and review sections-all combine to provide students a flexible dynamic learning tool. Excel, MegaStat, and Minitab are integrated throughout the text, in enough detail to support students New exercises and examples using Excel 2007 screenshots and the latest version of MINITAB. The size and clarity of the screenshots has been increased. There are new Excel 2007 software commands and updated MINITAB commands at the ends of chapters.

The division between the z and t distributions is handled differently in Chapter 9. The rule based on sample sizes (n greater than 30) to distinguish when to use either z or t is replaced by the more exact rule of using the z distribution when the standard deviation is known and the t distribution when it is unknown. Modified and reorganized Chapters 1 through 4 to set apart more clearly the procedures for each level of measurement The multiple regression treatment in Chapter 14 also includes an investigation of the theory behind the linear model along with tests for the violation of each assumption. Larger data sets, with the files included on CD, and exercises aimed at using technology resources make this a practical and modern text. Realistic and relevant applications, optional computer and web-based exercises, and the wealth of resources on the Student CD provide Business students with a motivating, applied, learning experience. Color photos and design and hundreds of graphic illustrations provide attractive and unintimidating presentation for beginning undergraduate students.

McGraw-Hill reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student with Connect Plus Business Statistics. A seamless integration of an eBook and Connect Business Statistics, Connect Plus Business Statistics provides all of the Connect Business Statistics features plus the following: Dynamic links between the problems or questions you assign to your students and the location in the eBook where that problem or question is covered. A powerful search function to pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap. And, Connect Plus is now available with a new book at no additional charge! Connect Features available with this title: · · · · · · · · · End-of-Chapter Content Algorithmically Generated End-of-Chapter Problems Test Bank Algorithmically Generated Test Bank Instructor Resources Pre-Built Assignments Excel Links Tegrity Added a Practice Test at the end of each Section Review. This will give students an idea of what might appear on a test and how the test might be structured. Hopefully, this will reduce test anxiety. The test includes a section on vocabulary and a section of problems. The authors have revised or replaced outdated exercises within the chapters, at the ends of chapters, and in the Review Section. You can still find and assign your favorites that have worked well, or you can introduce fresh examples. There is new content on nominal-level data and its properties in Chapter 1.

·

·

89

BUSINESS STATISTICS

International Edition

COMPLETE BUSINESS STATISTICS 7th Edition

By Amir Aczel, Boston University and Jayavel Sounderpandian 2009 (February 2008) / 864 pages ISBN: 9780077239695 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071270427 [IE with Student CD] Chapter 8 Confidence Intervals Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Chapter 10 Statistical Inferences Based on Two Samples Chapter 11 Experimental Design and Analysis of Variance Chapter 12 Chi-Square Tests Chapter 13 Simple Linear Regression Analysis Chapter 14 Multiple Regression Chapter 15 Model Building and Model Diagnostics Chapter 16 Times Series Forecasting Chapter 17 Process Improvement Using Control Charts Chapter 18 Nonparametric Methods Chapter 19 Simple Linear Regression Analysis Appendix A: Statistical Tables Appendix B: Counting Rules Appendix C: The Hypergeometric Distribution Appendix D: Properties of the Mean and the Variance of a Random Variable, and the Covariance Appendix E: Derivations of the Mean and Variance of x and p References

www.mhhe.com/aczel7e

Statistical integrity with a complete Excel solution. The seventh edition retains its global emphasis, maintaining its position of being at the vanguard of international issues in business. CONTENTS 1 Introduction and Descriptive Statistics 2 Probability 3 Random Variables 4 The Normal Distribution 5 Sampling and Sampling Distributions 6 Confidence Intervals 7 Hypothesis Testing 8 The Comparison of Two Populations 9 Analysis of Variance 10 Simple Linear Regression and Correlation 11 Multiple Regression 12 Time Series, Forecasting, and Index Numbers 13 Quality Control and Improvement 14 Nonparametric Methods and Chi-Square Tests 15 Bayesian Statistics and Decision Analysis Appendices A: References B: Answers to Most Odd-Numbered Problems C: Statistical Tables On the CD 16. Sampling Methods 17. Multivariate Analysis Working With Templates Introduction to Excel Basics

International Edition

APPLIED STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS WITH STUDENT CD 2nd Edition

By David Doane, Oakland University and Lori E Seward, Leeds College of Business 2009 (January 2008) ISBN: 9780077214845 ISBN: 9780071283731 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/doane2e

Applied Statistics in Business & Economics 2e provides a comprehensive introduction to Statistics concepts and applications in business and economics. The text and Student CD provide state of the art integration of technology in order to focus on the important practical concepts and applications as opposed to mechanics. CONTENTS Chapter One Overview of Statistics Chapter Two Data Collection Chapter Three Describing Data Visually Chapter Four Descriptive Statistics Chapter Five Probability Chapter Six Discrete Probability Distributions Chapter Seven Continuous Distributions Chapter Eight Sampling Distributions and Estimation Chapter Nine One Sample Hypothesis Tests Chapter Ten Two Sample Hypothesis Tests Chapter Eleven Analysis of Variance Chapter Twelve Bivariate Regression Chapter Thirteen Multiple Regression Chapter Fourteen Time Series Analysis Chapter Fifteen Chi-Square Tests Chapter Sixteen Nonparametric Tests Chapter Seventeen Quality Management On CD: Chapter Eighteen Simulation

International Edition

BUSINESS STATISTICS IN PRACTICE 5th Edition

By Bruce L Bowerman and Richard T O'Connell of Miami University of OH-Oxford 2009 (February 2008) / 896 pages ISBN: 9780077242534 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071270328 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/bowerman5e

The new edition of Business Statistics in Practice provides a modern, practical, and unique framework for teaching the first course in business statistics. This framework features case study and exampledriven discussions of all basic business statistics topics. In addition, the authors have rewritten many of the discussions in this edition and have explained concepts more simply from first principles. The only prerequisite for this text is high school algebra. CONTENTS Chapter 1 An Introduction to Business Statistics Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics: Tabular and Graphical Methods Chapter 3 Descriptive Statistics: Numerical Methods Chapter 4 Probability Chapter 5 Discrete Random Variables Chapter 6 Continuous Random Variables Chapter 7 Sampling Distributions

90

BUSINESS STATISTICS

International Edition

ESSENTIAL STATISTICS IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS

By David Doane, Oakland University and Lori Seward, Leeds College of Business, University of Colorado at Boulder 2008 (February 2007) ISBN: 9780073346939 (with Student CDROM) ISBN: 9780073346915 (Instructor's Edition with Student CDROM t/a Text) ISBN: 9780071286695 [IE with CD] 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regression and Correlation Analysis 15 Chi-Square Applications MegaStat for Excel Visual Statistics Appendixes, Tables, Data Sets, Solutions Photo Credits Index

http://www.mhhe.com/doaneess1e

This 1st Edition Essentials text offers an Excel focused approach to using statistics in business. All statistical concepts are illustrated with applied examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, and the text maintains a strong focus on presenting statistical concepts as applied in business--as opposed to providing programming methods used to find a mathematical solution. Interpretation of results is heavily emphasized, enabling students to take full advantage of Excel to develop and drive problem-solving skills. CONTENTS Chapter One: Overview of Statistics Chapter Two: Data Collection Chapter Three: Describing Data Visually Chapter Four: Descriptive Statistics Chapter Five: Probability Chapter Six: Discrete Distributions Chapter Seven: Continuous Distributions Chapter Eight: Sampling Distributions and Estimation Chapter Nine: Hypothesis Testing: One Sample Chapter Ten: Hypothesis Testing: Two Sample Tests Chapter Eleven: Analysis of Variance Chapter Twelve: Bivariate Regression Chapter Thirteen: Multiple Regression Chapter Fourteen: Chi-Square Tests

International Edition

STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 13th Edition

By Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, University of Toledo and Samuel Wathen, Coastal Carolina University 2008 (October 2006) ISBN: 9780073272962 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071285759 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/lind13e

The new edition of Lind's Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics is a perennial market best seller due to its comprehensive coverage of statistical concepts and methods delivered in a studentfriendly, step-by-step format. The text is non-threatening and presents concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduction. Self reviews and exercises for each section, and review sections for groups of chapters also support the student learning steps. Modern computing applications (Excel, Minitab, and MegaStat) are introduced, but the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics concepts as applied in business as opposed to technology or programming methods. The thirteenth edition continues as a students' text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results. CONTENTS 1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Tables, Frequency Distributions, and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical Measures 4 Describing Data: Displaying and Exploring Data 5 A Survey of Probability Concepts 6 Discrete Probability Distributions 7 Continuous Probability Distributions 8 Sampling Methods and the Central Limit Theorem 9 Estimation and Confidence Intervals 10 One-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 11 Two-Sample Tests of Hypothesis 12 Analysis of Variance 13 Linear Regression and Correlation 14 Multiple Regressions and Correlation Analysis 15 Index Numbers 16 Time Series and Forecasting 17 Nonparametric Methods: Chi-Square Applications 18 Nonparametric Methods: Analysis of Ranked Data 19 Statistical Process Control and Quality Management 20 An Introduction to Decision Theory : MegaStat for Excel Visual Statistics 2.0

International Edition

BASIC STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 6th Edition

By Douglas A Lind, Coastal Carolina University, William Marcal, University of Toledo and Samuel Walthen, Coastal Carolina University 2008 (November 2007) / 640 pages ISBN: 9780073521428 ISBN: 9780077230968 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071263658 [IE]

http://www.mhhe.com/lindbasic6e

Lind/Marchal/Wathen: Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, Sixth edition is a derivative of the best-selling Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, offering the essential topics of statistical tools and methods delivered in a student friendly, step-by-step format. The text is non-threatening and presents concepts clearly and succinctly with a conversational writing style. All statistical concepts are illustrated with solved applied examples immediately upon introduction. Modern computing tools and applications are introduced, but the text maintains a focus on presenting statistics content as opposed to technology or programming methods, and the sixth edition continues as a "students" text with increased emphasis on interpretation of data and results. CONTENTS 1 What Is Statistics? 2 Describing Data: Frequency Distributions and Graphic Presentation 3 Describing Data: Numerical Measures

91

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Appendixes Photo Credits Index CONTENTS 1. Introduction Descriptive Statistics 2. Tables and graphs 3. Measures of location 4. Measures of variation 5. Skewness (to the right; to the left) 6. Pairs of variables 7. Linear transformations and combinations 8. Notations for samples Probability 9. Definitions of Probability 10. Rules for probabilities 11. Conditional probabilities 12. Probability distribution and expectation 13. Probability distribution and variance 14. Other characteristics of probability distributions 15. Some discrete probability distributions 16. Some continuous probability distributions 17. Joint probability distribution of random variables Random samples 18. Several ways to draw a sample 19. Sample proportion F 20. Sample mean 21. Other sample statistics Basic inferential statistics 22. Statistical procedures 23. Point estimation 24. Confidence Intervals for mu and pi 25. Hypothesis testing for mu and pi 26. Prediction 27. Simple linear regression More advanced inferential statistics 28. Statistical inference about omega-squared 29. Comparing two populations 30. Multiple linear regression: introduction 31. Multiple linear regression: extension 32. Multiple linear regression: model deviations 33. Time series and prediction 34. Analysis of variance 35. Chi-squared tests

New

*9780077109875*

STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS, ECONOMICS, MANAGEMENT & FINANCE

By Gert Nieuwenhuis

2009 (February 2009) / 952 pages ISBN: 9780077109875

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/nieuwenhuis

This brand new book in statistics aims to provide an introduction to the key methods and techniques essential to a typical statistics syllabus, whilst also helping students to develop the skills needed to analyse, interpret and prepare data for use in business, economics and related disciplines. Covering the essential methods required at undergraduate level, the book is structured into four parts that deal with descriptive statistics, probability, sample theory and inferential statistics, taking students from the basics through to more advanced topics such as multiple linear regression. Every chapter contains clear descriptions of each technique, illustrated with numerous worked examples to aid students in understanding how to practice statistical methods. The real data used in the examples is drawn from European sources. The text also contains longer case examples set in a European business context, to show how statistics is used everyday in the business environment. Finally, each chapter concludes with a variety of exercises to test students' ability to apply the theory and attain a high level of competence in using statistics. This comprehensive book is ideal for student of statistics at undergraduate level taking an introductory module in the topic. FEaTurES Packed with real life examples that help students to apply statistics in a European business and economic context. Examples range from economic data such gender gap employment rates worldwide, GDP growth in the EU, the size of households in Denmark, to financial examples such as share prices of Eriksson versus Carlsberg, plus thought-provoking problems such as how to compare women and men's world record performances in athletics. Application to Excel throughout for business students plus references to key techniques in SPSS, allowing flexibility depending on the software used in class by students learning statistics. Extensive end of chapter exercises- A typical chapter concludes with over 20 exercises for students to test their ability, with real data provided in the text for students to practice their problem-solving skills. Each chapter includes problems which can be done using software such as Excel. End of chapter summaries recap the main topics, and key symbols, formulae and terms are also listed for quick student revision Comprehensive coverage- from a basic introduction through to multiple linear regression and nonparametric statistics, this 25-chapter text provides flexibility to the lecturer to choose their topic coverage based on the requirements of their module and the needs and abilities of their students.

STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT

By Rego Srivastava 2008 (February 2008) / 896 pages ISBN: 9780070660298

McGraw-Hill India Titles http://www.mhhe.com/srivastavarego

The book will fill the need for a textbook which covers the relevant methods & techniques, illustrate their real-world applications, deals with the subject in the current Indian context, and integrates computerbased methodology with manual method. Keeping the needs of the MBA students in view, detailed mathematical derivations have been avoided. CONTENTS Chapter 1--Introduction- Scope and Applications Chapter 2--Types, Sources and Collection of Data Chapter 3--Presentation of Data Chapter 4--Measures of Central Tendency and Dispersion Chapter 5--Probability Chapter 6--Sampling Techniques Chapter 7--Statistical Distributions Chapter 8--Simple Correlation and Regression Analysis Chapter 9--Multiple Correlation and Regression Analysis Chapter 10--Statistical Inference Chapter 11--Analysis of Variance and Design of Experiments

92

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Chapter 12--Non-Parametric Tests Chapter 13--Time Series Analysis Chapter 14--`ABC' Analysis Chapter 15--Forecasting Methods Chapter 16--Decision Theory Chapter 17--Index Numbers Chapter 18--Role of Statistics in Quality Management Chapter 19--Statistical Techniques for Designing & Marketing of Products & Services Appendix I: Excel--A Tool for Statistical Analysis Appendix II: Symbols, Notations, Some Results and Formulae 8. Random Sampling 9. Confidence Intervals: Admitting that estimates are not exact 10. Hypothesis Testing: Deciding between reality and confidence Part 4: Regression and Time Series 11. Correaltion and Regression: Measuring and predicting relationships 12. Multiple Regression: Predicting oen factor from several others 13. Report Writing: Communicating the results of a multiple regression 14. Time Series: Understanding Changes over time Part 5: Methods and Applications 15. Anova: Testing for Differneces among many samples, and much more. 16. Nonparametrics: Testing with Ordinal Data or Nonnormal Distributions 17. Chi-Squared Analysis: Testing for Patterns in Qualitive Data 18. Quality Control: Recognizing and Managing Variation Appendix A: Employee Database Appendix B: Donations Database Appendix C: Self-Test: Solutions to selected problem and database exercises Appendix D: Statistical Tables Appendix E: Statpad Quick Reference Guide

International Edition

BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL AND MEGASTAT

By J Burdeane Orris, Butler University 2007 (March 2006) ISBN: 9780073211589 (with CD) ISBN: 9780071254311 [IE with Student CD]

http://www.mhhe.com/orris1e

CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction. Chapter 2 Descriptive Statistics. Chapter 3 Frequency Distributions. Chapter 4 Probability Concepts. Chapter 5 Discrete Probability Distributions. Chapter 6 Normal Distribution. Chapter 7 Sampling and Sampling Distributions. Chapter 8 Confidence Intervals. Chapter 9 Hypothesis Testing Concepts. Chapter 10 Hypothesis Testing Applications. Chapter 11 Analysis of Variance. Chapter 12 Linear Regression Analysis. Chapter 13 Multiple Regression. Chapter 14 Chi-Square Applications. Chapter 15 Time-Series Analysis. Chapter 16 Summary and Integration. Appendix A: Excel Statistical Functions. Appendix B: Hypothesis Test Summaries. Appendix C: Glossary and Key Equations. Appendix D: Tables. Appendix E: Tutorial List

International Edition

STATISTICS A First Course, 6th Edition

By Donald Sanders, Education Consultant and Robert Smidt, California Polytechnic State University - San Luis Obispo 2000 / 704 pages ISBN: 9780072332179 (with CD-ROM) ISBN: 9780071169844 [IE with CD-ROM] CONTENTS Chapter 1: Let's Get Started Chapter 2: Thinking Critically about Data: Liars, Liars, and a Few Statisticians Chapter 3: Descriptive Statistics Chapter 4: Probability Concepts Chapter 5: Probability Distributions Chapter 6: Sampling Concepts Chapter 7: Estimating Parameters Chapter 8: Testing Hypotheses: One Sample Procedures Chapter 9: Inference: Two-Sample Procedures Chapter 10: Analysis of Variance Chapter 11: Chi-Square Tests: Goodness-of-Fit and Contingency Table Methods Chapter 12: Linear Regression and Correlation Chapter 13: Non parametric Statistical Methods Appendices 1: Selected Values of the Binomial Probability Distribution 2: Areas under the Standard Normal Probability Distribution 3: A Brief Table of Random Numbers Distribution 4: Areas for t Distributions Distribution 5: Distribution Tables Distribution 6: Chi-Square Distribution Distribution 7: Critical Values of a=.05 and a=.01 in the Wilcoxon Signed Rank Test Distribution 8: Distribution of U in the Mann-Whitney Test Distribution 9: Critical Values for r in the Runs Test for Randomness Distribution 10: Selected Values of the Poisson Probability Distribution Distribution 11: Entering and Editing Data in Minitab Distribution 12: Answers to Odd-Numbered Exercises

International Edition

PRACTICAL BUSINESS STATISTICS 5th Edition

By Andrew F Siegel, University of Washington 2003 / 180 pages ISBN: 9780072821253 (with Student CDROM) ISBN: 9780071213387 [IE with CD-ROM]

http://www.mhhe.com/siegel5e

CONTENTS Part 1: Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 1. Introduction: Defining the Role of Statistics in Business 2. Data Structures: Classifying the Various Types of Data Sets 3. Histograms: Looking at the Distribution of Data 4. Landmark Summaries: Interpreting Typical Values and Percentiles 5. Variability: Dealing with Diversity Part 2: Probability 6. Probability: Understanding Random Situations 7. Random Variables: Working with Uncertain Numbers Part 3: Statistical Inference

93

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Business Statistics Supplements

Chapter 10. Introduction to Operations Research Chapter 11. Linear Programming Chapter 12. Computer Notation and Arithmetic

New

BASIC STATISTICS USING EXCEL FOR USE WITH STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES IN BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS 14th Edition

*9780077270018*

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICS 4th Edition

By Leonard Kazmier 2010 (August 2009) / 432 pages ISBN: 9780071635271

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics helps you understand basic concepts and offers extra practice on topics you'll encounter in your introductory- and intermediate-level courses. With this book, you'll understand and master the basic methods of statistical description, statistical inference, decision analysis, and process control. You will also learn about frequency distributions, histograms and frequency polygons, frequency curves, sampling distribution of the mean, and more. CONTENTS 1. Analyzing Business Data 2. Statistical Presentations and Graphical Displays 3. Describing Business Data: Measures of Location 4. Describing Business Data: Measures of Dispersion 5. Probability 6. Probability Distributions for Discrete Random Variables: Binomial, Hypergeometric, and Poission 7. Probability Distributions for Continuous Random Variables: Normal and Exponential 8. Sampling Distributions and Confidence Intervals for the Mean 9. Other Confidence Intervals 10. Testing Hypotheses Concerning the Value of a Population Mean 11. Testing Other Hypotheses 12. The Chi-Square Test for the Analysis of Qualitative Data 13. Analysis of Variance 14. Linear Regression and Correlation Analysis 15. Multiple Regression and Correlation 16. Time Series Analysis and Business Forecasting 17. Nonparametric Statistics 18. Decision Analysis: Payoff Tables and Decision Trees 19. Statistical Process Control

By Douglas Lind, Coasta Carolina University, William Marchal, University of Toledo and Robert Mason 2010 (January 2009) ISBN: 9780077270018 (Details unavailable at press time)

New

*9780070085206*

BUSINESS STATISTICS AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH 2nd Edition

By S P Rajagopalan and R Sattanathan of DG Vaishnav College-Chennai

2009 (February 2009) / 690 pages ISBN: 9780070085206

McGraw-Hill India Title

This book Business Statistics and Operations Research designed for B.Com students, covers the syllabus prescribed by the Madras University. To make the subject more interesting, We have followed a logical organization of chapters. The numerous solved problems given in this book follow a step-by-step approach and virtually all patterns of questions are included to make this book students-friendly. We are sure that the students using this book will acquire sound knowledge in the fundamentals of the subject and be able to solve the problems easily. NEW TO THIS EDITION Clear and simple explanation of concepts Step-by-step approach Numerous solved problems Unsolved problems for practice

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF BEGINNING STATISTICS 2nd Edition

By Larry Stephens, University of Nebraskas, Omaha 2010 (August 2009) / 432 pages ISBN: 9780071635332

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Confusing Textbooks? Missed Lectures? Not Enough Time? Fortunately for you, there's Schaum's Outlines. More than 40 million students have trusted Schaum's to help them succeed in the classroom and on exams. Schaum's is the key to faster learning and higher grades in every subject. Each Outline presents all the essential course information in an easy-to-follow, topic-by-topic format. You also get hundreds of examples, solved problems, and practice exercises to test your skills. This Schaum's Outline gives you: Practice problems with full explanations that reinforce knowledge

CONTENTS Chapter 1. Introduction Chapter 2. Collection, Classification, and Tabulation Chapter 3. Diagrammatic and Graphical Representation Chapter 4. Measures of Central Tendency Chapter 5. Measures of Variation Chapter 6. Measures of Skewness and Kurtosis Chapter 7. Correlation Chapter 8. Regression Chapter 9. Time Series

Coverage of the most up-to-date developments in your course field

94

BUSINESS STATISTICS

In-depth review of practices and applications Chapter 7: Probability Distributions for Continuous Random Variables Chapter 8: Sampling Distributions and Confidence Intervals for the Mean Chapter 9: Other Confidence Intervals Chapter 10: Testing Hypotheses Concerning the Value of the Population Mean Chapter 11: Testing Other Hypotheses Chapter 12: The Chi-Square Test Chapter 13: Analysis of Variance Chapter 14: Linear Regression and Correlation Analysis Chapter 15: Multiple Regression and Correlation Chapter 16: Time Series Analysis and Business Forecasting Chapter 17: Index Numbers for Business and Economic Data Chapter 18: Decision Analysis: Payoff Tables And Decision Trees Chapter 19: Decision Analysis: The Use of the Sample Information Chapter 20: Statistical Process Control Chapter 21: Nonparametric Statistics Appendices

Fully compatible with your classroom text, Schaum's highlights all the important facts you need to know. Use Schaum's to shorten your study time-and get your best test scores! Schaum's Outlines-Problem Solved. CONTENTS 1. Introduction 2. Organizing Data 3. Descriptive Measures 4. Probability 5. Discrete Random Variables 6. Continuous Random Variables and Their Probability Distributions 7. Sampling Distributions 8. Estimation and Sample Size Determination: One Population 9. Tests of Hypothesis: One Population 10. Inferences for Two Populations 11. Chi-Square Procedures

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF PROBABILITy AND STATISTICS 3rd Edition

By Murray R Spiegel (deceased), John J Schiller and R Alu Srinivasan, Temple University 2009 (August 2008) / 432 pages ISBN: 9780071544252

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF STATISTICS AND ECONOMETRICS 2nd Edition

By Dominick Salvatore and Derrick Reagle of Fordham University 2002 / 256 pages ISBN: 9780071348522

A Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS Introduction. Descriptive Statistics. Probability and Probability Distributions. Statistics Inference: Estimation. Statistical Inference: Testing Hypothesis. Statistics Examination. Simple Regression Analysis. Multiple Regression Analysis. Problems in Regression Analysis. Further Techniques and Applications in Regression Analysis. Simultaneous-Equations Methods. Time Series Econometrics. Statistics Examination. Bionomial Distribution. Poisson Distribution. Standard Normal Distribution. Table of Random Numbers. Student t Distribution. Chi-Square Distribution. F Distribution. Durbin-Watson Statistics. Critical Values of Runs in the Run Tests.

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

This review for college courses in probability and statistics has been updated to reflect the latest course scope and sequences. This new edition expands the explanation of theorems (and advanced formulae), making it an especially authoritative reference for engineering and science majors. CONTENTS Part I: Probability 1. Basic Probability 2. Random Variables and Probability Distributions 3. Mathematical Expectation 4. Special Probability Distributions Part II: Statistics 5. Sampling Theory 6. Estimation Theory 7. Tests of Hypotheses and Significance 8. Curve Fitting, Regression, and Correlation 9. Analysis of Variance 10. Nonparametric Tests 11. Bayesian Methods

SCHAUM'S EASy OUTLINE OF BUSINESS STATISTICS

By Leonard J. Kazmier, Arizona State University 2003 / 160 pages ISBN: 9780071398763

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

CONTENTS Chapter 1: Analyzing Business Data Chapter 2: Statistical Presentations and Graphical Analysis Chapter 3: Describing Business Data: Measures of Location Chapter 4: Describing Business Data: Measures of Variability Chapter 5: Probability Chapter 6: Probability / Distributions for Discrete Random Variables

95

BUSINESS STATISTICS

Business Forecasting

International Edition

BUSINESS FORECASTING 6th Edition

By J Holton Wilson, Central Michigan University, Barry Keating, University of Notre Dame and John Galt Solutions Inc 2009 (December 2009) ISBN: 9780077309305 (with Student CDROM) ISBN: 9780071276092 [IE]

Business Research Method

UK Adaptation

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS 2nd Edition

By Boris Blumberg, University of Maastricht, Donald R Cooper, Florida Atlantic University and Pamela S Schindler, Wittenberg University 2008 (March 2008) / 770 pages ISBN: 9780077117450

http://www.mhhe.com/business/opsci/wilson6e

The Sixth Edition of Business Forecasting is the most practical forecasting book on the market with the most powerful software--Forecast X. This edition presents a broad-based survey of business forecasting methods including subjective and objective approaches. As always, the author team of Wilson and Keating deliver practical how-to forecasting techniques, along with dozens of real world data sets while theory and math are held to a minimum. This Sixth Edition includes Forecast X software updated for Excel 2007 and Vista. Forecast X is the most comprehensive software tool available in this market and the new version is also backwards compatible for XP Excel 2003 systems. This Excel-based tool effectively uses wizards and many tools to make forecasting easy and understandable. CONTENTS 1 Introduction to Business Forecasting 2 The Forecast Process, Data Considerations, and Model Selection 3 Moving Averages and Exponential Smoothing 4 Introduction to Forecasting with Regression Methods 5 Forecasting with Multiple Regression 6 Time-Series Decomposition 7 ARIMA Type Forecasting Models 8 Combination and Collaborative Forecasting 9 Forecast Implementation 10 Data Mining

McGraw-Hill UK Title http://www.mcgraw-hill.co.uk/textbooks/blumberg

Business Research Methods second edition presents a balanced and comprehensive account of business research that is engaging, rigorous and up-to-date. The text explores all the topics involved in the research process, both theoretical and practical, in an accessible manner. This edition also boasts a number of new features and examples to thoroughly explain and illustrate the concepts, processes and practices of good business research. CONTENTS Part I Essentials of Research Chapter 1 The nature of business and management research Chapter 2 Research process and proposal Chapter 3 Literature review Chapter 4 Research Ethics Part II Research Approaches Chapter 5 Quantitative and qualitative research Chapter 6 Sampling strategies: from one case to the whole population Chapter 7 Survey Research Chapter 8 Secondary data, archival sources and content analysis Chapter 9 Observational, action and ethnographic research Chapter 10 Case Studies and Qualitative Interviews (NEW!) Chapter 11 Experiments Part III Research Instruments Chapter 12 Measurements and scales Chapter 13 Field work: questionnaire and responses Chapter 14 Writing and presenting research outcomes Part IV Statistical background (on CD-ROM) Chapter 15 Data preparation and description Chapter 16 Exploring, displaying and examining data Chapter 17 Hypothesis testing Chapter 18 Measure of association Chapter 19 Multivariate analysis: an overview

96

BUSINESS STATISTICS

International Edition

BUSINESS RESEARCH METHODS 10th Edition

By Donald Cooper, Florida Atlantic University - Boca Rator and Pamela Schindler, Wittenberg University 2008 (November 2007) ISBN: 9780077224875 (with Student DVD) ISBN: 9780071263337 [IE with Student DVD]

Linear Statistics / Regression

International Edition

APPLIED LINEAR STATISTICAL MODELS 5th Edition

By Michael H Kutner, Emory University, Chris J Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota, John Neter, University of Georgia and William Li, University of Minnesota 2005 / 1344 pages ISBN: 9780073108742 (with Student CD) ISBN: 9780071122214 [IE with Student CD] CONTENTS Part1: Simple Linear Regression 1: Linear Regression with One Predictor Variable 2: Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3: Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4: Simultaneous Inferences and Other Topics in Regression Analysis 5: Matrix Approach to Simple Linear Regression Analysis Part 2: Multiple Linear Regression 6: Multiple Regression I 7: Multiple Regression II 8: Building the Regression Model I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9: Building the Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10: Building the Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11: Remedial Measures and Alternative Regression Techniques 12: Auto-correlation in Time Series Data Part 3: Nonlinear Regression 13: Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and Neural Networks 14: Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized Linear Models Part 4: Single Factor Studies 15: Introduction to Analysis of Variance and the Design of Experiments 16: Single-Factor ANOVA: Model and Tests 17: Analysis of Factor Level Effects in Single Factor Studies 18: ANOVA Diagnostics and Remedial Measures Part 5: Multifactor Studies and Blocking 19: Two-Factor Studies--Equal Sample Sizes 20: Two-Factor Studies--One Case per Cell 21: Randomized Complete Block Designs 22: Analysis of Covariance 23: Two -Factor Studies--Unequal Sample Sizes 24: Multifactor ANOVA Model and Tests 25: Random and Mixed-Effects Models Part 6: Special-Purpose Experimental Designs 26: Nested Designs, Subsampling, and Partially Nested Designs 27: Repeated Measures and Related Designs 28: Latin Square, Balanced Incomplete Block, and Related Designs 29: Exploratory Experiments-Two-Level Factorial and Fractional Factorial Designs 30: Response Surface Experiments

http://www.mhhe.com/cooper10e

In its Anniversary 10th Edition, authors Cooper and Schindler continue to provide the most timely, richest, and most comprehensive coverage of the research experience in Business Research Methods. Students and instructors will find thorough coverage of business research topics - including the best coverage of questionnaire design - backed by solid theory. The authors are successful marketing research consultants; their expertise is evident in the realistic Snapshots, Close-Ups, PicProfiles, and case studies found in the text. Managerial decision making is the underlying theme, and topics and applications are presented and organized in a manner that allows students to thoroughly understand business research topics and functions. Consequently, the structure of the text encourages and supports completion of an in-depth business research project during the semester. CONTENTS Part I: Introduction to Business Research 1. Research in Business 2. Ethics in Business Research 3. Thinking Like a Researcher 4. The Research Process: An Overview 5. Clarifying the Research Question through Secondary Data and Exploration Appendix 5A: Bibliographic Database Searches Appendix 5B: Advanced Searches Part II: The Design of Business Research 6. Research Design: An Overview 7. Qualitative Research 8. Observation Studies 9. Surveys 10. Experiments Appendix 10A: Complex Experimental Designs Appendix 10B: Test Markets Part III: The Sources and Collection of Data 11. Measurement 12. Measurement Scales 13. Questionnaires and Instruments Appendix 13A: Crafting Effective Measurement Questions Appendix 13B: Pretesting Options and Discoveries 14. Sampling Appendix 14A: Determining Sample Size Part IV: Insights from Findings: Analysis and Presentation of Data 15. Data Preparation and Description Appendix 15A: Describing Data Statistically 16. Exploring, Displaying, and Examining Data 17. Hypothesis Testing 18. Measures of Association 19. Multivariate Analysis: An Overview 20. Presenting Results: Oral and Written Reports Case Abstracts Appendices: A. Business Research Requests and Proposals (with Sample RFP) B. Focus Group Discussion Guide C. Nonparametric Significance Tests D. Selected Statistical Tables References and Readings Glossary of Key Terms

97

BUSINESS STATISTICS

International Edition

APPLIED LINEAR REGRESSION MODELS 4th Edition

By John Neter, University of Georgia, Michael H Kutner, William Wasserman, and Chris Nachtsheim, University of Minnesota 2004 / 672 pages ISBN: 9780073014661 (with Student CD-ROM) ISBN: 9780071274807 [IE] CONTENTS Part 1 - Simple Linear Regression 1 Linear Regression with One Predictor Variable 2 Inferences in Regression and Correlation Analysis 3 Diagnostics and Remedial Measures 4 Simultaneous Inferences and Other Topics in Regression Analysis 5 Matrix Approach to Simple Linear Regression Analysis Part 2 - Multiple Linear Regression 6 Multiple Regression I 7 Multiple Regression II 8 Building the Regression Model I: Models for Quantitative and Qualitative Predictors 9 Building the Regression Model II: Model Selection and Validation 10 Building the Regression Model III: Diagnostics 11 Remedial Measures and Alternative Regression Techniques 12 Autocorrelation in Time Series Data Part 3 - Nonlinear Regression 13 Introduction to Nonlinear Regression and Neural Networks 14 Logistic Regression, Poisson Regression, and Generalized Linear Models

Others

QUANTITATIVE APTE FOR COMPETITIVE EXAMS 3rd Edition

By Abhijit Guha 2004 / 660 pages ISBN: 9780070581890

McGraw-Hill India Title

CONTENTS 1.Number System and Number Series 2. HCF and LCM of Numbers 3. Fraction 4. Simplification and Approximation 5. Percentage 6. Average 7. Ratio and Proportion 8. Partnership and Share 9. Mixtures 10. Chain Rule 11. Time, Work and Wages 12. Pipes and Cistern 13. Profit, Loss and Discount 14. Simple Interest 15. Compound Interest - Growth and Depreciation 16. Shares and Debentures 17. Time and Distance 18. Trains 19. Boats and Streams 20. Races 21. Clocks 22. Areas of Plane Figures 23. Volume and Surface Area of Solids 24. Data Interpretation 25. Data Sufficiency 26. Elementary Algebra 27. Linear Equations: Applications and Problems on Ages 28. Quadratic Equations and Inequations 29. Permutation and Combination 30. Probability 10 Model Test Papers/Question Bank

COmplImENTary COpIES

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

98

BUSINESS MATH

Business Math ..................................................................................................101 Business Math Supplements ............................................................................103

99

NEW TITLES

BUSINESS MATH

2011

Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Brief Edition Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e

Author

Slater

ISBN

9780077362362

Page

101

Slater

9780077362355

101

BUSINESS MATH

2010

Introductory Mathematics and Statistics for Business, 5e [Aust] Business Mathematics, 2e [India]

Author

Croucher Rajagopalan

ISBN

9780070284890 9780070080508

Page

101 102

100

BUSINESS MATH

Business Math

New

*9780070284890*

INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICS AND STATISTICS FOR BUSINESS 5th Edition

By John S Croucher, Macquarie University

New

PRACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PROCEDURES WITH BUSINESS MATH HANDBOOK, BRIEF EDITION Student DVD, WSJ Insert 10th Edition

By Jeffrey Slater, North Shore Community College 2011 (February 2010) ISBN: 9780077362362

*9780077362362*

2009 (November 2009) ISBN: 9780070284890

McGraw-Hill Australia Title www.mhhe.com/au/croucher5e

Number crunching and statistics have never been more relevant or important in our social and business environments. As information sources and data sets proliferate, statistics provides the analytical tools for effective problem solving and decision making. Introductory Mathematics and Statistics 5e includes current data and many real world examples to effectively engage students. Worked examples are integrated throughout, with graded end of chapter problems and exercises, and Using Microsoft Excel is introduced to help students solve problems using this popular and accessible software. John Croucher is Professor of Statistics at Macquarie University. The recipient of numerous teaching and education awards, Professor Croucher also maintains an active research profile with over 100 journal papers published. He is a regular contributor on statistics to the media, and is a professional consultant and speaker on statistics. New to this editioN The only Australian text that covers the basics of mathematics with full statistical coverage. Even if maths not formally covered as part of the course lecturers can refer students to the maths section to save themselves time in additional tuition and increase the pass rate of the course Using Microsoft Excel is a new feature to help students solve problems using this popular and accessible software package, with nearly 300 exercises highlighted than can be solved using Microsoft Excel. Current Australian examples and data integrated throughout with applications of statistics in business and everyday life for student engagement and relevancy. Now in 2-colour presentation to enhance the visual appearance and emphasis of key points Worked examples integrated throughout every chapter to ensure student understanding

http://www.mhhe.com/slater10e

(Details unavailable at press time)

New

PRACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PROCEDURES WITH BUSINESS MATH HANDBOOK Student DVD, WSJ Insert 10th Edition

By Jeffrey Slater, North Shore Community College 2011 (February 2010) ISBN: 9780077362355 ISBN: 9780071221184 [IE]

*9780077362355*

http://www.mhhe.com/slater10e

(Details unavailable at press time)

ComplimeNtary Copies

Complimentary desk copies are available for course adoption only. To request for a review copy: contact your local McGraw-Hill Representatives fax the Examination Copy Request Form email to [email protected] submit online at www.mheducation.asia Visit McGraw-Hill Education Website: www.mheducation.asia

Over 1100 end of chapter exercises allow students to practice and master the topic with selected solutions allowing them to check their own progress Examples of new material includes additional coverage of selection of an appropriate sample size; published unusual correlations; testing the value of a correlation coefficient for significance and skewness of a distribution as just a few examples. CoNteNts Part One Mathematics Ch 1 Basic Mathematics Ch 2 Percentages Ch 3 Algebra Ch 4 Ratios and Proportions Ch 5 Simple Interest Ch 6 Compound Interest

101

BUSINESS MATH

Ch 7 Annuities Ch 8 Depreciation Ch 9 Graphing Part Two Statistics Ch 10 Introduction to Statistics Ch 11 Visual Presentation of Data Ch 12 Measures of Central Tendency Ch 13 Measures of Dispersion Ch 14 Sampling Ch 15 Elementary Probability Ch 16 The Normal Distribution Ch 17 Correlation Ch 18 Regression Analysis Ch 19 Time Series and Trend Analysis Ch 20 Index Numbers Ch 21 Hypothesis Testing Ch 22 Analysis of Frequency Data Appendixes Tables Summary of Useful Formulae Solutions to Selected Exercises A note on summation notation (statistics) A note on calculators A note on computer packages Solutions to Selected Exercises Glossary Index Chapter 6. Interest , Annuities and Discount Chapter 7. Plane Analytical Geometry Chapter 8. Progressions Chapter 9. Integral Calculus Chapter 10. Interpolation Chapter 11. Matrices Solution to System of Linear Equations Worked Examples Exercise Answers

International Edition

THE MATHEMATICS OF MONEY WITH STUDENT CD

By Timothy Biehler 2008 (June 2007) / 608 pages ISBN: 9780073524825 (with CD) ISBN: 9780071101295 [IE] The Mathematics of Money: Math for Business and Personal Finance covers all the traditional topics of the business math course, but with a more algebraic focus than many of the texts currently on the market. The text develops a solid understanding of percent and interest early, then applies that foundation to other applications in business and personal finance. While it is appropriate for students of all levels, the book takes the approach that even if students are coming into the class with only high school math, neither they nor the instructor need to be afraid of algebra; it takes care to clearly present and reinforce the formulas given and to consistently return to them and apply the material to contexts that are relevant to the students. CoNteNts Part 1: Core Mathematical Tools Chapter 1: Simple Interest Chapter 2: Simple Discount Chapter 3: Compound Interest Chapter 4: Annuities Chapter 5: Spreadsheets Part 2: Specific Applications Chapter 6: Investments Chapter 7: Retirement Plans Chapter 8: Mathematics of Pricing Chapter 9: Taxes Chapter 10: Consumer Finance Chapter 11: International Finance Chapter 12: Financial Statements Chapter 13: Insurance and Risk Management Chapter 14: Payroll and Inventory Chapter 15: Evaluating Projected Cash Flows Chapter 16: Business Statistics

New

*9780070080508*

BUSINESS MATHEMATICS 2nd Edition

By S Rajagopalan and R Sattanathan of DG Vaishnav College, Chennai

2009 (March 2009) / 492 pages ISBN: 9780070080508

McGraw-Hill India Title

This book Business Mathematics designed for B.Com students, covers the syllabus prescribed by the Madras University. To make the subject more interesting, we have followed a logical organization of chapters. The numerous solved problems given in this book follow a step-by-step approach any virtually all patterns of questions are included to make this book student-friendly. We are sure that the students using this book will acquire sound knowledge in the fundamentals of the subject and be able to solve the problems easily. New to this editioN Clear and simple explanation of concepts Step-by-step approach 350 solved problems 198 unsolved problems

CoNteNts Chapter 1. Set Theory Chapter 2. Ratio, Proportion and Variation Chapter 3. Permutations and Combinations Chapter 4. Binomial Theorem Chapter 5. Differential Calculus

102

BUSINESS MATH

International Edition

PRACTICAL BUSINESS MATH PROCEDURES 9th Edition

By Jeffrey Slater, North Shore Community College 2008 (October 2007) / 736 pages ISBN: 9780077214562 (with DVD) ISBN: 9780071283717 [IE with Student DVD, WSJ Insert & Business Math Handbook]

Business Math Supplements

http://www.mhhe.com/slater9e

Practical Business Math Procedures is a comprehensive introduction to the concepts and applications of mathematics to personal and commercial business problems. The text uses basic arithmetic and problem solving techniques and illustrates their use in retailing, interest and loans, banking, payroll, taxes, investments, insurance, and a variety of other business situations. The text is well known for the motivating integration of interesting real world examples and photos from the Wall Street Journal, Kiplinger's, and many other business journals. PBMP's is the most popular and widely used book for this course and is carefully written and developed to support students with little math experience with practice quizzes, thousands of exercises, color coded procedures and diagrams, supporting tutorial videos on DVD, and the highest standards of reliability and cleanliness. CoNteNts 1. Whole Numbers: How to Dissect and Solve Word Problems 2. Fractions 3. Decimals 4. Banking 5. Solving for the Unknown: A How-To Approach for Solving Equations 6. Percents and Their Applications 7. Discounts: Trade and Cash 8. Markups and Markdowns: Perishables and Breakeven Analysis 9. Payroll 10. Simple Interest 11. Promissory Notes, Simple Discount Notes, and the Discount Process 12. Compound Interest and Present Value 13. Annuities and Sinking Funds 14. Installment Buying, Rule of 78, and Revolving Charge Credit Cards 15. The Cost of Home Ownership 16. How to Read, Analyze, and Interpret Financial Reports 17. Depreciation 18. Inventory and Overhead 19. Sales, Excise, and Property Tax 20. Life, Fire, and Auto Insurance 21. Stocks, Bonds, and Mutual Funds 22. Statistics Appendix A: Additional Homework by Learning Unit Appendix B: Check Figures Appendix C: Glossary Appendix D: Metric System

SCHAUM'S OUTLINE OF BASIC BUSINESS MATHEMATICS 2nd Edition

By Eugene Don and Joel J Lerner, Sulivan County Community College 2009 (May 2009) / 272 pages ISBN: 9780071611589

A Schaum Professional Reference Title

Schaum's Outline of Basic Business Mathematics helps beginning business students learn the practical application of mathematical concepts used in the business world, including stock market applications, appreciation rates, and averaging inventory controls. This book differs from Schaum's Outline of Business Mathematics in that it focuses exclusively on business (rather than business and finance) and uses basic math in its applications. The book reviews course fundamentals in easy-to-understand language with illustrative examples. The outline supplements business mathematics texts and is best suited to two-year college business courses. CoNteNts Review of Arithmetic. Ratio, Proportion, and Percent. Payroll. Depreciation. Interest and Discount. Annuities and Their Applications. Stocks and Bonds. Buying. Selling. Insurance. Introduction to Statistics.

INVITATION TO PUBLISH

McGraw-Hill is interested in reviewing textbook proposal for publication. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill office or email to [email protected] Visit McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Website: www.mheducation.asia

103

BUSINESS MATH

104

TITLE INDEX

A

Agenda for a New Economy Annual Editions: Economics, 35e Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD, 2e Applied Statistics in Business and Economics, 3e Korten Cole Neter Kutner Doane Doane 56 17, 34 98 97 90 87

B

Basic Econometrics, 5e Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 6e Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 7e Basic Statistics using Excel and MegaStat Basic Statistics using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for a Complex World Business Environment, 2e [India] Business Forecasting, 6e Business Mathematics, 2e [India] Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Business Research Methods, 10e Business Research Methods, 2e [UK] Business Statistics and Operations Research, 2e [India] Business Statistics in Practice, 5e Business Statistics in Practice, 6e Gujarati Lind Lind Orris Lind Sterman Paul Wilson Rajagopalan Leong Cooper Blumberg Rajagopalan Bowerman Bowerman 42 91 87 93 94 61 41 96 102 67 97 96 94 90 87

C

Chinese Economy [Asian] Complete Business Statistics, 7e Concise Guide to Macroeconomics Contemporary Labor Economics, 9e Cost of Capitalism: Understanding Marketing Mayhem and Stabilizing Our Economics Future (The) Cai/Lin Aczel Moss McConnell Barbera 55 90 57 49 56

D

Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e Development Economics [UK] Simchi-Levi Forsyth 78 53

E

Econometric Methods, 4e Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e Econometrics Economic Principles, 2e [Aust] Economics for Business, 3e [UK] Economics of European Integration, 3e (The) [UK] Economics of Social Issues, 19e Economics, 18e Johnston Pindyck Schmidt Jackson Begg Baldwin Sharp McConnell 43 43 43 16 33 54 35 14

105

TITLE INDEX

Economics, 19e Economics, 8e Economics, 9e Economics, 9e [UK] Economics: The Basics Economy Today, 12 (The) Environmental Economics, 5e Essential Statistics in Business and Economics Essentials of Business Statistics, 3e Essentials of Econometrics, 4e Essentials of Economics, 2e Essentials of Economics, 7e Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2e (The) [UK] Everyday Guide to Economic Statistics, 7e (An) Samuelson Colander Slavin Begg Mandel Schiller Field Doane Bowerman Gujarati Brue Schiller Doane Nello Clayton 11 10 15 15 32 12 41 91 87 42 9, 30 32 88 54 16

F

Factory Physics, 3e Flying High in a Competitive Industry: Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines, 2e [Asian] Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e Begg Chiang 31 44 Hopp Heracleous 69 80

H

Hong Kong Economy: From Recovery to Restructure (The) [Asian] Li 55

I

Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management with CD International Economics, 14e International Economics, 5e [India] International Economics, 7e International Economics, Globalization, and Policy: A Reader, 5e Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics, 2e [UK] Introduction to Business Data Mining Introduction to Information Systems Project Management: A Systems Approach, 2e Introduction to Management Science Introduction to Management Science, 4e Introduction to Management Science: A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3e Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Introductory Mathmatics and Statistics for Business, 5e [Aust] Issues in Economics Today, 5e Finch Pugel Cherunilam Appleyard King Sorensen Olson Olson Stevenson Hillier Hillier Hillier Croucher Guell 65 47 48 46 47 52 79 72 68 67 68 79 101 34

J

Juran's Quality Control Handbook, 5e Juran 83

106

TITLE INDEX

L

Labor Economics, 5e Logistics & Supply Chain Management [UK] Borjas Jonsson 48 77

M

Macro Economy Today, 12e (The) Macroeconomics, 10e Macroeconomics, 18e Macroeconomics, 19e Macroeconomics, 2e Macroeconomics, 8e Macroeconomics, 9e Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, 3e [India] Make or Break: How Manufacturers Can Leap from Decline to Revitalization Management Lessons from Mayo Clinic: Inside One of the World's Most Admired Service Organizations Managerial Economics & Business Strategy, 7e Managerial Economics & Organizational Architecture, 5e Managerial Economics, 10e Managerial Economics, 9e Managing Operations Across the Supply Chain Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases Managing Projects: A TeamBased Approach with Student CD Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management, 6e Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e Mastering Project Management: Applying Advanced Concepts to Systems Thinking, Control & Evaluation, Resource Allocation, 2e Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 2e Mathematics for Economics and Business [UK] Mathematics of Money with Student CD (The) McGraw-Hill/Irwin Operations Management Video Series, Volume 14 DVD, 12e MH Operations Management Video Series, Volume 17 DVD, 13e Micro Economy Today, 12e (The) Microeconomics Microeconomics and Behavior, 8e Microeconomics, 18e Microeconomics, 19e Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Microeconomics, 3e Microeconomics, 8e Microeconomics, 9e Microeconomics, Brief Edition Cachon Taylor Biehler Jacobs Jacobs Schiller Bernheim Frank McConnell Samuelson Morgan Katz Colander Slavin McConnell 63, 76 44 102 66 66 27 38 37 29 27 38 39 25 29 26 Baye Brickley Thomas Thomas Swink Thomke Brown Vollmann Vollmann Lewis 39 40 39 40 61 72 70 69 70 82 Schiller Dornbusch McConnell Samuelson DeLong Colander Slavin McConnell Gupta Grichnik Berry 21 36 23 21 37 18 24 20 36 82 81

107

TITLE INDEX

Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 2e Cecchetti 45

O

Operations and Supply Management, 12e Operations and Supply Management, 13e Operations and Supply Management: The Core, 2e Operations Management [UK] Operations Management in Asia [Asian] Operations Management, 10e Operations Management, 7e Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 4e Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 5e Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5e Operations Now: Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with Student DVD, 3e Operations Strategy: Competiting in the 21st Century Jacobs Jacobs Jacobs Davis Stevenson/Sum Stevenson Knod Schroeder Schroeder Davis Finch Beckman 64 61 62 62 63 64 66 65 61 66 65 72

P

Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Brief Edition, Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e Practical Business Math Procedures, 9e Practical Business Statistics, 5e Principles and Tools for Supply Chain Management with Student CD-ROM Principles of Economics [Asia Adaptation] Principles of Economics, 4e Principles of Economics, Brief Edition Principles of Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] Principles of Macroeconomics, 4e Principles of Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Principles of Microeconomics Principles of Microeconomics, 2e [Aust] Principles of Microeconomics, 4e Principles of Microeconomics, Brief Edition Production and Operations Analysis, 6e Production and Operations Management, 4e [India] Project Management, 5e Project Management: 24 Steps to help you Master any Project Project Management: The Managerial Process, 4e Project Management: The Managerial Process, 5e Public Economics, 2e [Aust] Public Finance Public Finance, 9e Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e Purchasing and Supply Management, 14e Slater Slater Siegel Webster Frank Frank Frank Bernanke Frank Frank Miller Frank Frank Frank Nahmias Chary Cleland Heerkens Gray Larson Abelson Seidman Rosen Leenders Leenders 101 103 93 78 13 13 14 24 23 23 29 30 28 28 69, 70 63 82 83 71 70 51 51 50 79 74 Slater 101

108

TITLE INDEX

Purchasing and Supply Management, 2e Benton 74

Q

Quality Management, 3e Quality Planning and Analysis: From Product Development through Use, 5e Quantitative Apte for Competitive Exams, 3e [India] Gitlow Gryna Guha 73 73 98

S

SAP R/3 Enterprise Software: An Introduction Schaum's Easy Outline of Business Statistics Schaum's Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics Schaum's Outline of Basic Business Mathematics, 2e Schaum's Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics, 4e Schaum's Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of Economics Schaum's Outline of International Economics, 4e Schaum's Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3e Schaum's Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e Schaum's Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e Schaum's Outline of Operations Management, 2e Schaum's Outline of Operations Research, 2e Schaum's Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e Schaum's Outline of Probability and Statistics, 3e Schaum's Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e Service Management, 6e SimProject Version 2.0 Passcode (Standalone) with MS Project 2007, 4e Spreadsheet Modeling for Business Decisions State of the Unions: How Labor can Strengthen the Middle Class, Improve Our Economy, and Regain Political Influence Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance Statistics for Management [India] Statistics: A First Course, 6e Structure of Economics: A Mathematical Analysis, 3e (The) Supply Chain Cost Management Supply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Supply Chain Management [India] Supply Chain Management for Retailing [India] Supply Chain Science Supply Management, 8e Supply-Based Advantage (The) Lind Lind Nieuwenhuis Srivastava Sanders Silberberg Anklesaria Bowersox Rangarajan Ray Hopp Burt Rogers 91 89 92 92 93 44 82 75 77 76 77 76 81 Hayen Kazmier Dowling Don Stephens Kazmier Salvatore Salvatore Dowling Diulio Salvatore Monks Bronson Salvatore Spiegel Salvatore Fitzsimmons Pinto Kros Dine 67 95 44 103 94 94 17 48 45 17 53 66 80 18 95 43, 95 74 71 68 57

109

TITLE INDEX

T

Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Total Quality Management, 2e [India] Towards the Next Economics Toyota's Supply Chain Management: A Strategic Approach to Toyota's Renowned System Bonello Gupta Drucker Iyer 33 73 56 81

U

Urban Economics, 7e O'Sullivan 50

W

Worldclass Warehousing and Material Handling Frazelle 83

110

AUTHOR INDEX

A

Abelson Aczel Anklesaria Appleyard Public Economics, 2e [Aust] Complete Business Statistics, 7e Supply Chain Cost Management International Economics, 7e 51 90 82 46

B

Baldwin Barbera Baye Beckman Begg Begg Begg Benton Bernanke Bernheim Berry Biehler Blumberg Bonello Borjas Bowerman Bowerman Bowerman Bowersox Brickley Bronson Brown Brue Burt Economics of European Integration, 3e (The) [UK] Cost of Capitalism: Understanding Marketing Mayhem and Stabilizing Our Economics Future (The) Managerial Economics & Business Strategy, 7e Operations Strategy: Competiting in the 21st Century Economics for Business, 3e [UK] Economics, 9e [UK] Foundations of Economics, 4e [UK] Purchasing and Supply Management, 2e Principles of Macroeconomics, 2e [Aust] Microeconomics Management Lessons from Mayo Clinic: Inside One of the World's Most Admired Service Organizations Mathematics of Money with Student CD (The) Business Research Methods, 2e [UK] Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Economic Issues, 14e Labor Economics, 5e Business Statistics in Practice, 5e Business Statistics in Practice, 6e Essentials of Business Statistics, 3e Supply Chain Logistics Management, 3e Managerial Economics & Organizational Architecture, 5e Schaum's Outline of Operations Research, 2e Managing Projects: A TeamBased Approach with Student CD Essentials of Economics, 2e Supply Management, 8e 54 56 39 72 33 15 31 74 24 38 81 102 96 33 48 90 87 87 75 40 80 70 9, 30 76

C

Cachon Cai/Lin Cecchetti Chary Cherunilam Chiang Clayton Cleland Colander Colander Colander Matching Supply with Demand: An Introduction to Operations Management, 2e Chinese Economy [Asian] Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 2e Production and Operations Management, 4e [India] International Economics, 5e [India] Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics, 4e Everyday Guide to Economic Statistics, 7e (An) Project Management, 5e Economics, 8e Macroeconomics, 8e Microeconomics, 8e 63, 76 55 45 63 48 44 16 82 10 18 25

111

AUTHOR INDEX

Cole Cooper Croucher Annual Editions: Economics, 35e Business Research Methods, 10e Introductory Mathmatics and Statistics for Business, 5e [Aust] 17, 34 97 101

D

Davis Davis DeLong Dine Operations Management [UK] Operations Management: Integrating Manufacturing and Services, 5e Macroeconomics, 2e State of the Unions: How Labor can Strengthen the Middle Class, Improve Our Economy, and Regain Political Influence Diulio Doane Doane Doane Doane Don Dornbusch Dowling Dowling Drucker Schaum's Outline of Macroeconomics, 3e Applied Statistics in Business and Economics with Student CD, 2e Applied Statistics in Business and Economics, 3e Essential Statistics in Business and Economics Essentials Statistics in Business and Economics, 2e Schaum's Outline of Basic Business Mathematics, 2e Macroeconomics, 10e Schaum's Easy Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics Schaum's Outline of Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3e Towards the Next Economics 17 90 87 91 88 103 36 44 45 56 62 66 37 57

F

Field Finch Finch Fitzsimmons Forsyth Frank Frank Frank Frank Frank Frank Frank Frank Frank Frazelle Environmental Economics, 5e Interactive Models for Operations and Supply Chain Management with CD Operations Now: Supply Chain Profitability and Performance with Student DVD, 3e Service Management, 6e Development Economics [UK] Microeconomics and Behavior, 8e Principles of Economics [Asia Adaptation] Principles of Economics, 4e Principles of Economics, Brief Edition Principles of Macroeconomics, 4e Principles of Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Principles of Microeconomics, 2e [Aust] Principles of Microeconomics, 4e Principles of Microeconomics, Brief Edition Worldclass Warehousing and Material Handling 41 65 65 74 53 37 13 13 14 23 23 30 28 28 83

112

AUTHOR INDEX

G

Gitlow Gray Grichnik Gryna Guell Guha Gujarati Gujarati Gupta Gupta Quality Management, 3e Project Management: The Managerial Process, 4e Make or Break: How Manufacturers Can Leap from Decline to Revitalization Quality Planning and Analysis: From Product Development through Use, 5e Issues in Economics Today, 5e Quantitative Apte for Competitive Exams, 3e [India] Basic Econometrics, 5e Essentials of Econometrics, 4e Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, 3e [India] Total Quality Management, 2e [India] 73 71 82 73 34 98 42 42 36 73

H

Hayen Heerkens Heracleous Hillier Hillier Hillier Hopp Hopp SAP R/3 Enterprise Software: An Introduction Project Management: 24 Steps to help you Master any Project Flying High in a Competitive Industry: Cost Effective Service Excellence at Singapore Airlines, 2e [Asian] Introduction to Management Science, 4e Introduction to Management Science: A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 3e Introduction to Operations Research, 9e Factory Physics, 3e Supply Chain Science 67 83 80 67 68 79 69 77

I

Iyer Toyota's Supply Chain Management: A Strategic Approach to Toyota's Renowned System 81

J

Jackson Jacobs Jacobs Jacobs Jacobs Jacobs Johnston Jonsson Juran Economic Principles, 2e [Aust] McGraw-Hill/Irwin Operations Management Video Series, Volume 14 DVD, 12e MH Operations Management Video Series, Volume 17 DVD, 13e Operations and Supply Management, 12e Operations and Supply Management, 13e Operations and Supply Management: The Core, 2e Econometric Methods, 4e Logistics & Supply Chain Management [UK] Juran's Quality Control Handbook, 5e 16 66 66 64 61 62 43 77 83

113

AUTHOR INDEX

K

Katz Kazmier Kazmier King Knod Korten Kros Kutner Microeconomics, 3e Schaum's Easy Outline of Business Statistics Schaum's Outline of Business Statistics, 4e International Economics, Globalization, and Policy: A Reader, 5e Operations Management, 7e Agenda for a New Economy Spreadsheet Modeling for Business Decisions Applied Linear Statistical Models, 5e 39 95 94 47 66 56 68 97

L

Larson Leenders Leenders Leong Lewis Project Management: The Managerial Process, 5e Purchasing and Supply Management, 13e Purchasing and Supply Management, 14e Business Modeling with Spreadsheet [Asian] Mastering Project Management: Applying Advanced Concepts to Systems Thinking, Control & Evaluation, Resource Allocation, 2e Li Lind Lind Lind Lind Lind Hong Kong Economy: From Recovery to Restructure (The) [Asian] Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 6e Basic Statistics for Business and Economics, 7e Basic Statistics using Excel for use with Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 13e Statistical Techniques in Business and Economics, 14e 55 91 87 94 91 89 70 79 74 67 82

M

Mandel McConnell McConnell McConnell McConnell McConnell McConnell Miller Monks Morgan Moss Economics: The Basics Contemporary Labor Economics, 9e Economics, 18e Macroeconomics, 18e Macroeconomics, Brief Edition Microeconomics, 18e Microeconomics, Brief Edition Principles of Microeconomics Schaum's Outline of Operations Management, 2e Microeconomics, 2e [UK] Concise Guide to Macroeconomics 32 49 14 23 20 29 26 29 66 38 57

N

Nahmias Nello Neter Nieuwenhuis Production and Operations Analysis, 6e European Union: Economics, Policies and History, 2e (The) [UK] Applied Linear Regression Models, 4e Statistics for Business, Economics, Management & Finance 69, 70 54 98 92

114

AUTHOR INDEX

O

Olson Olson Orris O'Sullivan Introduction to Business Data Mining Introduction to Information Systems Project Management: A Systems Approach, 2e Basic Statistics using Excel and MegaStat Urban Economics, 7e 79 72 93 50

P

Paul Pindyck Pinto Pugel Business Environment, 2e [India] Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts, 4e SimProject Version 2.0 Passcode (Standalone) with MS Project 2007, 4e International Economics, 14e 41 43 71 47

R

Rajagopalan Rajagopalan Rangarajan Ray Rogers Rosen Business Mathematics, 2e [India] Business Statistics and Operations Research, 2e [India] Supply Chain Management [India] Supply Chain Management for Retailing [India] Supply-Based Advantage (The) Public Finance, 9e 102 94 77 76 81 50

S

Salvatore Salvatore Salvatore Salvatore Salvatore Samuelson Samuelson Samuelson Sanders Schiller Schiller Schiller Schiller Schmidt Schroeder Schroeder Seidman Sharp Siegel Silberberg Simchi-Levi Slater Slater Schaum's Outline of Easy Outline of Principles of Economics Schaum's Outline of International Economics, 4e Schaum's Outline of Microeconomic Theory, 4e Schaum's Outline of Principles of Economics, 2e Schaum's Outline of Statistics and Econometrics, 2e Economics, 19e Macroeconomics, 19e Microeconomics, 19e Statistics: A First Course, 6e Economy Today, 12 (The) Essentials of Economics, 7e Macro Economy Today, 12e (The) Micro Economy Today, 12e (The) Econometrics Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 4e Operations Management: Contemporary Concepts and Cases, 5e Public Finance Economics of Social Issues, 19e Practical Business Statistics, 5e Structure of Economics: A Mathematical Analysis, 3e (The) Designing and Managing the Supply Chain, 3e Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Brief Edition, Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e Practical Business Math Procedures with Business Math Handbook, Student DVD, WSJ Insert, 10e 17 48 53 18 43, 95 11 21 27 93 12 32 21 27 43 65 61 51 35 93 44 78 101 101

115

AUTHOR INDEX

Slater Slavin Slavin Slavin Sorensen Spiegel Srivastava Stephens Sterman Stevenson Stevenson Stevenson/Sum Swink Practical Business Math Procedures, 9e Economics, 9e Macroeconomics, 9e Microeconomics, 9e Introducing Advanced Macroeconomics, 2e [UK] Schaum's Outline of Probability and Statistics, 3e Statistics for Management [India] Schaum's Outline of Beginning Statistics, 2e Business Dynamics: Systems Thinking and Modeling for a Complex World Introduction to Management Science Operations Management, 10e Operations Management in Asia [Asian] Managing Operations Across the Supply Chain 103 15 24 29 52 95 92 94 61 68 64 63 61

T

Taylor Thomas Thomas Thomke Mathematics for Economics and Business [UK] Managerial Economics, 10e Managerial Economics, 9e Managing Project and Service Development: Text and Cases 44 39 40 72

V

Vollmann Vollmann Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management, 6e Manufacturing Planning and Control Systems, 5e 69 70

W

Webster Wilson Principles and Tools for Supply Chain Management with Student CD-ROM Business Forecasting, 6e 78 96

116

EXAMINATION COPY REQUEST FORM

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel (65) 6863 1580 Fax (65) 6862 3354 www.mheducation.asia

u Professors/lecturers who are interested to review titles listed in this catalog for text adoption consideration, please complete this request form and fax to your local McGraw-Hill office (see inside back cover for fax number) or to McGraw-Hill Singapore. u Requests for examination copies are subject to approval. McGraw-Hill reserve the right to refuse any requests which do not relate to teaching. u Please make copies of this form if necessary.

REQUESTED BY

Name Department University Address Room #

Tel Email address

Fax

COMP REQUEST

Please indicate ISBN No, Author & Title 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Course Name Subject Decision Date Current Text Used Individual Decision Enrolment Commencement Date Group Decision

McGRAW-HILL MAILING LIST

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel (65) 6863 1580 Fax (65) 6862 3354 www.mheducation.asia

Please include me in your mailing list for information on McGraw-Hill books. Please email information on McGraw-Hill books to my email address at I am already on your mailing list but my address has changed. Please update my record to the following new address.

Name

(Mr / Ms / Dr / Prof) (Underline family name)

Position Department University Address

Postal Code Tel Email address Fax

SUBJECT OF INTEREST

o Accounting o Advertising o Business Management o Finance & Investment o Marketing o Economics o Human Resource Management o Insurance & Real Estate o Training o Computing o Aeronautical & Aerospace Engineering o Architecture & Urban Planning o Chemical Engineering o Civil Engineering o Construction o Electronics & Communications o Electrical Engineering o General Engineering

o Industrial & Plant Engineering o Mechanical Engineering o Medical Science o Dentistry o Nursing o Agriculture o Biology o Chemistry o Forestry o Geography & Geology o Physics & Astronomy o Zoology o Mathematics & Statistics o Art & Humanities o Education o English o English as a 2nd Language/ELT o Foreign Language o Health & Nutrition

o History o Law o Library Science o Mass Communication o Music o Philosophy & Religion o Physical Education o Political Science o Psychology o Sociology Please return by fax at (65) 6862 3354 to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) Singapore office.

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) respects your privacy. If you do not wish to receive further marketing information from McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), please send an email to [email protected] or write to McGraw-Hill Education (Asia), 60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775. View The McGraw-Hill Companies Customer Privacy Policy at http://www.mcgraw-hill.com/ privacy.html. For questions or to learn more about how McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) applies this policy, please contact us at the above email or postal address.

M c G R AW - H I L L E D U C A T I O N ( A S I A ) SINGAPORE

(also servicing Mauritius)

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)

60 Tuas Basin Link, Singapore 638775 Tel: (65) 6863 1580 · Customer Service Hotline: (65) 6868 8188 Fax (65) 6862 3354 eMail: [email protected] · website: www.mheducation.asia

CHINA

(Representative Office)

McGraw-Hill Education Japan

JAPAN

McGraw-Hill Int'l Enterprises, Inc

Suite 906, 9/F, SP Tower A Tsinghua Science Park No. 1, Zhongguancun East Road Haidian District Beijing 100084, P R China Tel: (86-10) 6279 0299 Fax: (86-10) 6279 0292 eMail: [email protected]

1-12-3 Kandasuda-cho Chiyoda-ku Tokyo 101-0041 Japan Tel: (81-3) 5298 7221 Fax: (81-3) 5298 7224 eMail: [email protected]

McGraw-Hill Int'l Enterprises, Inc

TAIWAN

7/F, No: 53 Bo-Ai Road Taipei 100 Taiwan Tel: (886-2) 2311 3000 Fax: (886-2) 2388 8822 eMail: [email protected]

McGraw-Hill Int'l Enterprises, Inc

HONG KONG

McGraw-Hill Korea Inc

KOREA

THAILAND

(also servicing Cambodia & Laos)

Suites 2906-10, Shell Tower Times Square 1, Matheson Street, Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel: (85-2) 2730 6640 Fax: (85-2) 2730 2085 eMail: [email protected]

3F, Ji-Woo Bldg 376-12 Seokyo-Dong Mapo-Ku Seoul 121-210, Korea Tel: (82-2) 325 2351 Fax: (82-2) 325 2371 eMail: [email protected]

McGraw-Hill Int'l Enterprises, Inc

40/27 Soi Inthamara 8 Suthisarn Road, Phayathai Bangkok 10400, Thailand Tel: (66-2) 615 6555 Fax: (66-2) 615 6515 eMail: [email protected]

INDIA

(also servicing Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nepal & Sri Lanka)

McGraw-Hill Malaysia Sdn Bhd

MALAYSIA/BRUNEI

Tata McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited

B-4, Sector 63 Distt Gautam Budh Nagar Noida, UP-201301, India Tel: (91-12) 438 3545 Fax: (91-12) 438 3401 - 403 eMail: [email protected]

No. 40, Jalan Pengacara U1/48 Temasya Industrial Park 40150 Shah Alam Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Tel: (60-3) 7627 6888 Fax: (60-3) 7627 6838 eMail: [email protected]

VIETNAM

(Representative Office) McGraw-Hill Int'l Enterprises, Inc The Nomad Offices Level 16 & 17 Gemadept Tower 6 Le Thanh Ton Street Ben Nghe Ward, District 1 Ho Chi Minh City Vietnam Tel: (84-8) 6255 6829; (84-8) 6255 6899 Fax: (84-8) 6255 6801 eMail: [email protected]

PHILIPPINES

(also servicing Guam) (Representative Office)

INDONESIA

(Appointed Agent) P T Media Global Edukasi Grand Boutique Center, Blok D-65 Jalan Mangga Dua Raya Jakarta 14430 Indonesia Tel: (62-21) 601 1963/601 1973 Fax: (62-21) 625 7245 eMail: [email protected]

McGraw-Hill Int'l Enterprises, Inc

Unit 1503, Jollibee Plaza Condominium Emerald Avenue Corner Ruby Street Ortigas Center, Pasig City 1600 Philippines Tel: (63-2) 638 5177 / 638 5178 Fax: (63-2) 638 5181 eMail: [email protected]

Preparing Students for the World That Awaits

McGraw-Hill Higher Education empowers instructors to help students succeed academically now and into the future by providing flexible, superior-quality solutions that serve the needs of instructors and students end to end - from textbooks and digital instructional content and tools to innovate subject mastery, experiential learning and assignment/ assessment solutions.

Connect.

We connect instructors and students to valuable course content and resources - and we connect instructors and students to each other - with the best traditional and digital teaching tools.

Learn.

We enable greater learning and deeper comprehension with the highest-quality tools and content that let students engage with their coursework when, where and however they learn best.

Succeed.

We provide the learning resources students need to connect success in the classroom with success in the world that awaits.

McGraw-Hill Education (Asia) 60 Tuas Basin Link Singapore 638775 Tel (65) 6863 1580 Fax (65) 6862 3354 email: [email protected] website: www.mheducation.asia

C09-000705-X

Information

127 pages

Report File (DMCA)

Our content is added by our users. We aim to remove reported files within 1 working day. Please use this link to notify us:

Report this file as copyright or inappropriate

154879


You might also be interested in

BETA
HED 2011 Math & Stats_FINAL.pdf
vol-2_issue-7